glacier national park trip itinerary

The Best Glacier National Park Itinerary From 1 to 7 Days

Glacier National Park in Montana is our favorite National Park in the US and we have been to almost all of the National Parks. It is magical, it will take your breath away, you won’t want to leave! In this post we share our 1,3, and 7 day Glacier National Park Itinerary recommendations so you can have an amazing trip.

There are so many awesome things to do in Glacier National Park we want to help you figure out what not to miss and how to see the most you can see in the time you have! From the Going To The Sun Road to Polebridge Mercantile and Bowman Lake to Many Glacier and all the best hikes in Glacier !

If you love National parks be sure to check out our National Park Road Trip ideas too!

Table of Contents

When To Visit

We highly recommend visiting Glacier National Park when the Going-to-the-Sun Road is open. This varies each year based on the weather—and there is no set date when it opens—but it is normally open starting in July through sometime in September. But always check their site for the most up to date information. You can visit the park when it is closed but you definitely miss some of the best parts!

Entry Tickets

For 2024 you will need to have entry tickets for park. Dates and times are below:

• Going To The Sun Road – May 24th – September 8th from 6am to 3pm.
• North Fork (Bowman Lake) – May 24th – September 8th from 6am to 3pm.
• Many Glacier – July 1st – September 8th from 6am to 3pm.

During these dates you will need:

• Secure your vehicle reservation
• Get your park pass or pay the entrance fee
• Have your reservation ready to scan.

**Note: Visitors with lodging, camping, or commerical activity reservations (ex. boat tours and horseback rides) can use their service reservation to access the portion of the park for which they have a reservation.

Try to get these tickets for your trip ( click here ). However if you can’t you do have another option to go out after 3pm. It is light until 9/10pm at night so you still have a lot of time to get out and do some exploring!

But ALWAYS double check their site to make sure nothing has changed. You can do that here.

How To Get To Glacier National Park

Flying into Glacier Park International Airport FCA is an option. They have a variety of daily flights (some just in season) that can work. The airport is 12 miles from Whitefish and 30 miles from the West Glacier entrance.

Click here to start to plan your Glacier Park International Airport FCA trip.

You could also take the Amtrak into Glacier . We don’t recommend this unless you are looking for a guided tour.

You can drive to Glacier. A road trip is almost always a fun time! But note if you do this you will most likely have to add on an extra day and night for travel.

Do You Need A Car For Glacier?

The short answer and our recommendation is yes. The park spreads across multiple areas and you won’t be able to see all the places we recommend without a car. There is a shuttle service in the park and tours. But a car will give you more flexibility and allow you to visit Many Glacier, Polebridge and Two Medicine.

If you are just coming in for a day you could do without – if you are good with shuttles and tours.

Driving In The Park

Don’t believe Google Map drive times. The roads are windy on the Going-to-the-Sun Road so it takes longer. And the roads to Many Glacier, Polebridge and Two Medicine are bumpy with lots of pot holes and free roam cattle.

To drive the Going-to-the-Sun Road from the west entrance to the east entrance can take approximately 2 hours without stopping (which you will most likely want to stop for pictures.) Plus there are can be animal sighting traffic jams – that can make it take even longer.

Glacier National Park Hiking

To truly explore this magnificent park you are going to want to get out and hike. If you aren’t all about hiking for miles that is OK. There are options that will work for almost anyone. But do yourself a favor and plan on doing some hiking when you visit.

Take note: Trails can be closed due to bear activity so always check with a ranger before you head out on a hike. If a trail is closed it will normally have a sign by the trail head that says closed. But we always like to confirm at the visitor center just to be sure!

Make sure to have your Bear Spray with you. We recommend buying it before you come. Or if you are flying ask at your hotel/campground to see where you can buy it in the area. The National Park normally sells it – but sometimes they run out so better to have a few options.

The Best Hikes in Glacier National Park

Glacier National Park Map

Here is a visual overview of Glacier National Park.

I Want The Glacier National Park Itinerary

@crazyfamilyadventure We fell in love with this National Park the moment we drove through the gates. The mountains, the water color, the wildlife. Nothing else compares in the US. It’s Glacier National Park in Montana and here is our list of things to do there: 🔹Drive the Going-To-The-Sun Road 🔹Visit Many Glacier 🔹Hike to Apikuni Falls 🔹Hike or take a boat to Grinnell Glacier 🔹Visit Polebridge Mercantile and Lake Bowman 🔹Visit Whitefish 🔹Go On A Rafting Trip 🔹Play at the Whitefish Mountain Resort 🔹Hike the Avalanche Lake Trail 🔹Visit Logans Pass 🔹Hike to Hidden Lake Overlook 🔹Hike the Highline Trail 🔹Look for wildlife (bear, moose, mountain goats and bighorn sheep) ➡️Comment GLACIER to get our FREE Glacier Packing List and our Full Post with all the details on Visiting Glacier National Park including where to stay, where to eat plus a bonus day trip idea! FOLLOW FOR MORE TRAVEL, FAMILY LIFE AND RVING TIPS @crazyfamilyadventure #glacier #glaciernationalpark #familytravel #visitglacier #visitmontana #nationalparks ♬ Kiss – Prince & Prince and The Revolution

If you want this itinerary in an easy to download version that you get immediate access to check out our Glacier National Park Itineraries here:

Planning a trip to Glacier? We put together a series of digital guides that take the guesswork out of planning. Stop-by-stop itineraries for making the most of 1, 3 or 7 days in Glacier National Park including where to stay, where to eat, what hikes to take and the best driving routes.

We’ve even included links for you to book your stays and buy your park passes. Everything you need in one convenient digital guide. Just download and go!

1 Day Glacier National Park Itinerary

The 1 day itinerary will take you from the West Entrance to the East Entrance on The Going To The Sun Road. This means the road has to be open in order to do complete this itinerary. It really is the top thing in Glacier so try to plan your trip around when it will be open!

If you are going when it is closed – you will have to take out the Going-To-The-Sun road parts plus Logan Pass visitor center and the things to do around there.

Breakfast: Grab something quick at your place or stop at a grocery store the night before to get breakfast and some additional snacks and water to bring with you for the day. I would also recommend packing a lunch and having that with you so you don’t have to waste time during your day going to a restaurant or paying National Park prices for food.

1st Half Of The Day

Start: West Glacier – West Entrance. (be sure to have your entrance ticket and be prepared to pay to enter Glacier – unless you have a National Park pass).

Stop 1: Agpar Visitor Center – stop here to check in with the rangers, get a map (if you didn’t when you drove in) and to take a look around.

Stop 2: Lake McDonald Lodge – stop to check out the lodge that was built in 1913 and to take in the views of the lake. They have a general store and some food if you want to grab anything while you are here.

Stop 3: Trail of the Cedars Hike – This is a great hike and almost anyone can do it since it is a boardwalk trail and is accessible for wheelchairs and strollers.

• Distance: 1 mile loop trail

Stop 3 Extra: Avalanche Lake – if you are feeling up for a more challenging hike you can continue off of the Trail of the Cedars hike and up to Avalanche Lake. The effort is well worth it for the view of the mountain lake at the end. But be prepared!

• Distance: 4.5 miles round trip (there and back trail)
• Elevation Gain: 730 feet (you are pretty much gradually climbing up the mountain the whole time).

Time for lunch – I would recommend doing a picnic lunch right at your car. Or if you didn’t want to pack a lunch you can go back to the Lake McDonald lodge are to get Pizza at Jammer Joe’s Grill and Pizzeria.

2nd Half Of The Day

Stop 4: Drive the Going-To-The-Sun Road – be prepared for this to take longer than you think it will. You are going to want to stop at every pullout to take a picture. That isn’t quite necessary. But hey this is your trip so if you want to go for it!

Tips For Driving The Stunning Going To The Sun Road

Stop 5: Logan Pass Visitor Center with the Hidden Lake Overlook hike – Stop at the visitor center (be prepared for traffic and having to drive around waiting for someone to leave to get a parking spot). In the visitor center they usually have a few displays up and Rangers there to answer questions.

There is also a gift shop. If you have the energy and time head out on the Hidden Lake Overlook hike. It is totally worth it so if you can swing it go for it!

• Distance: 2.7 miles round trip (there and back)
• Elevation gain: 1325 feet – there are a lot of steps

Stop 6: Jackson Glacier – you will continue on the Going-To-The-Sun road for about 5 miles until you reach the pullout for Jackson Glacier – be sure to put this into Google Maps and download your map before you go so you don’t miss it! Or follow the park map.

Stop 7: St Mary Falls Hike – This is a pretty short hike at just 1.6 miles there and back and the falls are beautiful. I will say if you are done hiking or can’t imaging planning this many hike sin a day – this would be the one I would skip.

• Distance: 1.6 miles round trip (there and back)
• Elevation gain: minimal

Stop 8 – Wild Goose Island Overlook – After St Mary Falls if you continue about 6 more miles you will come to the Wild Goose Island Overlook at St Mary lake. To me this is the iconic Glacier National Park view.

Dinner: St Mary Village – there is a grill, bar and cafe located in St Mary Village.

Where To Stay

At this point you can either turn around and drive back through the Going-To-The-Sun road or you can take the longer flatter route around the outside of the park back to the west entrance. Or you can plan to book a room to stay the night at the St Mary Lodge & Resort.

*We have driven the Going-To-The-Sun road at night. It is a bit scary and you have to be aware of wildlife. We came across a mama bear and her cubs on the road when it was pitch black outside! It will be slow driving and with it being dark you can’t see much. Totally your call on what way you want to drive back.

Purchase this guide in an easy to download version with maps, more details and links on where to stay here:

3 Day Glacier National Park Itinerary

If at all possible stay at least 3 days in Glacier National Park!! Our 3 day Glacier National Park itinerary starts with the same as above – if you have already read that skip to Day 2.

Day 1 Of Glacier National Park 3 Day Itinerary

Middle of the day, end of the day.

We saw a mountain goat when we hiked this trail and another time the hiking trail was closed due to bear activity! So be on the look out for wildlife.

Stop 8 – Wild Goose Island Overlook – After St Mary Falls if you continue about 6 more miles you will come to the Wild Goose Island Overlook. To me this is the iconic Glacier National Park view.

For this itinerary we would recommend you stay in the St Mary’s Village area for tonight so you can be closer to Many Glacier – where we recommend you head on Day 2.

Day 2 of 3 Day Glacier National Park Itinerary

Today you will explore the Many Glacier area. This part of the park is gorgeous so you don’t want to miss it!

Breakfast: Grab breakfast at your hotel or the local convenient store. Don’t forget snacks and water for the day!

**If you didn’t stay in St Mary’s Village area be sure to check drive times. Getting to Many Glacier from the west entrance will take you 2 1/2 to 3 hours. It can be done in a day from west Glacier – we have done it. But it is a long day and lots of driving.

Stop 1: Grinnell Glacier Hike – This is a long but unbelievable hike. If hiking isn’t your thing there is also a shuttle boat service that will take you from Many Glacier Hotel Boat Dock to Grinnell Lake. From Grinnell Lake you can hike the 3 miles round trip (there and back) trail to get to Grinnell Glacier. This is an uphill hike so be prepared for that.

The other option is to just take the Shuttle Boat to Grinnell Lake. The boat tour is beautiful and Grinnell Lake is gorgeous as well. If hiking isn’t your thing we recommend you do this.

Grinnell Glacier Hike:

• Distance: 7.2 miles round trip (there and back)
• Elevation gain: 1840 feet

2nd Part Of The Day

Lunch: Many Glacier Hotel – there a few options here for lunch. If you want to save time bring a packed lunch to eat in the parking lot.

Stop 2: Josephine Lake Horseback Riding OR Apakuni Falls. If you don’t want to hike look into doing the Horseback Riding. If you want to see an awesome waterfall up close head to the Apakuni Falls trail. Be sure to pack your bear spray!!

Apakuni Falls Hike:

• Distance: 1.7 miles round trip
• Elevation gain: 625 feet

Dinner: Nell’s at Swiftcurrent – we were pleasantly surprised with the options on the menu here including organic items, grass-fed beef options and vegetarian options.

Dessert: Swiftcurrent General Store – head into the general store to get some self-serve huckleberry or vanilla ice cream.

Head back to your hotel by St Mary’s Village or back to West Glacier. Day 3 can be done from either location.

Day 3 of Glacier National Park 3 Day Itinerary

Breakfast: Grab something quick so you can get out exploring again!

Stop 1: St Mary’s Falls – If you stayed in the St Mary’s Village area and didn’t have time to do the St Mary Falls hike on day 1 do it now! If you stayed in West Glacier skip this part.

Stop 2: Drive the Going-To-The-Sun road. Trust me when I say you will want to drive this road more than one time when you visit Glacier! It is also cool to do it from the other direction since it gives you a different perspective and views as you are driving.

Lunch: Bringing a picnic lunch will be your best bet!

Stop 3: Highline Trail Hike – this hike isn’t for everyone but if you are OK holding onto a chain while you walk along the edge of a mountain you are in for some pretty spectacular views. This trail is located across from the Logan Pass visitor center.

Round trip it is 11.8 miles. But you don’t have to do all that. When we did it we just went about 1 mile into the trail and stopped and turned around and came back.

Stop 4: Lake McDonald Beach – enjoy some quiet time as you relax on the beach and take in the beautiful views. There are a variety of pullouts you can park in off of the road and get out to walk down to the beach.

If you have a paddle board or kayak with you – you could bring those out on the water. As long as you are good with cold water.

Dinner: Great Northern Bar and Grill – head into the town of Whitefish and go the Great Northern Bar and Grill or find another restaurant that appeals to you in Whitefish.

There you have it! 3 days in Glacier National Park! If 3 isn’t enough – which we 100% believe – keep reading to find our 7 day itinerary – which can easily be adjust to be a 4 or 5 day Glacier Itinerary as well.

7 Day Glacier National Park Itinerary

Day 1: Hiking and Rafting Trip

Start: West Glacier

Stop 1: Apgar Visitor Center – stop in the visitor center, get a map, get a sticker or t-shirt, taling to the rangers to see if anything is closed or if there is anything you should be aware of. If you have kids with you do the Junior Ranger workbooks (they do have adult options too!).

2nd Half Of Day 1 of Glacier National Park Itinerary 7 Day Itinerary

Stop 4: Glacier Guide Rafting Trip – head to Montana Raft and take a rafting trip on the Flathead River! They have white water trips and nice floating trips. Be sure to book ahead!

Dinner: Great Norther Bar & Grill in Whitefish.

Day 2: Polebridge and Lake Bowman

Stop 1: Polebridge Mercantile – stop for some delicious pastries and to sit out at the picnic tables.

Stop 2: Lake Bowman – head back on a bumpy tight drive into Glacier National park and to Lake Bowman. If you have kayaks or paddle boards bring them with you. Or just hang out by the beach (make sure you brought some snacks and drinks with you!).

Visit the Magnificent Bowman Lake and Polebridge Mercantile

Lunch: You could do lunch at Lake Bowman if you brought a picnic lunch with you. Or head back to Whitefish Mountain Resort for lunch.

Stop 3: Whitefish Mountain Resort Activities – they offer a variety of summertime activities from ropes courses to an Alpine slide and more.

Whitefish Mountain Resort Summer Activities

Dinner: Downton Whitefish – pick where you want to eat!

Day 3: Going-To-The-Sun-Road

Stop 1: Drive the Going-To-The-Sun Road – be prepared for this to take longer than you think it will. You are going to want to stop at every pullout to take a picture. That isn’t quite necessary. But hey this is your trip so if you want to go for it!

Stop 2: Logan Pass Visitor Center with the Hidden Lake Overlook hike – Stop at the visitor center (be prepared for traffic and having to drive around waiting for someone to leave to get a parking spot). In the visitor center they usually have a few displays up and Rangers there to answer questions.

Stop 3: Jackson Glacier – you will continue on the Going-To-The-Sun road for about 5 miles until you reach the pullout for Jackson Glacier – be sure to put this into Google Maps and download your map before you go so you don’t miss it! Or follow the park map.

Lunch: Bring a Picnic lunch with you.

Stop 4: St Mary Falls Hike – This is a pretty short hike at just 1.6 miles there and back and the falls are beautiful. I will say if you are done hiking or can’t imaging planning this many hike sin a day – this would be the one I would skip.

Stop 5 – Wild Goose Island Overlook – After St Mary Falls if you continue about 6 more miles you will come to the Wild Goose Island Overlook. To me this is the iconic Glacier National Park view.

You can either plan to spend the night here (at a place like the Rising Sun Motor Inn) or drive back to West Glacier. Just be sure to check the time and if you are driving in the dark on the Going-To-The-Sun road be ready for it! We have done it. But it is slow going and you have to look out for wildlife. It is pitch black so you also won’t have any amazing views when driving in the dark.

Day 4: Highline Trail

Start off on the Going-To-The-Sun Road – believe me when you say you will want to do this drive as many times as you can while you are in Glacier. In our opinion it is the most beautiful road in the US!

There isn’t much recommended on this day so take your time on the Going-To-The-Sun road and stop to take pictures, to take in the scenery and to just enjoy your time on the road.

Stop 1: Highline Trail Hike – this hike isn’t for everyone but if you are OK holding onto a chain while you walk along the edge of a mountain you are in for some pretty spectacular views. This trail is located across from the Logan Pass visitor center.

Lunch: Pizza at Lake McDonald Lodge at Jammer Joe’s Grill and Pizzeria – depending on which way you drove in. Or else bring a picnic lodge to have by your car or at a picnic table.

Stop 3: Continue on the Going-To-The-Sun Road and make your way to the St. Mary Village which is located on the other side of the park.

Dinner: St. Mary Village.

For this itinerary we would recommend you stay in the St Mary’s Village area for tonight so you can be closer to Many Glacier – where we recommend you head on Day 6.

Day 5: Many Glacier

Drive to Many Glacier. If you are coming from West Glacier this will take you an extra 1 1/2 to 2 hours compared to if you stayed in the St Mary’s Village area. Base your starting time for the day off of this.

Lunch: Swiss Lounge In Many Glacier

Stop 1: Apakuni Falls – this trail will take you up close to an awesome waterfall. Be sure to pack your bear spray!!

Stop 2: Fishercap Lake to look for Moose – you can’t predict when wildlife will be around but this is a great place to be on the lookout for Moose.

Dinner: Ptarmigan Dining Room in Many Glacier Hotel

Stay in the Many Glacier area or in the St Mary Area for a shorter drive on Day 6 – that will bring you back to Many Glacier.

7 Awe Inspiring Things To Do In Many Glacier

Day 6: Grinnell Glacier

Stop 1: Heidi’s Snack Shop in Many Glacier – stop here to grab things for a picnic lunch while on the trail. They also have coffee.

Stop 2: Grinnell Glacier Hike – This is a long but unbelievable hike. If hiking isn’t your thing there is also a shuttle boat service that will take you from Many Glacier Hotel Boat Dock to Grinnell Lake. From Grinnell Lake you can hike the 3 miles round trip (there and back) trail to get to Grinnell Glacier. This is an uphill hike so be prepared for that.

The other option is to just take the Shuttle Boat to Grinnell Lake. The ride is beautiful taking you across Swiftcurrent Lake and Lake Josephine to Grinnell Lake is gorgeous as well. If hiking isn’t your thing we recommend you do this.

Stay in the Many Glacier area or in the St Mary Area for a shorter drive on Day 7.

Day 7: Two Medicine

Have a slow morning, drink some coffee, hang out for a minute. Now checkout of your hotel and head to Lunch.

Lunch: Glacier Park Lodge

Stop 1: Two Medicine – This is a lesser visited area of the park. But we always love to make sure we add these stops to our trips. Be sure to check out the views of Two Medicine Lake.

Stop 2: Aster Falls Hike – This hike provides a different landscape than other areas of Glacier. You hike through mostly forest and some meadow area.

• Distance: 2.8 miles roundtrip (there and back trail)
• Elevation gain: 320 feet

Head back to your hotel or a make a last stop at any of your favorite places in the area!

Get Your Itinerary For Glacier

Purchase this guide in an easy to download version with maps, bonus ideas, more details and links on where to stay here:

For more on where to stay, tips for the park, maps and all of this information in an easy to ready PDF that you can download to your phone check out our Glacier Guides!

If you are looking for a Glacier National Park itinerary 5 days you can pick and choose things from the 7 day itinerary to put together your perfect itinerary for Glacier National Park.

A few other places of interest may be: Waterton Lakes in Canada, the Iceberg Lake Trail in Glacier (we could never do this since it was always closed due to bear activity when we were there),

More posts you may be interested in:

6 Epic National Park Road Trip Ideas [Maps Included]

18 Top Things To Do In Yellowstone National Park

Pin This Post:

• Recent Posts

• Riding The East Fork Transit In Denali National Park - April 22, 2024
• Visiting Denali National Park With Kids - April 22, 2024
• How To Make Your RV Feel More Like Home – 5 RV Remodel Examples - April 16, 2024

DISCLOSURE : This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I get a commission if you decide to make a purchase through my links, at no cost to you. Please read my disclosure for more info.

Two incredible itineraries to explore Montana’s Glacier National Park

Jul 12, 2022 • 8 min read

Follow our three-day itinerary along the breathtaking "Going To The Sun Road" © YinYang / Getty Images

An early product of the budding American conservationist movement in the 1910s, Montana's Glacier Park is a poster child for the US National Park movement and ranks alongside the likes of Yellowstone and Yosemite as one of the United States' most awe-inspiring natural wonders.

A lone road bisects a brilliant landscape of towering crown-of-the-continent mountains laced with plunging waterfalls and glassy turquoise lakes and surrounded by dense forests. In this virtually intact pre-Columbian ecosystem grizzly bears and wolves sit at the top of the food chain, while smart park management has kept the place both accessible and authentically wild .

Exploring Glacier National Park on a three-day road trip

The majority of the Glacier’s visitors don’t stray far from the Going-to-the-Sun Road, a 50-mile-long engineering marvel and national historic landmark built in the 1930s with the express purpose of making the park’s wilderness accessible to everybody. This itinerary incorporates the road’s “greatest hits” but also burrows north and south to the hubs of Many Glacier and the Two Medicine valley.

Day 1: Driving the Going-to-the-Sun Road

Enter the park via the West Gate and proceed two miles to Apgar Village. Get your bearings at the LEED-certified Visitor Center and admire the glassy expanse of Lake MacDonald backed by the brooding peaks of the Rockies. Eddie’s Café is a good place to fuel up before the drive east.   

Arguably the most spectacular road in America, the historic Going-to-the-Sun Road starts by inauspiciously tracking the forested shores of Lake McDonald to an eponymous lodge , an obligatory pit-stop for anyone keen to get an eyeful of rustic “parkitecture” architecture. Beyond the lodge, the road begins a long ascent to Logan Pass switching back sharply at a tight bend known as “the Loop” and breaking out of the trees into sub-alpine terrain. It’s worth fighting for a parking spot at blustery 6646ft Logan Pass atop the Continental Divide where aspiring hikers can loosen their legs on the 3.2-mile round-trip Hidden Lake Overlook Trail while communing with Dall sheep, alpine flowers, and abundant species of tourist.

Subtle changes in vegetation appear as you descend on the road’s dryer eastern side. Worthwhile stops for short hikes include St Mary Falls and Sun Point – the latter offers fine views over bright-turquoise St Mary Lake. Both trails are around 1.7-miles round-trip with options to probe further into the wilderness.

Finish the day by descending to the eastern service village of St Mary with its visitor center and cluster of restaurants and accommodations.  

Day 2: Boating and hiking in the Many Glacier Valley

Load up with breakfast in the Snowgoose Grille in the St Mary Village resort before heading north to the Many Glacier Valley, a natural potpourri of verdant meadows and rippling lakes anchored by the strategically positioned Many Glacier Hotel , deftly designed by the Great Northern Railway in 1915. Revel for a while in the hotel’s gorgeous main lounge with its raised stone hearth and then sign up for a three to four-hour afternoon boat and hike tour incorporating guided excursions on both Swiftcurrent and Josephine lakes.

Afterwards, motor back to St Mary stopping at Two Sisters Café  just outside the tiny ranching community of Babb for an appetite-busting American dinner. As night closes in, roll into the Dusty Star Observatory next to the St Mary Visitor Center for a ranger-led after-dark astronomy program.  

Day 3: Experiencing East Glacier and rafting the Flathead River

Head south to the quiet Two Medicine Valley, one of the park’s less-traveled corners imbued with Native American legends and endowed with all creatures great and small. You may find yourself with ursine company as you stroll the placid shores of Two Medicine Lake. Carry bear spray and keep a safe distance.

Back in the car, set the GPS for East Glacier, a tiny railway village dominated by the illustrious Glacier Park Lodge , a triumph of early 20th century "parkitecture" where you can recline on a rocking chair and study the Native American artwork.  

Grab a coffee and sweet snack at the onsite Empire Café before driving for 60 miles along Highway 2 to West Glacier where you can liven up your afternoon with a half-day whitewater rafting trip on the Flathead River with a waterside barbecue dinner thrown in.

Author’s tip: Head north to Polebridge  

If you’ve got spare time on your hands (and a car), I strongly recommend paying a visit to Polebridge, an off-the-grid community located 27 miles up an unpaved road north of the park’s west entrance. Polebridge is a classic slice of frontier-spirit America, a quirky community of around 100 people, surrounded by nature and anchored by a 108-year-old mercantile that sells legendary huckleberry pastries.

Hike Glacier National Park without a car

This adventurous itinerary relies mostly on the excellent free national park shuttle system to get around and celebrates the park’s main raison d’être: backcountry hiking. To lighten your load, book ahead for overnight stays in the park’s two historic backcountry chalets. Bear in mind that the chalets get extremely busy and must be booked in advance. Reservations open in January. Alternatively, there are also wilderness campgrounds near both chalets. Again, book and apply for a permit in advance .

Day 1: Hiking over the Continental Divide

You’ll need to get to Many Glacier by bus for the start of this energetic itinerary. Spend the morning nosing around the historic lodge and grab a lightning-fast lunch at no nonsense ‘Nell’s , before setting off on the Swiftcurrent Pass trail. Winding for 6.8 miles through the Swiftcurrent valley, the trail ascends steeply through bear country via vertiginous switchbacks to a pass on the Continental Divide. From here, it’s another 1.2 miles to the lofty turnaround, an old fire lookout. After appreciating the vista, return to the pass and descend to the backcountry Granite Park Chalet where you can eat (freeze-dried food), drink, sleep and be merry. If it's full, you'll need to camp.

Day 2: The Highline Trail

From the chalet it’s a spectacular 7.6-mile above-the-treeline traverse to Logan Pass on the Highline Trail across the steep, flower-strewn expanses of the "Garden Wall". For an extra adrenalin rush, you can scramble up to the Grinnell Glacier Overlook on the Continental Divide (extra two miles) or carry on along the popular Hidden Lake trail (extra three miles) when you reach Logan Pass. Free park shuttles head back to civilization in Apgar Village on the Going-to-the-Sun Road every 15 minutes. Enjoy the scenery.

Day 3: Rest and relaxation in Apgar

On day three, loaf around Apgar Village and enjoy some "R 'n' R" by Lake MacDonald. Kayaks and canoes are available for rent for those who simply can’t chill. The nearby Visitor Center is the go-to place to analyze trail conditions, chat with rangers and see what free evening programs are on offer. It’s well worth strolling the two miles into West Glacier in the evening to indulge in craft beer and calorie loading steaks at the Belton Chalet Grill & Taproom .

Day 4: Sallying forth on the Gunsight Pass trail

On the morning of day 4, take the free park shuttle from Apgar, changing buses at Logan Pass and continuing down the eastern side of the continental divide to the Jackson Overlook and the start of the two-day 20-mile+ Gunsight Pass trail .     

It's a magnificent journey, most of it above the treeline, taking in lakes, alpine meadows and touch-the-sky passes topping out at 7055ft. Gunsight Pass at the 9.2-mile mark is on the Continental Divide; Lincoln Pass, three miles further on, is the trail’s highest elevation. The backcountry Sperry Chalet (13.3-miles), rebuilt after a 2017 fire, provides three proper cooked meals and overnight rest in basic private rooms or camping nearby.

Day 5: Descending from Sperry Chalet to Lake McDonald 

After a night at the Sperry Chalet, you have two options. Proceed directly down to the finish line on the shores of Lake McDonald (6.7-miles, all downhill), or incorporate a lengthy side-trip by scrambling up to the hulking but retreating Sperry Glacier (approximately seven miles extra). Ranger-led hikes are sometimes available here.  

Whichever route you choose, a post-hike beer and burger in the bar at Lucke’s Lounge in the Lake McDonald Lodge is de rigueur. From here, free park shuttles will motor you back to Apgar Village and the West Entrance.

Author’s tip: Arrive by train

The cross-continental railway was one of America’s finest but most overlooked inventions and helped open up Glacier to ordinary citizens. For me, arriving on the overnight Empire Builder train from Seattle is an integral part of the park experience. Not only is the journey magnificent, but the train drops you right in West Glacier and within walking distance of the park entrance.

Need to know

There are 13 front-country campgrounds within the park. Eight are first-come, first-served; five can be booked in advance; six are accessible to RVs; and three are open year-round. Prices range from $10 to $23 per night.

There are 65 designated walk-in backcountry campsites. A $7 permit must be procured in advance to use them.

Entrance fees

To enter the park, you must purchase a seven-day pass which costs $35/20 per car/individual.

All vehicles using the Going-to-the-Sun and North Fork roads must pre-register under a new park pilot scheme designed to reduce congestion. Reservations are available 120 days in advance and can be booked online at recreation.gov.

When to visit

The best time to visit for good weather and the widest variety of activities is between Memorial Day (late May) and Labor Day (early September). Outside these times, weather can be fickle, and many facilities are closed. However, to avoid crowds and reduce overall park congestion, shoulder season (Apr-May & Sep-Oct) is also a viable option. 

Getting there

The park is located in northwest Montana. The nearest hub town is Whitefish. The nearest airport is Glacier Park International Airport in Kalispell, 26 miles to the southwest.

Amtrak’s Empire Builder train stops close to the park’s east and west entrances with connections to Chicago and Seattle.

Explore related stories

Mar 5, 2024 • 9 min read

For such a small island, Ireland doesn’t lack for beautiful spots to visit. We’ve rounded up our favorites.

Apr 27, 2024 • 6 min read

Apr 27, 2024 • 4 min read

Apr 27, 2024 • 5 min read

Apr 27, 2024 • 8 min read

Apr 27, 2024 • 17 min read

Apr 26, 2024 • 15 min read

Apr 26, 2024 • 6 min read

Glacier National Park Itinerary for 1-2-3-4-5 Days (+Map & Tips)

By Author Jurga

Posted on Last updated: March 29, 2024

Traveling to Glacier National Park and wondering what are the main highlights, how much time you need to visit the park, and what’s the best itinerary to follow? In this post, you can find our experience-based suggestions and Glacier National Park itinerary ideas for one to five days .

Our guest writer Jessica from Bring The Kids spends a lot of time in Glacier National Park with her family and knows the park really well. In this article, she shares suggested itineraries for 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 days in Glacier National Park .

You can also find some practical information for visiting the park, learn how much time you need in Glacier NP, what kind of weather to expect, and what to know about the wildlife… And of course, we also cover the best hikes in Glacier National Park . Find out!

To make your travel planning easier, I also included detailed maps for each itinerary, indicating all the places mentioned in this article. Of course, you don’t have to follow these itineraries precisely, but it gives you a good idea of the main things to do in Glacier National Park and the time you need to see them.

Before we continue with the Glacier NP itinerary suggestions, we share some information and things to consider when planning your trip to Glacier NP . I encourage you to read this first!

Glacier NP Itinerary and Travel Tips – Overview:

• Practical info and tips for visiting Glacier NP
• 1 Day in Glacier NP
• 2 Days in Glacier NP
• 3 Days in Glacier NP
• 4 Days in Glacier NP
• 5 Days in Glacier NP

How many days do you need in Glacier National Park?

While you can see some of the main landmarks on Glacier NP in just a day or two, I suggest staying for at least 3 to 5 days to really make a Glacier National Park trip worth it.

You need to consider that if you’re driving there, Glacier NP is really far from just about anything . It’s located in northern Montana and the closest airport is in Kalispell, MT. The park borders Canada and is actually linked to Waterton National Park there. It’s closer to drive here from Calgary (6 hours drive) than from Seattle (10 hours drive).

I’m saying this not to discourage you from visiting, but to encourage you to spend more time in Glacier National Park. You won’t be disappointed! In fact, I wholeheartedly believe that Glacier is one of the most spectacular of all the National Parks in the United States. It’s well worth the far trip and your precious vacation time.

Best time to visit Glacier NP

Please note that these Glacier NP itinerary suggestions are valid for the summer months only – roughly from mid-June to mid-September.

The main thoroughfare, The Going To The Sun Road, is only open for a few months in the summer, so plan your trip accordingly. Please check the official website for more information on when the road is open . To give you an idea, in some years, the entire Going To The Sun Road only opens around the 20th of June.

You can visit the park even if the road is not open. In that case, it’s probably best to base yourself on the west side and explore that part of the park, based on what’s open at the time of your visit.

Because it is so cold here, very little of Glacier NP is open in spring, autumn, or winter. But it’s also the time when you can have the most amazing natural wonders all to yourself. Please check the official website for more practical information if planning to visit Glacier NP in the low season .

What to consider before you take a trip to Glacier National Park

Like all the best National Parks , Glacier is very popular and can get very crowded in summer. That means that you need to book your accommodation at least several months in advance . Plus, nowadays, you have to make reservations in order to drive to the most popular areas inside the park (more info further below).

Both sides of the park have lodging and camping options, but there is much more choice at the Western Entrance. Here you can find the best deals for hotels near Glacier NP .

If you are thinking of camping in Glacier NP , you should know that most areas inside the park have several first-come, first-served campground options. This means that you must arrive early in the morning and it also helps to have a good backup plan in case the campgrounds are full.

Glacier National Park borders Canada and is at a pretty high elevation, so plan for really cold temperatures , even in summer. In July when we visited, there were a few days when all my kids were wearing their winter down jackets and we even got snow at Logan Pass. That being said, we’ve also had scorching hot weather on other trips where we were jumping into every possible body of water.

So when visiting Glacier National Park, you really have to be prepared for all kinds of weather!

What is the best way to see Glacier National Park?

The best way to see Glacier is by driving + hiking . Unlike other parks like Yellowstone or Arches where you can see a lot of the park just by driving, that isn’t the case here, so you’ll have to walk. But it sure is easier to get to the hiking trails if you have your own car and are not reliant on the shuttle bus availability and schedule.

Alternatively, you can opt to take Glacier’s shuttle , but I would only advise this option if you have at least several days to spend in the park.

Make sure that you have sturdy hiking shoes that are well broken in before your trip and are in good enough shape to hike several miles a day to get maximum enjoyment.

If you’re coming from a much lower altitude, remember to take it easy the first few days and to drink lots of water to avoid altitude sickness. Pack a good reusable water bottle and fill it up on every occasion.

What are the main areas of Glacier National Park?

When you are considering driving through Glacier National Park, your one real option is the Going To The Sun Road . Only open for a few months a year, this is the main way to connect the East and West Entrances of the park where a majority of the sites and amenities are.

The East Entrance is made popular by St Mary Lake and the Western Entrance is right next to Lake McDonald .

The other main areas of Glacier NP are Many Glacier and Two Medicine on the East side, as well as Pole Bridge on the northwestern side.

Where to stay in or near Glacier National Park

In our itineraries below, we have specific suggestions for the best accommodations that suit that specific itinerary best.

If you want to stay inside the park and can get a reservation, Lake McDonald Lodge is the best option on the western side, and St. Mary Lodge – on the eastern side.

TIP: Using the map below, you can compare hotels and short-term rental accommodations near Glacier National Park . Simply insert your travel dates and group size, and you’ll see what’s available for your stay. Check it out!

Do I need to be worried about bears in Glacier National Park?

Bears are very active in and around Glacier National Park. While you are out hiking and camping, it’s important to exercise caution. I always carry bear spray with me and make sure that it’s easily accessible in the water bottle holder of my backpack, in case of an emergency.

We also make sure that we are making enough noise so that animals know we are coming and we don’t startle them. Truthfully, with 5 kids we make plenty of noise everywhere we go. We’ve never encountered a bear while we are out hiking in Glacier NP, but we’ve met many people hiking just a little ahead or behind us who have seen bears.

On our last trip to Glacier NP, we saw 11 bears from the car and one bear walked through our campground during dinner time. So you always have to be alert and aware.

Glacier NP entrance fees, passes & reservations

If visiting Glacier National Park in the summer, you have to make reservations in order to drive to the most popular areas. Between the end of May to mid-September: Going-to-the-Sun Road and the North Fork; from July to mid-September also Two Medicine and Many Glacier. This applies to anyone traveling by vehicle from 6 am to 3 pm. For more information and reservations, see here .

In addition, you also need to pay to enter the park. Just like most American National Parks, Glacier offers several ticket options . You can get a 7-day pass for 35 USD per vehicle/family or a yearly pass for 70 USD.

Alternatively, get America the Beautiful annual pass . It is by far the best option if you are visiting several National Parks in the same year.

TIP: If you are looking for ideas for other great National Parks to visit not too far from Glacier, please check our suggestions for Yellowstone itinerary, as well as things to do in Grand Teton NP in one day . Many people also combine a trip to Glacier National Park with both, Yellowstone and Grand Teton .

Without further ado, here are our itinerary suggestions for visiting Glacier National Park:

1 Day in Glacier National Park

If you only have one day in Glacier National Park , you are going to need to pack as much in as you possibly can. Expect this to be a VERY LONG DAY with lots of time in transit, so that you can see as much of the park as possible.

The best way to do one day in Glacier is to start at the East Entrance and work your way over the Going To The Sun Road towards the West Entrance. However, accommodation options are really limited on that side of the park. You could also stay on the west side; it just means you’ll have to do a bit more driving in the morning.

During the summer months, Going To The Sun Road is packed and parking is very limited up at the top of Logan Pass. It’s horrible to get all the way up there to then find out that you can’t find a place to park. To avoid this, I recommend starting your day in Glacier NP very early.

Plan on starting your day no later than 7 am. While you will see lots of beautiful sights along the Going To The Sun Road, your goal is to make it to the top of Logan Pass first.

I suggest to try and limit your stops and just drive to Logan Pass. Afterwards, you will come back and see a few things along the road, but trust me on this one – start at the top first.

Once you get up to the top of Logan Pass, head into the visitors center and learn a bit about the local plants and animals, as well as the park’s history.

• Hidden Lake Overlook

From there, you have a couple of options.

The best thing to do is to head west on the trail up the mountain to the Hidden Lake Overlook for a 2.7-mile round-trip hike.

Along the way, you’ll find spectacular views, a few small waterfalls, plenty of wildflowers, and almost always some mountain goats.

St Mary Falls

After you are done at Logan Pass, head back east (yes, where you came from) to the pullout for St Mary Falls .

It’s located about 6.5 miles back down the mountain. Parking can occasionally fill up here as well, but it’s not nearly as crazy as Logan Pass, which is why we recommend visiting them in this order.

From here, you can take a short 1.7-mile hike to see St Mary Falls. The highlight of this hike is a raging double waterfall. Sadly, due to fires in recent years, a good portion of this hike is through former burn areas. Luckily, this usually means good wildflower spotting along the trail.

• Going To The Sun Road

Next in your whirlwind day, you’ll keep heading west over Going To The Sun Road. As you cross over the summit of Logan Pass, you’ll have jaw-dropping views of the west side of Glacier National Park .

From the road, you’ll see several waterfalls that have observation pullouts near them. Plan on pulling out at several of these and taking in the views.

Once you get down into the valley, you won’t be able to see as much because you’ll be surrounded by vegetation.

• Avalanche Lake and Trail of the Cedars

As you head west, 15.5 miles from Logan Pass, you will reach the pullout for Avalanche Lake and Trail of the Cedars .

Trail of the Cedars is a scenic trail that’s mostly on a boardwalk and is suitable for anyone, including wheelchairs and strollers. Along this 1 mile hike, you’ll be surrounded by giant cedars, with some as tall as 100 feet.

The trail crosses over Avalanche Creek with great views of the gorge above and then loops around in the direction of the Avalanche Creek campground.

• Lake McDonald

Finish off your day at Glacier NP watching the sunset over Lake McDonald . This is something you should do at least once, no matter how long your Glacier vacation is.

Accommodation. Stay in West Glacier . Or, if you can get a reservation, at the Lake McDonald Lodge , which is one of the best places to stay in Glacier National Park!

To summarize, here is how your day in Glacier National Park could look like

One Day Glacier National Park Itinerary:

• St Marry Falls

Below you can see the map indicating all the places mentioned in this one day Glacier NP itinerary.

How to use this map:  Use your computer mouse (or fingers) to zoom in or out. Click on the icons to get more information about each place. Click the arrow on the top left corner for the index. Click the star next to the map’s title to add it to your Google Maps account. To view the saved map on your smartphone or PC, open Google Maps, click the menu and go to ‘Your Places’/’Maps’. If you want to print the map or see it in a bigger window, click on ‘View larger map’ in the top right corner.

2 Days in Glacier National Park

If you have two days in Glacier National Park , plan on spending one day on each side of the park. Below is our suggested itinerary for the best way to see Glacier NP in two days.

Here’s what your two days Glacier National Park itinerary could look like:

Day 1: East Glacier

Start your day by heading up to Logan Pass and hiking to the Hidden Lake Overlook , as described in the one day itinerary above. After you finish your hike, walk north of the visitors center and cross the Going To The Sun Road and stroll around looking for bighorn sheep. There are a few small herds that hang out in this area right at the top of the summit.

Head back down east and hike to St. Marys Falls and Virginia Falls . The trail is almost 1.5 miles to St Mary’s Falls and then an additional mile to Virginia Falls.

Travel all the way over to the west side of the park, watch the sunset over Lake McDonald . and stay the night there.

Accommodation. If you are booking long in advance, try Lake McDonald Lodge , if you are camping – Avalanche Creek Campground (first come, first served). Alternatively, you’ll find a somewhat bigger choice of accommodation at West Glacier or Coram , just outside the park.

Day 2: West Glacier

Start your day with a hike through the Trail of the Cedars and then on up to Avalanche Lake . The trail is about 4.5 miles and a good portion of it is right along Avalanche Creek, which makes the scenery absolutely amazing. This trail is very well-traveled, so the earlier you come here, the less crowded it will be.

Next, head towards John’s Lake Loop where you’ll get some great river and waterfall/cascade views. It’s an easy short hike – perfect for families with kids as well.

Finish off your day by heading into the town of West Glacier for any- and everything huckleberry (pies, shakes, ice cream, candy…they’ve got it all!)

Accommodation. Same as the previous night.

Here is a map indicating things to do in Glacier NP in two days.

3 Days in Glacier National Park

Spending three days in Glacier National Park will give you time to get a bit off the beaten path and discover some of the hidden gems that make this park so spectacular.

If you have three days in Glacier NP, I suggest you follow our 2-day itinerary as described above, but start with West Glacier first. Below is our suggested three-day Glacier NP itinerary.

Here’s what your three days Glacier National Park itinerary could look like:

Day 1: West Glacier

John’s Lake Loop, Trail of the Cedars and Avalanche Lake. Watch the sunset over Lake McDonald . See the second day in the 2-day itinerary for more details.

Accommodation. Stay in West Glacier or at Lake McDonald Lodge .

Day 2: East Glacier

Start out early in the day so you can make it up to Logan Pass and still find parking. You should try to start your day by 7 am.

Hike to Hidden Lake Overlook . Alternatively, if you want more challenge, you can hike all the way down to Hidden Lake (5.5 miles round trip).

Head east to Rising Sun and take a boat ride out on Saint Mary Lake . The boat will dock at the end of the lake so you can quickly hike up to St Mary’s Falls and Baring Falls , and/or Virginia Falls .

Accommodation . Stay 2 nights at the east side of Glacier NP. Keep in mind, that accommodation options at this side of the park are very limited. St. Mary Lodge has the best location, if you can get a room. Alternatively, you can also try East Glacier .

Day 3: Many Glacier

Many Glacier is also located at the east side of Glacier NP, but getting there will take some time. Count about 45 minutes driving time from St. Mary or 1,5 hrs from East Glacier. Once you turn off the highway towards Many Glacier, the road is often very bad with lots of ruts and potholes. 4×4 hasn’t been necessary when we traveled there, but you’ll have to drive really slow here.

From Many Glacier, the two best hikes you can choose from are Iceberg Lake (9.7 miles RT) and Grinnell Glacier (7.6 miles RT).

Iceberg is the more strenuous of the two hikes. The hike to Grinnell Glacier can be significantly shortened by taking the ferry across Swiftcurrent Lake and Lake Josephine . The Hike to Grinnell Glacier is alongside water most of the time, so make sure to take bug spray as the mosquitoes can get really bad.

Once you get back, head in the general store at the Many Glacier base area and grab some Huckleberry soft serve ice cream.

Below you can see the map, indicating things to do in Glacier National Park in three days.

4 Days in Glacier National Park

If you have 4 days to spend in Glacier National Park , you can see so many of the different parts of the park and understand what makes this park so amazing. Since Glacier is so spread out, 4 days is really the minimum that you need in order to see all four major areas.

3 days of this itinerary are the same as the three-day Glacier NP itinerary described above, but I suggest a bit different order. Find out!

Here’s how your four days Glacier National Park itinerary could look like:

John’s Lake Loop, Trail of the Cedars and Avalanche Lake. Lake McDonald . See the second day in the 2-day itinerary for more details.

Logan Pass, Hike Hidden Lake Overlook or all the way down to Hidden Lake for more of a challenge. St Mary’s Falls by either hiking or taking the boat from Rising Sun. Baring Falls . See the second day in the 3-day itinerary above for more info.

Accommodation . Stay in St. Mary or East Glacier for 3 nights. There are campgrounds available on this side of the park as well.

Day 3: Two Medicine Lake

Hike to Aster Falls for a simple easy hike to see the waterfalls (3 miles roundtrip).

Rent a boat at Two Medicine Lake and paddle around. Canoes, rowboats, and small motorboats are all available to rent.

End your day at Two Medicine with huckleberry ice cream at the general store.

Day 4: Many Glacier

At Many Glacier, consider hiking up to Iceberg Lake or to Grinnell Glacier and Grinnell Lake . Both of these hikes will take a good portion of your day.

If you have extra time or are looking for a break from hiking, rent boats at Swiftcurrent Lake and paddle around. Canoes, kayaks, and rowboats are all available to rent.

Below you can find a map indicating what to see and do in Glacier in four days.

5 Days in Glacier National Park

If you have five days in Glacier National Park , you can see all the major areas mentioned above. In addition, you also have time to tackle one of the most spectacular hikes in the park – the Highline trail .

Now, I’ll be honest – this trail is not for the faint of heart. It’s narrow and is carved into the edge of a cliff for the first half mile or so. If you have a fear of heights like I do, it will feel like ten miles. I found it quite scary, but my kids and husband have all declared it one of the coolest hikes that they’ve ever done.

Since most of these places have already been described above, here is just a short itinerary on how you could spend five days in Glacier National Park.

Here’s how your five days Glacier National Park itinerary could look like:

Day 1: Many Glacier

Iceberg Lake or Grinnell Glacier/Grinnell Lake .

Accommodation . Stay in the East Glacier area for 3 nights. Try St. Mary or East Glacier . There are several campgrounds available on this side of the park as well.

Day 2: Two Medicine

Hike to Aster Falls or up to No Name Lake . Paddle around Two Medicine Lake on a rented boat or take a guided boat tour across the lake.

Day 3: East Glacier

Head up the Going To The Sun Road to Logan Pass (leave early or plan on taking the shuttle) and hike to Hidden Lake or the Hidden Lake Overlook Trail . Hike to St Mary’s Falls and Virginia Falls. See 2-day itinerary for more information.

Day 4: The Highline Trail

Pack up early from East Glacier and head towards Logan Pass by 7 am. Park at Logan Pass or continue down the west side to the parking area for The Loop. Take the free shuttle back up to the pass and hike the Highline Trail .

The hike ends at the Loop, so it’s easy if your car is already there. Otherwise, you’ll have to take the shuttle back to Logan Pass.

As I mentioned above, this trail is not for the faint of heart, as the cliffside trail drops off over 100 feet. However, despite the crazy path, this trail will undoubtedly give you some of the best views in all of Glacier National Park. The trail is highly traveled and is over 13 miles long, ending down at The Loop pullout in West Glacier.

After a long day of hiking, spend the night in West Glacier.

Accommodation . Stay in West Glacier or at Lake McDonald Lodge for 2 nights.

Day 5: West Glacier

Hike the Trail of Cedars to Avalanche Lake and John’s Lake Loop . Head over to Lake McDonald Lodge and rent a paddleboard to paddle around the lake for a couple of hours. Watch the sunset from Lake McDonald Lodge over the lake.

Below you can see the map of this suggested 5-day Glacier National Park itinerary.

Glacier NP itinerary – a final word

So, these are our itinerary suggestions for how to see the best of Glacier National Park in 1 to 5 days . As you can tell, there is really a lot to see and do in Glacier National Park.

Obviously, there is so much more to this park than I have covered in this post. But after several trips to Glacier NP with our family, these are the areas and hikes that we keep being drawn to do over and over again.

If you can stay in Glacier longer, do it! The park is really big and every area has so much to offer. The more time you have, the more you can experience, and you can also take more time to really enjoy each place. Rent a boat, watch a sunset, and enjoy your vacation in Glacier NP!

READ ALSO: Yellowstone & Grand Teton Itinerary

While you can see the main landmarks on Glacier National Park in just one or two days, 3 days is really the minimum in order to explore several of the nicest areas. We recommend staying for 3 to 5 days to really make a Glacier National Park trip worth it.

What is the best time to visit Glacier National Park?

The best time to visit Glacier National Park is in summer, between July and mid-September. That’s when the main road through the park – Going-to-the-Sun Road – is reliably open and you can explore the park to the fullest.

What should you not miss in Glacier National Park?

When visiting Glacier National Park, don’t miss the Going-to-the-Sun Road and Logan Pass. Also Hidden Lake Overlook and Lake McDonald are must-see. Swiftcurrent Lake at Many Glacier is also very nice and easy to visit without having to hike.

More travel inspiration for National Parks (USA):

• Best things to do in Yellowstone
• Grand Teton – Yellowstone itinerary
• Yosemite travel tips
• Best things to do in Death Valley National Park
• Rocky Mountain National Park itinerary
• Olympic National Park itinerary
• Acadia National Park itinerary
• Yellowstone National Park itinerary
• Best things to do in Arches National Park
• Best things to do in Canyonlands National Park
• Best hikes in Zion National Park

If you found this post helpful, don’t forget to bookmark it and share it with your friends. Are you on Pinterest? Pin this image!

Image credits: Jessica from Bring The Kids + Pixabay & Unsplash

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed .

Saturday 3rd of February 2024

We’re looking at the 5 day itinerary but we are also wanting to go white water rafting & horse back riding - where (in the itinerary) would you suggest we do this? We are also interested in Whitefish and doing the scenic lift, alpine slide, and zip lining. Where do you suggest we fit that in with the 5 day itinerary?

Sunday 4th of February 2024

Hi Cassie, most rafting tours start at West Glacier, so you could do it either on day 4 or 5 of this itinerary (depending on which other plans you have and which hikes you actually decide to do). For example, this highly-rated whitewater rafting tour takes about 2,5 hours and has two departures in the high season - in the morning and in the afternoon. You could easily do it on day 5. I'm not sure about horse riding - you'll have to check where you can find it and see how to fit it in. Whitefish could be an additional day at the end of this itinerary, or you would have to take something else out if you only have 5 days in total. Hope this helps.

Friday 26th of August 2022

Hi, thank you for the very thorough article, its very helpful. We will be spending 5 days in Glacier, staying in Kalispell, but we are going early June so Going to the Sun road will probably be closed. I think that means Logan Pass is out. Do you have suggestions on what to do if the road is closed? I'm assuming a few days on one side, and a few days on the other, but I don't know how easy or how long it takes to get from one side to the other if Going to the Sun road is closed.

Thanks in advance!

Tuesday 30th of August 2022

Hi Tim, you can use Google Maps to plan your trip. The info is usually pretty accurate. From what I see, the driving time via Hwy 2 between Kalispell and e.g. East Glacier Park Village is about 1 hour 40 minutes (see the map here). If you want to explore both sides of the park at this time of the year, the best thing to do is to stay at two different accommodations - one on each side of the park - for a few days each. This would limit the driving significantly. As for what to do, pick the places/ hikes/ activities that interest you the most. There's a lot of info in our guide above, but you always have to remain flexible if some road or a hike wouldn't be open yet. I'd make a preliminary plan with some extra options and then decide based on the weather/ what's open.

Saturday 4th of June 2022

Hi Jurga, The research I'm doing says that the shuttles don't start operating until 9am on the west side. So should we still plan to arrive by 7am and park at the parking area for The Loop. Wouldn't we be waiting around for a long time to get the shuttle to the trail head at Logan Pass? Fyi we're coming from Lake McDonald Lodge. Thank you!

Monday 6th of June 2022

Hi Jennifer, if you are planning to take a shuttle, you should be able to find all the official info here. If you're going to Logan Pass, there are direct shuttles earlier in the morning already. I see that there's an 'express' shuttle from the west side (Apgar Visitor Center) to Logan Pass at 7am. So if you want to avoid the biggest crowds, I'd start early. You can then visit other places along the shuttle route later in the day.

MaryAnn Iannuccillo

Thursday 28th of April 2022

We will be driving to Glacier NP from Calgary and want to spend 3 days then head to Banff/Jasper. Do you suggest we stay on the East Side of GNP or stay torward the Middle of the park to minimize the driving time when we head to Banff? Thank you!

Friday 29th of April 2022

Hi MaryAnn, the shortest route from Glacier NP to Calgary is from the eastern side - from Saint Mary it's just a bit over 3 hours drive. So this would be a good place to stay before you drive up to Canada. For the rest, it depends on your overall plans in Glacier, plus the availability of accommodations for your travel dates. I'd book asap if you are traveling this summer!

Sunday 27th of February 2022

Hello Jurga, Back at your wonderful site planning our next trip. One question - what lake is that in the picture at the top of the page? Thanks as always!

Monday 7th of March 2022

Hi Bodie, I honestly don't know more than that it's taken on a very remote and hard hike in Glacier NP, so not something you can easily access.

The Best of Glacier NP: An Action-Packed 4-Day Itinerary

• Updated: 04/08/2024

Are you considering a trip to Glacier National Park? With its rugged mountains, crystal-clear alpine lakes, and abundant wildlife, this national park offers an unforgettable experience for outdoor lovers. We recently visited this Montana gem of a national park with our teen daughter (our son was on another trip)—spending four days seeing its main attractions, including the iconic Going-to-the-Sun Road, stunning hiking trails, and scenic boat rides. 

Our 4-day itinerary will make you want to slip on your hiking shoes, grab your camera, and explore the best of Glacier National Park. From high-altitude vistas to pretty waterfalls, I share awe-inspiring sights and helpful tips on planning your best trip.

17 essential tips to plan Your best Glacier National Park visit.

I have tried to get to this crown jewel of national parks three times over many years. Expensive airfare, high-priced car rentals, or the lack of lodging availability have always tripped me up. Fortunately, the third time was a charm. Planned six months before the trip, we finally made it to Glacier National Park for a summer visit.

Based on our experience, I share 17 essential things you will want to know before you visit this park. It is a comprehensive overview of all the before-you-go info I wish I had before our trip. From the best times to visit to how to get around the park to where to stay , plus much more, this resource will help give you a jump start on your trip planning, ensuring an incredible visit.

4 days in Glacier National Park: an at-a-glance overview.

Our on-the-ground time in Glacier was four nights and technically five days, giving us time to experience traditional park activities over three full and two half days. 

See an at-a-glance overview of how we spent our visit below. Click each day for more details.

• Day 1: Arrive, get oriented, and check-in .
• Day 2: Hike the combined Avalanche Lake trail and Trail of the Cedars trails. Drive the Going-to-the-Sun Road .
• Day 3: Hike the St. Mary and Virginia Falls trail. Take a Two Medicine Lake boat ride to hike the Twin Falls trail .
• Day 4: Drive to Many Glacier for a scenic boat ride. Hike the Grinnell Glacier Trail via the Lake Josephine boat dock .
• Day 5: Check out. Stop in West Glacier to shop for souvenirs before driving to Missoula .

Would you like a printable version of this itinerary ? Jump here . See where we went on the map below.

How to use this map:  In the map header, click the square tab to the left of my logo or click the enlarge frame to the right to view detail. You can save the map to “Your Places” on Google Maps by clicking the star next to the map name. Or you can share it by clicking the share icon.

Day 1: Arrival and West Glacier.

Here are the highlights of the first day of our Glacier National Park trip. 

• Land at Glacier Park International Airport (FCA) in Kalispell, Montana.
• Pick up our airport rental car and drive 26 miles to West Glacier. 
• Lunch at Glacier Highland Restaurant—get the pie!
• Get our seven-day park pass and talk with a ranger at the Apgar Visitor Center.
• Check into our room at The Great Bear Inn .
• Back to West Glacier for groceries. Dinner at Lake McDonald Lodge.

After many years of trying to make it to Glacier National Park, I was thrilled to finally touch down at the Glacier Park International Airport (FCA) on our direct flight from Chicago.

The small airport, only a 35-minute drive from the West Glacier park entrance, is easy to navigate, making for a smooth first leg of the trip. Once we grabbed our luggage—we are a checked bag family—mainly to bring loads of our preferred brand of sunscreen , we headed to the rental car trailer to grab our pre-booked rental. 

Rental cars in Glacier are pricey due to low stock and high demand during a short season. Expect vehicles to cost between $100 and $200+ a day. If you plan to rent, I recommend requoting your reserved rental price before your trip. I did this and shaved hundreds of dollars off our initial quote. I share where to get the best rental quotes and other money-saving car rental tips in this article .

Sign up for my monthly Discovery Newsletter & get a free Trip Budget Calculator !

After driving the 35 minutes to West Glacier, we stopped at the Glacier Highland Restaurant for lunch. Given it was a gorgeous blue sky Montana summer day, we grabbed a table on their sunny outdoor patio ringed by flowers and cooled by misting machines. It was the perfect way to kick off our trip. 

At the Glacier Highland, expect elevated American-style pub fare of sandwiches and pizzas. We ate a solid black bean burger and a Greek salad for lunch. However, the star that shines brightest at the Glacier Highland is not the veggie burger—it is the lovingly homemade pie. 

We chose a slice of the huckleberry and lemon cream pie. It would be my first taste of huckleberry, a cross between blueberry and cranberry. The berry grows prolifically wild in the summers in Montana, and I was dying to try it.

And happily, reality exceeded expectations by a lot. If this pie is still on the Glacier Highland Restaurant menu when you visit, I highly recommend getting it. It was one of the best light pies I have ever had. The fluffy huckleberry filling towered over a thin layer of lemon curd, sitting on a perfectly flaky crust and topped with creamy and whole whipped cream. Every bite was a tangy, sweet, and creamy triumph. I can still savor its taste as I write about it. 

Fully satisfied with our al fresco meal, we drove a short distance into the park, stopping at the ranger gate to purchase our 7-day pass. Although we had pre-booked an entrance reservation allowing us access to the West Glacier entrance, we did not need it as we arrived shortly after 3 PM, when this popular western entrance re-opens to all traffic.

From there, we headed to the nearby Apgar Visitor Center to talk to a ranger and get advice on the best hikes for our family. And recommendations for the best ways to get around the park and make the most of our visit. After, we made a pit stop in West Glacier for essentials, like bear spray, an affordable cooler made of recycled materials, and picnic and snack items at the West Glacier Mercantile. 

Supplied, fed, and informed, our next stop was our lodging—checking into The Great Bear Inn .

About a 15-minute drive from the West Glacier entrance, this attractive lodge-style deluxe bed and breakfast with four rooms and two cabins is owned and run by a kind Montana couple, Bunny and Larry, year-round. The inn is on a large rolling property with beautiful views. 

Why did we stay outside Glacier National Park? Because much of the high-demand in-park lodging books up 13 months in advance. And we did not plan our trip that far ahead. Learn more about all in-park options in this comprehensive guide .

At The Great Bear Inn, we stayed in the Trail of the Cedars room with a view of the mountains. Our ensuite double room had two log-hewn frame queen beds and ample space, with a mountain decor.  See a quick tour of the inn below.

For dinner, we drove back into the park, following the road from West Glacier for 10 miles to reach Lake McDonald Lodge. This move was a bit of a whoops. 

The road was under construction and dusty, making it hard to see, and the ride was too long at the end of an already lengthy day. Because we did not feel like waiting for a table in the lodge’s fine dining room, we ordered an average pizza at super touristy Jammer Joes on the Lake McDonald Lodge property. 

In hindsight, we would have been better off grabbing a quick bite to eat closer to West Glacier or Apgar. However, the nice thing was it stayed light until nearly 10 PM, giving us plenty of daylight to find our way back to our inn. Dining options are not plenty inside or around Glacier National Park. Check out this complete where-to-eat guide to learn more.

Day 2: Avalanche Lake and the Going-to-the-Sun Road.

Here are the highlights of our first full day enjoying Glacier National Park. 

• Breakfast: Early wake-up and complimentary breakfast at The Great Bear Inn.
• Arrive at Avalanche Lake trailhead parking area by 7:30 AM.
• Hike the 5.9-mile Avalanche Lake trail combined with the Trail of the Cedars .
• Lunch: Picnic at tables next to the Avalanche Lake parking area.
• Drive the Going-to-the-Sun Road.
• Turn around at the Rising Sun area. Get snacks and use the restroom.
• Errands: Stop in West Glacier for groceries, snacks, and souvenirs. 
• Dinner: On the patio at the Belton Chalet.

After a comfortable night of sleep in our peaceful room at The Great Bear Inn, we woke early to enjoy a hot breakfast included in our stay. Finding it difficult not to overeat on many good options, we enjoyed huckleberry pancakes, biscuits and gravy, scrambled eggs, and muffins. Clearly—we were fueling up before a morning of hiking.

Driving through the West Glacier Park entrance around 6:45 AM, using our pre-booked reservation to enter, we made it to the Avalanche Lake trailhead parking area by 7:30 AM. It was already filling fast, and we felt lucky to get a space.

To explore Glacier, we drove our car. However, we found parking a pain. From 8 AM to 4 PM, spaces were difficult, if not impossible, to get when we needed them. If you are visiting in-season, to avoid this parking hassle, consider taking advantage of the free Glacier shuttle to get around. Or join for a guided tour . I share more information about shuttle dates of operation, route maps, and more in this planning tips article .

Once parked and with our daypacks ready, we hit the 5.9-mile out-and-back Avalanche Lake trail , enjoying its steady climb (a total 757-foot elevation gain) along this moderately strenuous route.

We loved this walk through the woods that paralleled streams and small waterfalls, eventually opening to beautiful views of Avalanche Lake. From its rocky shores, we marveled at the wild alpine surroundings reflected in the calm and sparkling lake waters.

After following the path around the southwest shore, we enjoyed a snack on one of several rocky beaches before heading back via a short detour on the .9-mile interpretive Trail of the Cedars loop . 

A special note for hikers seeking peace and tranquility in nature—Avalanche Lake and Trail of the Cedars are busy trails, especially after 9 AM. If you are looking for more outdoor serenity, arrive to hike this trail early. Or later, after 5 PM. Since the sun rises in Glacier around 5 AM and sets around 10 PM in early July, you may have lots of daylight to work with.

With our hike wrapped up and back at our car, we grabbed our cooler to enjoy a picnic lunch at a nearby table. When done, and after giving our parking to a grateful family patiently waiting for a space, we set out to drive the most iconic highlight of the park—the Going-to-the-Sun Road. 

The hype on this 50-mile engineering marvel of a road is well deserved. It is gorgeous. As you ascend, following the switchbacks towards its highest point at Logan Pass, the views become increasingly awe-inspiring, with every turn divulging a new vista of towering mountains or a cascading waterfall.

Is it nerve-wracking to drive the Going-to-the-Sun Road ? I share my thoughts in this article .

When driving it, we stopped just past the Weeping Wall, finding an open space adjacent to the Paradise Meadow pullout, a great place to stop. Not only is the view overlooking the meadow stunning but there is a convenient bathroom and high parking turnover. Plus, you can take a short walk to gain more height.

After this stop, we hoped to find a parking space at Logan Pass and hike the 5.1-mile out-and-back Hidden Lake trail . Unfortunately—no such luck. Instead, we drove on, pulling into the Jackson Glacier overlook to stretch our legs and take photos. From here, we continued east to the Rising Sun General Store and Motor Inn, where we stopped for ice cream treats and the bathroom before turning around to catch the jaw-dropping road views from a new direction.

After a quick pit stop in West Glacier for groceries and gas—we returned to our inn . Once there, we enjoyed a well-earned rest, soaking in a great first day before cleaning up and heading back to West Glacier and the Belton Chalet for dinner. 

Although we loved our dinner at the Belton Chalet —gourmet and inventive American West lodge fare served in a rustic and historic environment—I got sticker shock from the prices, which I found closer to downtown Chicago trendy dining versus backcountry upscale pub fare. This surprise was on me for not doing adequate research or even closely looking at the menu before eating.

So, once we decided to stay and avoid that restaurant slink-out-of-your-seat shame—keeping in mind the options for dining out in West Glacier are few—we leaned in and thoroughly enjoyed our alfresco and gourmet meal in the still bright evening sun on the restaurant’s wraparound deck. My favorite dish was the blistered shishito peppers appetizer—perfectly charred peppers paired with a paprika dipping sauce. For mains, our daughter got a ribeye, I ordered the bison meatloaf, and my husband chose the trout, making for an entirely satisfying, albeit expensive, end to an excellent first day.

Day 3: St. Mary and Virginia Falls and Two Medicine.

Here are the highlights of our second full day enjoying Glacier National Park. 

• Breakfast: Early wake-up and included breakfast at the Great Bear Inn.
• Arrive at St. Mary and Virginia Falls trailhead parking area by 8:15 AM.
• Hike the 3.1-mile out-and-back St. Mary and Virginia Falls trail .
• Drive to the Two Medicine entrance for our pre-booked boat ride and hike.
• Lunch: Picnic at Two Medicine Lake on a bench.
• Join our 1 PM scenic boat ride across Two Medicine Lake.
• Hike the 2.3-mile out-and-back Twin Falls trail from the west end boat dock.
• Return to the inn for rest and shower.
• Dinner: Glacier Highland Restaurant. 
• Errands: More gas and groceries in West Glacier. 

After a successful first full day in Glacier, we were ready to make the most of another day in this gorgeous park. Up early again, indulging in a full hot meal of breakfast burritos, waffles, eggs, muffins, and fruit, we headed into the park directly to Logan Pass. We hoped to get a parking space to hike the upper section of the Hidden Lake trail, given the lower section had been closed to bear activity.

Will you see bears at Glacier? The likelihood is high. We never did, but we came close (missed by five minutes on a trail). And we were fully prepared with bear spray and safety knowledge in case we did. Learn more about bear safety in my Glacier planning tips article here .

Arriving just before 7:45 AM, we learned this was way too late. Getting there closer to 6 or 6:30 AM would have given us a better shot. The main and overflow Logan Pass lots were packed and busy with cars like ours circling in vain for an empty space. And spoiler, during our full three days in the park, we sadly, and much to my deep regret, never could find available parking here to do this hike. A definite reason to come back.

So, employing plan B, we decided to drive 7 miles further east to the St. Mary and Virginia Falls trailhead . The tiny lot here was also full. However, hoping for the best, we hung in our car, waiting for early morning hikers to return. Luck was on our side. After a 10-minute wait, hikers returned, and we took their space, setting off to experience this 3.1-mile out-and-back moderately challenging waterfall trail. 

There is no denying driving and trying to find a parking space in Glacier National Park during the height of the summer season is rough. I talk more about it in this planning tips article and share alternative ways to get around the park .

Although the initial landscape of this hike, clustering around the St. Mary River, shows the signs of the 2015 fire, this is a beautiful hike. Shortly after the viewing bridge fronting thundering St. Mary Falls, the trail climbs into a healthy forest unaffected by the burn. 

Along the way, we stopped at one of many rocky spots adjacent to Virginia Creek to explore the rushing water tumbling down from the higher-up falls—perfect places for a rest or picnic.

Reaching the trail summit is a reward. Crossing a wooden bridge, we came to the foot of Virginia Falls, soaking up the towering cascade and literally the spray that comes off it. After enjoying the welcome cool down on an already warm summer morning and catching sight of the falls from various vantage points from the rocks below, we eventually returned down the route.

Incredibly pleased with the success of our Plan B, we headed to our car, and a very thankful and patient family waiting for a parking spot to drive just over south to reenter the park at Two Medicine Lake. 

I had pre-purchased 1 PM tickets for a Two Medicine Lake Scenic Boat Tour with an Optional Hike. We wanted to arrive in time to check in for the tour and eat our picnic lunch. And success, we made it in time to do it all and board our boat to ride across the lake and take in the stunning mountain scenery.

Because of the type of ticket I purchased, we had the option to join for a group hike to Twin Falls, a 2.3-mile out-and-back hike from the Two Medicine West End boat dock, where we disembarked after crossing the lake.

However, given the ease of our experience on all the other well-marked trails in Glacier, plus a downloaded contour map of the route from Alltrails, we chose to take off while the group was still gathering and hike this relatively flat—expect a total 121-foot elevation gain—and moderate path ourselves.

It was a good choice as we got to quietly enjoy the pretty path lined with wildflowers, blue skies, and jagged peaks, eventually making it to the falls, where we took photos and explored the rocks and pools.

Returning via the boat, we stopped in the Two Medicine store for coffee and snacks to fuel up before our nearly 1.5-hour ride back to our inn . 

For dinner, and after spending time at our inn to clean up and rest, we returned to the Glacier Highland Restaurant for a low-key meal of burgers, fries, onion rings, and more pie to celebrate a rewarding day. 

Day 4: Many Glacier and the Grinnell Glacier trail.

Here are the highlights of our third full day enjoying Glacier National Park. 

• Breakfast: Take to-go breakfast provided by The Great Bear Inn (out the door by 5:15 AM).
• Drive 120 miles or 2 hours and 15 minutes to Many Glacier.
• Join our pre-booked 8:30 AM hiker shuttle boat across Swiftcurrent Lake and Lake Josephine.
• Hike the 7.6-mile out-and-back Grinnell Glacier trail from the Lake Josephine boat dock .
• Lunch: Picnic at Grinnell Glacier.
• Drive back to our inn to rest and shower.

In a perfect world where I planned our Glacier National Park trip a full 13 months in advance when reservations open for the following year, I would have booked lodging on both the west and east sides of the park to eliminate the massive drive time to get to one of the essential crown jewels of this park and one I wanted to visit—the Many Glacier area.

Want to know where to stay in Glacier National Park? Learn more here .

However, given our constantly shifting family schedules, I rarely plan that far in advance. So, I made do with the lodging we could find —which turned out to be excellent—but far from Many Glacier. 

And then we did what any self-respecting parents with an early morning destination goal and a 13-year-old who likes to sleep in until 1 PM would do. We had her get up at 4:30 AM so we could hit the road with our to-go breakfast courtesy of our inn by 5:15 AM to drive the 120 miles to get there. 

Why so early? I had pre-booked the highly popular 8:30 AM hiker shuttle scenic boat ride from the dock outside the Many Glacier Hotel that would take us across the truly stunning waters of Swiftcurrent Lake. Then, with a boat change and a brief hike, across the equally or more gorgeous waters of Lake Josephine. 

If you are an outdoor lover, taking these boats improbably further into the wilderness (we could see a moose from our boat!) on a gorgeous July Montana morning, which also happens to shave off miles of hiking time to reach one of the best trails in Glacier—the Grinnell Glacier trail , is the kind of experience that makes you feel lucky to be alive. 

Initially, our plan for the day did not include hiking the Grinnell Glacier trail. Which, incidentally, turned out to be one of my top 10 favorite all-time trails. 

Considered a challenging route, with a nearly 2,000-foot elevation, I was not up to the combined pushback from my husband and daughter protesting my overzealous hiking plans. Instead, and respecting that not everybody loves a punishing uphill hike, I told them we planned to take the flat just over a 1-mile walk to the turquoise shores of Grinnell Lake from the Lake Josephine boat dock.

However, the morning was so gorgeous, and the landscapes so utterly beguiling everyone decided to postpone the lake walk and instead gain some height for the views. So, we started walking up the Grinnell Glacier trail, where the vistas became increasingly gorgeous. Feeling good, we continued ascending, eventually crossing paths with hikers coming down and breathlessly telling others they saw grizzlies above the trail further up.

With our grizzly-alert adrenaline kicking in high gear, we double-checked our bear spray was within reach (it was), and we quickened our pace to try to catch sight of these bears in the wild. 

While I could have been perfectly fine not seeing a bear, my 13-year-old was thrilled at the prospect. So, in what was likely one of our less sage parenting moves, we indulged her and all decided to keep moving higher. 

Although we never caught sight of a bear (whew!), we covered a lot more ground than we planned. Realizing this and feeling good, we then collectively decided to hike the entire route, all the way to Grinnell Glacier. Tacking onto another friendly hiking couple for safety in numbers, we stuck together as a group of five as we followed the path up. Making our way through cascades of meltwater, across snow patches, and alpine flower fields, we were wowed by the majestic mountain views at every turn along the trail. 

Eventually reaching our goal of Grinnell Glacier, tucked into the bowl of a mountain, we headed down to the water’s edge for a closer look. And to enjoy the spectacle of this ancient glacier with its cascading waterfalls tumbling into still turquoise blue waters dotted with ice and snow. It felt like stepping into a scene from the Arctic or Antarctic. We took our time at the shoreline, soaking in the warm July Montana sun, to rest and enjoy our lunch at such a beautiful spot. 

Following a splendid break, we took the trail back to the Lake Josephine boat dock to catch our return boat. As we approached the dock, the day’s sunshine, which had begun to give way to clouds, turned cooler with light rain. Slipping our jackets on, we waited patiently in line to catch the 3:45 PM return boat, backtracking to the Many Glacier Hotel and our car. 

That night, after a welcome rest following our 2+ hour drive back to our inn, we returned for a late evening dinner at the Glacier Highland Restaurant to reflect on and appreciate our truly epic Glacier National Park day.

Day 5: Goodbye and West Glacier.

After getting up so many early mornings in a row, it felt decadent to sleep late on our final morning in Glacier until 7 AM. Once up, we enjoyed a leisurely breakfast courtesy of our innkeepers before repacking our bags and heading into West Glacier for souvenirs and gas. Then, continuing onto the second leg of our trip— three days in Missoula . 

Learn more about our time in Missoula, here . Then get an idea of the many excellent things you can see and do in and around the town in the article below .

Get a one-page print version of this itinerary.

For every trip I take, I create a one or two-page itinerary that includes the information I reference most while traveling. Although several other itinerary tools and apps are available, I have not found any to work how I want. So, I created my own template . 

See below for my itinerary for our Glacier trip.

Note, I updated this itinerary to reflect what we actually did vs. what I had originally and loosely planned. 

Because I generally keep our pre-trip itineraries flexible with wide open chunks of time, my pre-trip version of this itinerary looked less structured. Keeping things loose allows me to adjust our plans on the fly based on how our group feels, the weather, and specifically for Glacier—if there was parking. To complement the open time, I usually pre-book one fixed activity to serve as an anchor, like our Two Medicine boat ride. For the rest of the day, I keep a ready reserve of ideas of things to do so we can pick what fits our situation and mood best.

So, use what we did as a guide. Then, know that if you cannot stick precisely to your plan, this happens to us all the time, too. 

If you use this itinerary, please comment below to let me know what you think.

Love this itinerary template? Create and customize your own.

If you like this itinerary template style, I share tools in this article so you can replicate your own version for free. In the article, find four downloadable itinerary template formats. Plus—get links to more itinerary creation apps and resources that will help you find the style that works for you best.

Dining options in and around Glacier National Park.

Inside Glacier National Park and the small communities surrounding it, you will find restaurant options to be limited. Some places are open on select days with set time windows and only during the summer season. And other, in-the-know options are tucked away in campgrounds or resort parks and are easy to miss.  

To get a better idea of possible places to eat in and out of the park, check out this complete guide organized by region, detailing its distance to the closest park entrance if it is outside the park. 

Where to stay in or near Glacier National Park.

If you want to stay inside Glacier National Park —check out this comprehensive where-to-stay guide . Learn about 24+ in-park locations, including lodges, hotels, rentals, backcountry chalets, and campgrounds.

However, if you discover all inside-Glacier accommodation already booked—no worries—you will still have options. Choose to stay in hotels, motels, cabins, campgrounds, and private rentals in one of eight nearby communities . Get a list of the best outside-the-park options in this complete lodging guide organized by region and park entrance. 

Related reading .

If you are planning a Glacier trip, check out these related articles. Get more information, ideas, and resources to plan better travel and get out the door with less hassle.

• How to Plan a Glacier National Park Trip: 17 Essential Tips
• Glacier Reservation & Pass: How to Enter This National Park
• Glacier NP: Ultimate Guide Where to Stay Inside the Park
• The Best Places To Stay Near Glacier National Park
• The Best Places To Eat Around Glacier National Park
• 39 Amazing Ideas For Things To See & Do In Missoula
• How To Make The Most Of Missoula In 3 Days
• 49 Things You Need to Do to Plan Your Best Trip (Free Travel Research & Planning Checklist)
• Pack Faster & Better With This Universal Printable Packing List
• Pre-Trip: A Practical Checklist to Close the House & Pack

Feedback & questions.

Did this article help? Do you have questions about a prospective visit? Or want to communicate an update to property or business information? Please share in the comments below and I will respond.

Affiliate Disclosure: Some of the links on this page may be affiliate links, and at no additional cost to you, I earn a commission if you make a purchase. I only recommend products and companies I use. And the income goes to keeping the site community-supported and ads minimal.

Save to Pinterest.

About the author:  Janice Moskoff is a travel writer and blogger who loves hiking, exploring the world, and reading. She writes to inspire travel-loving families, adult friends, and couples on her blog,  Gather and Go Travel . Check out  her bio , learn how she became  a blogger , and discover how to  work with her . Sign up for her monthly  Discovery Newsletter  to get her latest travel recommendations and  how-to’s .

Love to travel? Sign up for the monthly Gather & Go Travel Discovery Newsletter and get a free trip budget calculator .

From An Expert: InsureMyTrip.com is My #1 Pick for Trip Insurance

35 Places You Will Love for Your Next Ladies’ Trip

How to Make the Most of Missoula in 3 Days

39 Amazing Ideas for Things to See & Do in Missoula

The Best Places to Eat Around Glacier National Park

The Best Places to Stay Near Glacier National Park

Leave a reply.

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

Welcome to Gather and Go Travel , a blog inspiring families, adult friends, and couples to explore US and international destinations and to get outdoors. I am Janice, an experienced traveler to over 50 countries and a travel writer, book lover, and blogger. Learn more about me , read our story , and how to work with me .

Need an Itinerary for a Spring Trip to Europe? Here are 25 Amazing Ideas

49 Things You Need to Do to Plan Your Best Trip (Free Travel Research & Planning Checklist)

Rental Car Insurance: When You Need It & When You Don’t

Your Family Will Love These 30 Road Trips Near Chicago

Pack Faster & Better With This Universal Printable Packing List

How to Spend 10 Days In Rome, the Amalfi Coast & Sorrento

gatherandgotravel

📍US & 🌎 travel for families, friends + couples 📝 Itineraries, destination guides and ideas + tips ❤️ hiking🥾, mountains + 📚books 🏡 Chicago

love this info?

And receive a F REE Budget Trip Calculator .

© 2023 All Rights Reserved

Travel planning.

Amazeballs Better Travel Guide

Travel Planning Tips

Destinations

Travel Learning

Conversations With Travel Pros

Blogs I Love To Follow

Work With Me / Contact Me

Journey From 100 To 10K

Terms of Use

Privacy Policy

Get A Free Trip Budget Calculator

Sign up for my monthly gather & go travel discovery newsletter packed with tips and vacation ideas and get my trip budget calculator for free..

• WORK WITH US

Photo Presets

The Mandagies

The 7-Day Glacier National Park Itinerary You Absolutely Need (Things To Do In Glacier, Maps, and Hikes!)

Post Summary: Glacier National Park Itinerary Suggestions And Things To Do In Glacier National Park

Just seconds after stepping out of your car, you think to yourself,  “Is this place real?”

Sweeping mountain views, fields of wildflowers, and mountain goats and pikas running on the trail in the distance…could life get any better?

But with all there is to see, how do you even begin to start planning a trip to Glacier?

If you’ve ever wanted to experience Glacier National Park and all its rugged adventure, you’ve come to the right blog post, my friends.

In this post, we’re sharing what to do in Glacier National Park , hike suggestions, places to stay, and more for your next epic trip to Montana.

Keep reading for our Glacier National Park itinerary download too!

The Complete Glacier National Park Itinerary (1-7 Day Trips!)

This post is based on a 7-day Glacier National Park Itinerary. Don’t have 7 days? Scroll down to see our smaller Glacier Itinerary examples to fit the exact days of your trip!

Getting To Glacier National Park

So where exactly is Glacier National Park located? It is located in the upper northwest corner of the state of Montana in the United States. 

We decided to extend this circle outside of the state into Canada because you can’t talk about Glacier without mentioning Waterton Lakes National Park of Canada!

These two parks created the Waterton-Glacier International Peace Park,  which combines them into one park that shares an international border. The collaboration is meant to promote international goodwill and cooperation to protect the land.

Okay, now back to Glacier directions:

If you live in the Pacific Northwest like us, (or really, even Wyoming or Utah!) the easiest way to reach Glacier National Park is with a good ole road trip!

Here are some posts you should read about when planning your Glacier road trip:

• 101 Road Trip Questions To Spice Up Your Drive
• 30 Road Trip Essentials You Need To Be Packing
• Car Camping 101: The Complete Guide To Sleeping In Your Car
• 15+ Road Trip Planner Tools + Apps To Make Your Drive A Breeze

And here are some distances from major cities/attractions in the area:

• Kalispell, MT to Glacier National Park: 45 minutes. 35 miles.
• Missoula, MT to Glacier National Park: 2 hours 30 minutes. 140-ish Miles
• Spokane, WA to Glacier National Park: 4 hours 30 minutes. 270 miles.
• Bozeman, MT  to Glacier National Park: 4 hours 50 minutes. 300 miles.
• Yellowstone, WY  to Glacier National Park: 6 hours 15 minutes. 375 miles

Live far away? You can easily fly into Glacier National Park!

The most economic way to plan a Glacier National Park itinerary is to fly into either Glacier Park International Airport (FCA, GPIA) or Missoula, Montana (MSO). From there, rent a car, and drive a short distance to either entrance. The adventure is yours!

Getting Around Glacier National Park – Rent A Camper Van!

If you plan to camp all around the park,  consider  renting a campervan  to easily live that nomadic life for the week. We highly recommend  Outdoorsy  – it’s like Airbnb but for recreational vehicles, and it comes with up to $1 million dollars in insurance!

**Just remember that  the max length that a car can be to drive on  Going-To-The-Sun Road  is 21 feet , so make sure to rent a car under that length to drive around the park freely.

> Browse epic campervans around Glacier here.

*NEW IN 2021 Going Forward* – Ticketed Entry for Going-To-The-Sun Road

Between May 27th and September 11th, the Going-To-The-Sun Road will be by ticket entry (permit) only. If you do not have a permit, you can still access the east side of the park via Highway 2.

This was set in place to manage the high traffic volumes on the highway. This is a dangerous road year-round, and too many cars can cause significant delays, accidents, and crowding. Glacier National Park is trying to manage the crowds by implementing the second pilot year for ticketed entry in 2022.

To reserve your entry tickets, head over to this website to book your tickets . Tickets are available 60-days in advance and will be valid for three consecutive days (as opposed to the 7-day window last year).

The Best 7-Day Glacier National Park Itinerary

Day 1: lake mcdonald and north fork area.

This day is all about exploring the West Glacier area. West Glacier and the North Fork Area (known to be the area just northwest of the park’s border) are full of long lakes, unending forest roads, and lots of opportunities for camping and fishing.

Here are some of our favorite activities around West Glacier!

Explore Lake McDonald:  Lake McDonald is the most popular lake in Glacier National Park – and for good reason, too!

From the colorful rocks on the shoes to the endless possibilities of boating adventures, you won’t be short of things to do at Lake McDonald.

Jump In The Water At Bowman Lake:  Bowman Lake is probably the farthest attraction from anything else on your Glacier National Park itinerary.

However, far doesn’t mean you should leave this lake out! This place is known for its epic lake views, some of the best campsites in Glacier National Park, and incredible sunrises!

We’ve written an entire  guide on how to get to Bowman Lake , as well as the perfect packing list for a summer morning dip.  Check it out!

Read More:   Take A Sunrise Swim At Bowman Lake in Glacier National Park

Day 2: Hike Avalanche Lake and Watch Sunset at Big Bend

Hike To Avalanche Lake:  Avalanche Lake is an easy 4.5-mile out-and-back trail that takes you to one of the most beautiful lakes in Glacier National Park.

In the early season (early-mid June) the mountains in the background are covered with snow, and you can maybe even witness an avalanche (its namesake!) if you’re super lucky!

If you’re a beginning hiker, this is a perfect trail in Glacier to take. The elevation gain is only 730 feet with a good mix of uphills and downhills throughout the trail.

Read More:   11+ Easy and AMAZING Hikes In Glacier National Park 

See Big Bend Around Sunset:  Sunset at Big Bend is probably the most photogenic spot in Glacier National Park.

From the wildflower-blanketed meadow to towering peaks in the distance, there’s no better or more iconic view of Glacier than right here!

We suggest bringing a wide-lens on your camera or using the panoramic mode on your smartphone to capture the whole scene. Make sure to stay back a little bit after sunset too to catch blue hour!

Read More:   All The Best Stops On The Going-To-The-Sun Road

Day 3: Going-To-The-Sun Road And Hidden Lake Overlook

Take A Tour of Going-To-The-Sun Road:  Going-To-The-Sun Road in Glacier National Park  is the main highway that runs right through the middle of the park.

On this 50-mile road, there are incredible viewpoints, trailheads, and a visitors center to make the most of your amazing week in Glacier National Park.

Trip Tip:  If you’ve only got 1 or 2 days in Glacier, scroll down to the bottom of this post and see our example itinerary. Driving this road is probably the #1 thing you should do for a short trip!

Read More:  All The Best Stops On Going-To-The-Sun Road

Hike To Hidden Lake Overlook:  Hidden Lake Trail is one of the most popular trails in Glacier National Park – and for good reason, too!

The trailhead is conveniently located steps away from the Logan Pass Visitors Center and this short trail really does pack a big reward.

Just over 3 miles out-and-back, Hidden Lake Lookout Trail brings you to a viewpoint where you can see the awe-inspiring Hidden Lake at the foot of Bearhat Mountain.

This place is absolutely incredible for sunsets, so we suggest making a quick hike here before you return to your Glacier accommodations for the evening.

Not ready to leave? Consider taking the Highline Trail in Glacier for epic views, glacier peeps, and even some R&R in the Granite Peak Chalet!

Read More:   What To Expect On The Hike To Hidden Lake Lookout

Day 4: St. Mary Area (Sun Point Nature Trail, Rising Sun)

Explore Sun Point Nature Trail:   Sun Point Nature Trail  is an easy hike in Glacier that brings you along the shores of St. Mary Lake and to at least three waterfalls!

This trail weaves in and out of an area affected by a 2015 wildfire, so the bare bones of the trees stand tall while giving you views of the mountain peaks across the lake.

This is an incredibly sunny, dynamic hike with lots of water features throughout the trail. This hike is best taken on a hot, sunny day where you can jump in the lake on the way back!

Read More:   What To Expect On Sun Point Nature Trail in Glacier, Montana

Discover More Spots On Going-To-The-Sun-Road:  As you make your way towards East Glacier, there are plenty more stops to take on Going-To-The-Sun Road.

Here are some of our favorite quick stops on the east side to add to your Glacier National Park itinerary:

• Wild Goose Island (pictured below)
• Jackson Glacier Overlook
• Sunrift Gorge (lots of hiking trails from this starting point)
• St. Mary Visitors Center (great for a bathroom break and free wifi)

Go Camping In and Around The Park:  What better way to immerse yourself in Glacier than sleeping under the stars?

The Rising Sun Campground  is the perfect place to go camping if you are hoping to take more adventures in the Going-To-The-Sun Road area. It’s the perfect addition to any Glacier National Park itinerary!

Want to go camping for free?   Check out our all-inclusive guide to finding free camping in epic locations!

Day 5: Many Glacier Area (Lake Josephine and Grinnell Glacier)

See Lake Josephine During Sunrise:  Lake Josephine is a beautiful lake in the Many Glacier Area, known for its incredible sunrise views.

You can recognize this lake by the iconic Morning Eagle ferry boat docked on the shore and Mount Gould dead center in the background.

It’s a great place to stop and snap some photos if you’re taking the Grinnell Glacier trail (more on that below), but also a really amazing spot to take a dip!

Trip Tip:  This is a trail with VERY frequent bear sightings. Come with a group of people, bring bear spray, and talk loudly to let them know you’re in the area!

Read More:   Hike To Lake Josephine For A Sunrise Swim

Hike To Grinnell Glacier: Grinnell Glacier Hike is an 11.28-mile out-and-back trail that will take you by three different lakes (Lake Josephine, Grinnell Lake, and Upper Grinnell Lake) and a potential off-trail to see Hidden Falls.

Feast At The Many Glacier Hotel:  Many Glacier Hotel is famous for its location on Swiftcurent Lake, but it is known by day hikers as having the best breakfast buffet in the area!

Stop by and enjoy the lobby, pay for an amazing breakfast (you deserve it after all that hiking!), and watch the charter boats take explorers across the lake.

Day 6: Many Glacier Area (Iceberg Lake And Ptarmigan Tunnel)

Many Glacier is a very popular spot to add to your Glacier National Park itinerary.

Hike To Iceberg Lake:  Iceberg Lake is a 9.7-mile out-and-back trail that takes hikers to an alpine lake covered in ice chunks most of the year.

It’s an incredible trail filled with sweeping mountain range views, gorgeous wildflower meadows, and the most Gatorade-blue-colored lake you’ll ever see!

It’s a great trail if you are looking to stretch your hiking experience and start taking on longer hikes.

Read More:   What To Expect Hiking Iceberg Lake Trail In Glacier National Park

Consider The Detour To Ptarmigan Tunnel:  Loved Iceberg Lake? Consider extending your journey to  Ptarmigan Tunnel  before heading back for the day. It took three months to excavate in September 1930.

It was originally used to connect some of the 12 chalets in the park, but now only one remains. The tunnel is now used as a cool feature for hikers to explore!

Ptarmigan Tunnel is a 250-foot long tunnel deep in the Many Glacier Area. Make sure to be bear-aware and pack plenty of water and  snacks for hiking  for the adventure!

Day 7: Two Medicine Area + Heading Home

Take It Easy at Paradise Point:  On the last day of your Glacier National Park itinerary, consider checking out the Two Medicine Area, located in the Southeast corner.

An easy and beautiful hike to take here is to Paradise Point. Start at the South Shore Trailhead and take the easy 1.4-mile out-and-back trail to Two Medicine Lake.

At the end of the trail, you’ll encounter an iconic view of Glacier National Park – Painted Tepee Peak, Sinopah Mountain, Lone Walker Mountain, and Mt. Helen in the distance to create a beautiful and natural backdrop.

Drive Back To Kalispell/Glacier Airport Via Highway 2:  While you CAN drive back through the Going-To-The-Sun Road, the easiest and fastest way to return to West Glacier and the nearest airports would be via Highway 2.

Not returning to West Glacier area? Keep on driving to explore more  Rocky Mountain National Parks  like Grand Teton and  Yellowstone National Park .

Read More:   The Ultimate Rocky Mountain Road Trip (See 6+ National Parks!)

Don’t Have a Whole Week in Glacier National Park?

Don’t worry, this park can be enjoyed in any number of days! Here are some example itineraries for Glacier National Park, no matter how many days you have to spare.

Want this Glacier National Park itinerary in a printable form? Enter your email below and get it sent right to your inbox! We’re sharing a Glacier 7-day itinerary as well as bonus days to make the most of your trip to Montana!

*Come back soon for a Glacier National Park Itinerary Download!

Glacier National Park 2 Day Itinerary

• Day 1:  Drive through the Going-To-The-Sun Road and sleep in East Glacier.
• Day 2:  See the sunrise at Lake Josephine, head home!

Glacier National Park 3 Day Itinerary

• Day 1:  Explore West Glacier (Lake McDonald, Hike Avalanche Trail) and sleep near Lake McDonald.
• Day 2:  Drive Going-To-The-Sun Road, hike to Hidden Lake Lookout. Sleep at Rising Sun Campground.
• Day 3:  Explore Many Glacier Area (Swiftcurrent Lake and Lake Josephine), and drive home.

Glacier National Park 5 Day Itinerary

• Day 2:  Drive Through Going-To-The-Sun Road, Hike to Hidden Lake Lookout. Sleep at Rising Sun.
• Day 3:  Hike Sun Point Nature Trail to St. Mary Falls. Drive to Many Glacier and sleep at Swiftcurrent Motor Inn.
• Day 4:  Hike to Grinnell Glacier and see Lake Josephine. Dinner at Many Glacier Hotel.
• Day 5:  Drive to Two Medicine Area, hike to Paradise Point. Head home!

Glacier National Park Map

Here is our Glacier National Park map, which includes the areas we talked about in this post, and other places to explore!

Browse the Glacier map below, or  click here to save a version of this map  so you can use it while you are out exploring!

Accommodations In Glacier National Park

Best glacier lodges.

If you’re trying to maximize your time for all the amazing things to do in Glacier, consider staying in the park.

Lodges in Glacier National Park provide a really unique experience, with specific services and activities depending on their location within the park.

Here is the list of Glacier National Park lodges:

• Lake McDonald Lodge  (Lake McDonald Area)
• Village Inn at Apgar  (Lake McDonald Area)
• Many Glacier Hotel  (Many Glacier Area)
• Swiftcurrent Motor Inn and Cabins  (Many Glacier Area)
• Rising Sun Motor Inn and Cabins  (St. Mary, East Glacier Area)
• Cedar Creek Lodge  (Columbia Falls, Montana)  Open in winter for surrounding ski areas.

IMPORTANT WINTER CLOSURE NOTE:  All of these Glacier Lodges are closed during the winter and early spring seasons. Check availability and plan for your stay during opening times, which are between early May to mid-September.

Hotels Near Glacier National Park

Staying in hotels just outside of Glacier National Park is an affordable way to travel to Montana, and still be close enough to enjoy all the activities!

The closest towns to Glacier are Columbia Falls, Hungry Horse, Coram, and West Glacier. Lodging near Glacier National Park can be affordable and a great way to save a bit of money on your trip!

> Click here to discover affordable hotels near Glacier National Park .

Best Glacier Camping Spots

Want to spend as much time in nature as possible?  Consider camping in Glacier National Park!

We search for the  best Glacier camping spots  using  The Dyrt , the largest campground database on the web! They have over 40,000 public and private campgrounds to browse and we love that you can filter them down to your exact preferences and price ranges. You can use their  road trip planner,  to help your research and connect all your favorite campgrounds along your route too!

Try their pro membership for FREE for 30 days!  Use the code MANDAGIES to unlock your 30-day free trial , perfect for Glacier campground planning!

Here are some of the most popular Glacier campgrounds:

• Fish Creek Campground (West Glacier)
• Apgar Campground (West Glacier)
• Sprague Creek Campground (Going-To-The-Sun Road)
• Avalanche Campground (Going-To-The-Sun Road)
• Rising Sun Campground (Going-To-The-Sun Road)
• St. Mary Campground (St. Mary Area)
• Many Glacier Campground (Many Glacier Area)
• Two Medicine Campground (Two Medicine Area)

These are the main campgrounds, but certainly not all of them! There are plenty of backcountry sites, smaller Glacier campsites, and even free camping (keep reading)!

Free Camping Near Glacier? It’s possible!

Ready to immerse yourself in the wild, rugged adventure that surrounds your Glacier National Park itinerary? There are little known areas  around  the park that you can actually camp in for FREE!

But forewarning – it’s not for the faint of heart.  Free camping means no amenities like bathrooms, running water, or potentially even cell service.

If this still sounds like your jam,  read our complete guide to finding free camping spots here.

FAQ’s About Glacier National Park

Are there actually any glaciers in glacier national park.

Yes! While they are disappearing fast, there are still 25 active glaciers left in the high elevation sections of Glacier National Park USA.

Why Is It Called Glacier National Park?

The park’s namesake is for the masses of snow and ice that formed the surrounding landscape. Over time, the glaciers carved out the mountain peaks and valleys to form the beautiful area we see today.

What is the Closest Airport to Glacier National Park?

The closest airport to Glacier National Park is Glacier Park International Airport (FCA, GPIA).

When Is The Best Time To Visit Glacier National Park?

Glacier National Park weather can be unpredictable, but we think the best time to visit Glacier is in the summertime – between June and August.

Does this time bring the crowds? Absolutely. However, it’s popular for a good reason! The great weather, beautiful wildflowers, and gorgeous sunsets are worth any crowd in our opinion.

If you are really opposed to coming when lots of people are visiting, we encourage you to research some backcountry camping options. This way you can have your peace and quiet while still enjoying Glacier in the peak summer months.

Want To See More Glacier National Park Pictures?

Follow us on Instagram! You can find more Montana photos and other adventures in the area by following us on Instagram at @themandagies .

How many activities in Glacier National Park have you done? Let us know if you plan to use our Glacier National Park itinerary for your next epic trip to Montana in the comments below!

More montana / nearby adventures.

31 Epic Things To Do In Yellowstone National Park

Hike String Lake Trail in The Grand Teton National Park

Let's be friends! Sign up receive our monthly newsletter with updates and new in-depth guides. 

How to Plan a Perfect 3 Day Glacier National Park Itinerary

Alpine lakes. Towering rocky peaks. Moose, mountain goats, and grizzly bears. Glacier National Park, which straddles the Continental Divide, has 700 miles of hiking trails (we tackled 70 miles of them over the course of our week in the park), more than 100 named lakes (and another 500+ that remain unnamed), and a diverse range of flora and fauna thanks to its unique position perched between the great plains and the Pacific Northwest.

The namesake glaciers of the park are impressive, but the effect of running water, which has created vast valleys and cascading waterfalls, is the real hero of the geologic story of the park. 

We spent a week in the park over the summer, when the weather is warm, wildflowers are blooming, and the hiking trails are clear of snow, and we loved every second of it.

In this guide to planning a perfect Glacier National Park itinerary, we’ll go through the logistics you need to know to have a smooth and pleasant visit (and trust us, there are more than usual for Glacier) and give you a 3 day Glacier National Park itinerary that you can essentially copy and paste for your own trip. 

A note: Normally, we put the logistics – like how many days, when to visit, and how to get around – at the end and get right into the meat of the itinerary. But the logistics are really, really important for Glacier National Park, so we’re going to have them up front for you to read through. 

Hey you! Planning a Glacier National Park trip? Don’t miss our other Glacier travel guides to help you plan an incredible trip.

• 10 Amazing Hikes in Glacier National Park (Complete Hiking Guide)
• Where to Stay in Glacier National Park: Best Places Inside + Outside the Park
• How to Hike the Highline Trail in Glacier National Park
• How to Hike the Grinnell Glacier Trail in Glacier National Park

Disclaimer: Some of the links in this post, like hotel links, are affiliate links, meaning at no additional cost to you, we make a little bit of money if you click through and book. That being said, we would never recommend something to you that we don’t stand behind 100%.

Key Logistics for Visiting Glacier National Park

Here are a few things you’ll need to know as you’re getting into planning a trip to Glacier National Park. 

The most important part here is the vehicle reservation, which you will need in 2023 to enter Going-to-the-Sun Road, Many Glacier, or North Fork . There will be some logistics involved in juggling those different permits. 

For the most up-to-date information on entry reservations, we’d head straight to the NPS site , which has a handy map (which you’ll also find below) and an extensive FAQ section.

We also have a section below on the Going-to-the-Sun Road permit system, which is probably the most important permit to secure before your trip. 

Park Entrance Fees

It costs $30 per vehicle to enter Glacier National Park (good for 7 days), and you can either pay online in advance (be aware that you must print it out and bring it with you), or at one of the park’s visitor centers. 

If you are planning on visiting three or more national parks in the next 12 months, we’d highly recommend an America the Beautiful Pass , which covers entry to all national parks, national forest trailheads, national monuments, and more for 12 months. 

It costs $80, which means it pays off with three national park visits (or some combination of national parks, forests, and monuments). 

Get Gas Outside the Park

Once you’re in the park, there’s a lot of long drives, and exactly zero gas to be had. Make sure you fill up before you enter the park, either on the western end in West Glacier, or in St. Mary on the eastern side. 

The Park Shuttle

There is a free park shuttle that runs from Apgar Visitor Center at the western end, all the way up to Logan Pass and down to St. Mary Visitor Center at the eastern end of Going-to-the-Sun Road.

Utilizing the shuttle is a great way to avoid a) huge crowds at parking lots along Going-to-the-Sun Road (seriously – the parking lot at Logan Pass is often closed to new cars by 9:00 am), and b) driving a steep, narrow road that is downright stressful to drive.

We’d highly recommend using it.  

Yes, you heard correctly – there are bears in Glacier National Park. Two types, in fact. Black bears, which are largely harmless as long as you keep your distance, and Grizzlies, which are a little more complicated. 

Rather than give you everything you need to know about bear safety, we’re going to direct you over to the NPS and their advice on visiting bear country . Two tips to definitely keep in mind are to hike in groups of at least two (but ideally four or more) and to carry bear spray.  

Book Everything (Well) in Advance

Glacier is a popular park, and the infrastructure is already stretched thin in terms of the number of visitors that the park can accommodate. Make sure you have your camping or lodging reservations and entry permits booked well in advance, because they will sell out for the summer months. 

Download Offline Maps to Navigate Without Cell Service

There are parts of the park where you won’t have cell service, like at the Logan Pass Visitor Center. We like to download offline Google Maps of places we’re visiting because it gives you the ability to navigate even if you don’t have service. 

Here’s a guide on how to download offline maps . 

Permits for Going-to-the-Sun Road

Most importantly, you will need a reservation to enter either end of the park and drive Going-to-the-Sun Road . Here are the specific dates and times you need to be aware of. 

If you want to enter the park through the western entrance (near Apgar) or the eastern entrance (near St. Mary) and drive the most scenic road in the park – Going-to-the-Sun Road – you need a timed entry reservation if you’re entering between the hours of 6:00 am and 3:00 pm .

Here are a few more specifics, straight from the NPS site (which is worth a peek if you’re planning a trip to Glacier National Park). 

• Required for each vehicle entering through the West entrance from May 26 through September 10, 2023 , from 6:00 am to 3:00 pm. 
• Required for each vehicle entering through the St. Mary entrance from July 1 through September 10, 2023 , from 6:00 am to 3:00 pm.

Tickets are released 120 days in advance on a rolling basis starting in February, and they go on sale at 8:00 am Mountain Time on the dot. Get on within five minutes of them being released for the best shot at getting a timeslot you want. Seriously. It costs $2 per entry reservation. 

The other booking window is 24 hours in advance at 8:00 am Mountain Time. 

Entry tickets are good for 3 days, so you only need one entry ticket for your entire trip. You do need one entry ticket per vehicle, if you have multiple cars / groups. 

Here’s a visual guide for you to use.

Permits for Many Glacier and North Fork 

New for 2023, you will also need to make a reservation for the day you want to go to Many Glacier, Two Medicine Valley, and / or North Fork. 

If you follow the itinerary as written below, you won’t actually go to North Fork or Two Medicine Lake (save it for next time!), so you’ll just need to figure out which day you want to go to Many Glacier, and make your reservation for that day. 

For Many Glacier, reservations are required from July 1 through September 10 for all entries between 6:00 am and 3:00 pm. Reservations here are good for only one day. 

Again, we’d strongly recommend you head over to the NPS site to read it directly from the source, as things are constantly changing and their FAQ section is surprisingly helpful. 

How Many Days Do You Need in Glacier National Park?

We chose to write this guide for 3 days in Glacier National Park because we think it’s the perfect amount of time to spend exploring the park. 

Obviously, it’s worth saying that you could spend weeks in Glacier and never run out of new things to do and see, but three days will give you a great taste of hiking in Glacier, driving Going-to-the-Sun Road, and exploring around Many Glacier.

Which, conveniently, are the three things we think you shouldn’t miss during your visit to Glacier National Park. 

Why not two days ? Two days means you’ll have to compress those three things into two days, which means either skipping a long hike (the hiking in Glacier is nothing short of spectacular) or skipping some stops along Going-to-the-Sun road, which is one of the most scenic drives in the country (and we’ve done a lot of the scenic drives on the west coast). 

Can you see the park in two days? Sure. But we strongly recommend trying for three to give yourself more time and flexibility to explore the park.

It’s worth it, we promise!

If you only have two days, we have a suggestion for how to spend your time at the bottom of the itinerary below. We also have a one day itinerary for the park below, which involves driving Going-to-the-Sun Road from west to east. 

Where to Stay at Glacier National Park

This is a complicated question that depends on your exact itinerary, but we’re going to do our best to cover it as well as we can.

Want more detail? We have an entire, detailed guide to choosing a place to stay in Glacier National Park that might be right up your alley.

Our number one tip is to spend a night in Many Glacier if you have two or three nights (or more). That part of the park was our favorite, and it’s a long way from the western side of the park to Many Glacier – too long for a day trip, we think. 

If you have two days, spend the first day driving Going-to-the-Sun Road, then stay the night in Many Glacier, which is another hour or so from the eastern end of the scenic drive. Then, do a morning hike and make the journey back to the western end of the park. 

If you have three days, follow the itinerary below, which has you spending the first night on the western side of the park, the second in Many Glacier, and the third back on the west side (or flying home). 

Our second tip is to book as early as humanly possible, especially if you want to stay at a lodge or campground inside the park. Things literally get fully booked a year in advance, especially on summer weekends. Reservations for lodges and hotels inside the park open 13 months in advance, and campground reservations for Fish Creek and Many Glacier open up 6 months in advance. 

Staying Near West Glacier

By West Glacier, we’re referring to the western half of the park, roughly from the Apgar Visitor Center to Logan Pass along Going-to-the-Sun Road. 

In West Glacier, you’ve got a couple of great options inside the park – both camping and lodges – along with a plethora of great options outside the western park boundary. 

It should be said that park lodges, while super convenient, are generally a pretty poor value for the money.

If you’re on a budget, you’ll want to either camp, or stay outside the boundaries of the park.

Inside the park , we think you should stay at either the Lake McDonald Lodge (reserve before you were born… or 12 months in advance), which is the best place to stay, or Fish Creek Campground (reservable up to six months in advance). 

Camping Options Inside the Park

Other options for camping include: 

• Apgar Campground : Huge campground right near the Visitor Center – first come, first served
• Sprague Campground : Along Going-to-the-Sun Road between the Visitor Center and Lake McDonald Lodge, first come, first served – only 25 spots and often fills at 6:00 am in the summer
• Avalanche Campground : At the Avalanche Lake / Trail of the Cedars trailhead along Going-to-the-Sun Road, first come, first served (closed in 2021)

Hotels and Lodges Inside the Park near West Glacier

There are two other non-camping options located in Apgar Village (near the Visitor Center) – Village Inn at Apgar and Apgar Village Lodge & Cabins . Both are basic, and relatively expensive for what you’re really getting (which is par for the course with hotels inside National Parks, in our experience). 

Outside the park, you have a couple of options. 

Staying in the Town of West Glacier

Just outside the park entrance, this is the most convenient option outside the park.

The tradeoff is that there are just a few, expensive amenities (grocery store and gas), and only a couple of places to stay.

Stay here if you want the closest possible location to the park entrance without paying the premium for staying inside the park. 

Click here to find a place to stay in West Glacier .

Staying Between Coram and Hungry Horse

This is a good blend of convenience (15 minutes to the Visitor Center) and amenities (plenty of bars, restaurants, groceries, and gas).

Plus, there’s some legitimately cool places to stay – like glamping at Under Canvas , or the Historic Tamarack Lodge . 

Click here to find a perfect place to stay near Coram.

Staying in Whitefish, MT

If you’re okay with a little bit of extra driving (it’s 30 minutes away from the Visitor Center), Whitefish is a cool little mountain town that is the best city near Glacier National Park.

There’s some great coffee, bars, restaurants, and more. Plus, Whitefish Lake is two minutes outside of town!

If you want to be in the heart of all the action, stay at the Firebrand Hotel , a cool boutique hotel in the center of town.

Otherwise, look at the rustic cabins at the North Forty Resort or the Lodge at Whitefish Lake , both of which are a bit outside of town.

Click here to find the perfect place to stay in Whitefish .  

Staying in Many Glacier

Unfortunately, you only have a few options at Many Glacier, and most are inside the park and book up FAST. 

If you’re not into camping, then you have two options. The Many Glacier Hotel is gorgeous, right on the shore of Swiftcurrent Lake, and is going to cost you. The Swiftcurrent Motor Inn is a little less spectacular, and thus a little bit more affordable. 

If you’re camping, the only option is Many Glacier Campground (we stayed here, and it was great – walkable to most of the trailheads!) which you can reserve up to six months in advance. 

If you can’t find a place to stay near Many Glacier, your other options are the town of Babb, MT , or near St. Mary Lake in East Glacier (look at Rising Sun Campground and St. Mary Campground, or Rising Sun Motor Inn for non-campers). 

A Complete 3 Day Glacier National Park Itinerary

Now that we’ve got all those logistics covered, on to the best part – the actual itinerary! 

We’ve outlined a 3 day itinerary for you below, with options to turn it into one and two day versions below that. 

Day 1: Going-to-the-Sun Road

On your first day in the park, you’ll drive the entirety of Going-to-the-Sun Road from start to finish – Apgar to St. Mary – making all sorts of amazing stops along the way that feature everything from short hikes to stunning waterfalls to glacier overlooks on the side of the road.

Then, head up to Many Glacier, our favorite part of the park, to spend the night to put yourself in position to tackle a hike in the morning. 

We’re not going to give you every single viewpoint you should stop at – there are too many to count. Instead, we’ll give you the ones we liked the best so you have a starting point for your own drive. 

Transportation for the day: Drive yourself

Driving Going-to-the-Sun Road

Spend most of the day driving Going-to-the-Sun Road from the West Entrance (at the Apgar Visitor Center) to the East Entrance (near the St. Mary Visitor Center).

We’re recommending that you drive it in this direction for two reasons.

First, most of the pullouts are on the right side of the road as you’re heading up to Logan Pass and beyond.

Second because we want you to end up in Many Glacier for the night, which is accessed from the east side of the park. 

Remember, you currently need a park entry pass to drive along Going-to-the-Sun Road between 6am and 3pm – they won’t even let you enter the park between those hours if you don’t have one. If you aren’t one of the lucky ones, you need to make sure you’re through the entrance station gate before 6am. 

Here are some of our favorite stops along Going-to-the-Sun Road, in chronological order if you’re driving from west to east. 

The Apgar Visitor Center

We always recommend stopping at the Visitor Center to check in on trail conditions, road conditions, and weather. The Apgar Visitor Center has a tiny store too, if you’re looking for a souvenir (we always get stickers). 

Lake McDonald Lodge

A rustic-yet-opulent lodge set on the shores of Lake McDonald, as the name might suggest. You can stop here to grab coffee, take a boat tour of the lake, or just head down to the lakeshore to check out the multi-colored rocks in the crystal clear water. 

Trail of the Cedars / Avalanche Lake

This is your first hike of the day! Avalanche Lake is a 5.5 mile hike with 750 feet of elevation gain (round trip).

It’s relatively easy – we saw kids as young as four or so – and the payoff is a beautiful lake backed by rocky peaks and featuring a waterfall in the distance across the lake.

Along the way, you’ll follow Avalanche Creek and tackle a second, shorter hike called Trail of the Cedars . Don’t miss Avalanche Gorge and its brilliant blue water. When you arrive at Avalanche Lake, you’ll be on the northwest shore.

The trail continues south along the western shore, which is far less crowded and would make a good spot to stop and relax before heading back down.

Parking can be tough at the trailhead here – when we were there, it was routinely full by 6:30am, but people rotated through especially because most people seemed to be doing the shorter Trail of the Cedars. 

The Loop to Logan Pass

The only real reason to stop at the Loop is for the view across the valley to Heavens Peak and the cascading waterfall careening down its face.

From here on out, the road climbs aggressively up to Logan Pass, and there are a number of pullouts along the way with spectacular views of the valley.

The road is very narrow at points (remember, no vehicles over 21 ft tall, 8 ft wide, or 10 ft tall on this part of the road). You’ll pass the Weeping Wall , which is a trickling waterfall that comes off a rock ledge onto the road, and the Triple Arches , which are three arches carved into the rock under the road to support it and span the chasm between them.

Neither has a pullout where you can stop and get a good view, so you’ll have to see them as you’re driving.

As you approach Logan Pass, you’ll start to see the Highline Trail, one of our favorite hikes in the park, right above the road. 

Logan Pass and The Hidden Lake Trail

First of all, there’s a good chance you won’t be able to park at Logan Pass, which is right on the Continental Divide, sitting at 6,600 feet above sea level.

The lot is full by 7am at the latest, and they completely close it to new vehicles by 10am (they don’t let you line up, and only let a few cars in at a time).

That being said, it’s okay! We have you taking the shuttle to Logan Pass on day 3 of this itinerary to avoid the whole parking nightmare.

If you do happen to get a parking spot, take it and do the hike to the Hidden Lake Overlook , which is a beautiful stroll through alpine meadows and gives you a great chance to see wildlife like Bighorn Sheep and Mountain Goats. There was a group of sheep in the parking lot when we were there. 

Jackson Glacier Overlook

When you get to Logan Pass, you’re more than half way through the drive.

The road, which is right around 50 miles total, takes 33 miles to climb 3,000+ feet to Logan Pass from Apgar, then 17 miles to descend 2,000 feet to St. Mary. Right as you leave Logan Pass the road starts to descend.

You’ll pass Siyeh Bend, then arrive at the Jackson Glacier Overlook. From here, you have a nice view of the shrinking Jackson Glacier, which is one of the largest glaciers in the park, though it has receded quickly over the past 100 years.

There’s some great signage talking about the history of the glacier, and comparing the size in 1911 to 2009. 

Shortly past the Jackson Glacier Overlook, you’ll reach the parking lot for St. Mary Falls. This is the start of your second short hike of the day, which takes in two waterfalls in a short and easy 3.5 mile hike (450 feet of elevation gain) starting from the St. Mary Falls Trailhead .

St. Mary and Virginia Falls

The hike to Virginia Falls, which is the further one from the parking area, is worth the effort to get there. Along this trail, there are countless unnamed cascades that are super photogenic. St. Mary Falls is at 0.6 miles in, and Virginia Falls is at 1.7 miles in.

Baring Falls

Another waterfall, this one is a short and flat 0.6 mile hike out and back from the Sunrift Gorge parking area. Because of its accessibility, it’s crowded. And a fire decimated the forest in this stretch of the park, so it’s fairly exposed. Still, it’s worth the stop. 

St. Mary Lake

This isn’t really a stop, but you spend the last eight miles or so of road on the shore of St. Mary Lake, which is the second biggest lake in the park (after Lake McDonald).

It’s 10 miles long, 300 feet deep, and consistently very, very cold. It’s 1,500 feet higher than Lake McDonald, which means the water stays colder throughout the season.

The stretch of road along the northern shore of the lake is prime bear habitat, especially the last few miles as you get closer to the end of the road and berry bushes line the shores of the lake.

It’s a good bet that there will be bears here in the hours around dusk.

There are two stops worth making here.

The first is the famous Wild Goose Island Lookout, which gives you a view over a tiny, tree-covered island out in the middle of the lake with rocky peaks of the Continental Divide rising thousands of feet above the lake in the background.

The second is the Rising Sun Picnic Area, where you can get out, have a snack, and get down to the lakeshore. 

Fishercap Lake at Dusk

When you hit the end of the road, head north towards the tiny town of Babb, Montana, which is where you’ll enter the Many Glacier region. The road from Babb to the Swiftcurrent Motor Inn (the biggest parking lot in the area) is either a) bumpy and dusty or b) under construction.

The only time they can do work on this road is during the summer, which is also when there are the most people visiting the park. You may have to wait for up to 30 minutes for the road construction, so be prepared for that. 

As you get closer to Many Glacier, you might notice the dense collection of berry bushes along the highway. This is prime bear habitat when the berries are ripe during the summer, and if you see a bunch of cars pulled over to the side of the road, that’s a good cue that there’s some kind of wildlife there.

You’ll pass Sherburne Lake, then Swiftcurrent Lake on your way to the parking lot outside the Swiftcurrent Motor Inn, which is your destination for the evening. 

The main attraction for the evening, besides getting situated wherever you’re staying, should be Fishercap Lake. It’s a short 0.3 mile hike out to the west from the Swiftcurrent Motor Inn, and it’s a fantastic place to see moose!

We went twice – once midday, and once in the evening. We saw a moose snorkeling in the lake in the evening, and dusk and dawn are generally the best time to see them out there. 

After you’ve (hopefully) seen your fill of moose, head to your accommodations for the evening and call it a day. 

Day 2: Many Glacier

Start your day bright and early to  tackle one of the hikes around Many Glacier (we’ll give you some options below). End your day by driving back to the western side of the park. 

This was our favorite part of the park. The plethora of alpine lakes. The wildlife. The Many Glacier Hotel. And the fact that you don’t need to worry about shuttle reservations and entry tickets over here! In fact, most of the trailheads and attractions are walkable from where you’re staying if you’re spending the night inside the park.

If you aren’t able to get a shuttle reservation, you could easily spend your three days exploring Many Glacier alone. 

We hiked 40 miles of trail here over the course of three days. If you like hiking, you’re going to love this part of the park. That’s why we insist you spend at least one night over here!

Transportation for the day: Drive yourself (or walk to the trailhead, if you’re staying in the park!)

Take a Hike!

The best hike in the park, at least in our mind, is the Grinnell Glacier Trail . It starts from either the Grinnell Glacier Trailhead or the Many Glacier Hotel (it’s actually the same distance and elevation gain, roughly) and climbs up into the high alpine terrain above Lake Grinnell.

From the trail, the views over Lake Grinnell and Angel’s Wing (plus tons of waterfalls) are worth the climb. You’ll start in the forest, and ascend into alpine terrain, which is decidedly more rocky and less green. 

It’s a strenuous hike, covering 11 miles there and back, and climbing 2,400 feet along the way. The first two miles of the trail follow along the shores of Swiftcurrent Lake and Lake Josephine.

Then, the trail starts climbing aggressively, and about half a mile into the climb you’re treated to your first view of Lake Grinnell and Angel’s Wing, which only get better as you continue to climb. 

The trail climbs up to a picnic area with benches and a pit toilet, where you can stop and rest in the partial shade before tackling the final climb up to Upper Grinnell Lake and the glacier itself.

The blue-green glacial water and the pieces of glacier are well-worth the effort. You’re in Glacier National Park after all, you should probably see a glacier before you leave. 

There’s a boat shuttle that starts from the Many Glacier Hotel, crosses Swiftcurrent Lake, crosses Lake Josephine, and drops you at the far end of Lake Josephine.

The good news is that it cuts off 3.4 miles of the trail, shortening this hike significantly.

The bad news is that it cuts off the easiest part of the hike, which is essentially just a flat stroll along the lakeshore. It costs $35 per person, so unless you’re excited about the boat ride itself, we wouldn’t recommend it. 

This hike is crowded, but worth braving the crowds. Get a pre-8am start to beat the crowds on the way up and have the trail basically to yourself. 

If you’re looking for a less-crowded hike, we really liked the hike up to Cracker Lake , which is 12 miles long and ends at another gorgeous blue-green alpine lake. 

A Drink at Many Glacier Hotel

After your hike, we highly recommend grabbing a post-hike drink at the Many Glacier Hotel, which is on the shore of Swiftcurrent Lake. The views from the upper deck of the hotel are spectacular.

There’s a bar inside the hotel serving cocktails, but we opted for the market on the first floor, which had a great selection of beer, cider, and wine, including one of my favorite gluten free beers , Ghostfish Brewing from Seattle!

The Drive Back to the West Side

Head back to West Glacier so that you can be well-positioned to catch the shuttle from the Apgar Visitor Center the next morning. You have two options – driving along Going-to-the-Sun Road, or skirting the southern end of the park via Highway 2 (which is longer, but an easier drive). 

Day 3: Logan Pass and the Highline Trail

On your last day in Glacier, tackle the Highline Trail, one of the most scenic hikes in the entire United States, and explore the area around Logan Pass.

This day includes roughly 15 miles of hiking – we think you should do both the hike to the Hidden Lake Overlook (~3 miles) and the Highline Trail (~11 miles) if you’re up for it. You’ll need to pack plenty of water, snacks, and wear proper footwear and sun protection. 

If that sounds too aggressive for you, our recommendation would be to do the Hidden Lake Overlook and the first two miles of the Highline (and back), which is seven miles of relatively easy hiking. 

Transportation for the day: The park shuttle (take it from Apgar Visitor Center up to Logan Pass, then back from the Loop)

Hidden Lake Overlook

Hop on the earliest shuttle you can up to Logan Pass from the Apgar Visitor Center, which takes about an hour. 

This short hike (3 miles, 600 feet of elevation gain) heads up the hill behind the Logan Pass Visitor Center via a nice boardwalk with great views on all sides.

Wildflowers were blooming in the summer, and the Garden Wall and surrounding mountains provide a spectacular backdrop as you make your way up to the Hidden Lake Overlook. It’s a moderately difficult hike, and it climbs more than we were expecting. 

This is a great spot to see both mountain goats and bighorn sheep – we saw both along the short walk up to the overlook. Cute little marmots are also abundant at the overlook itself. 

You can continue down to the lakeshore, but it doubles both the distance and the elevation gain and we’d only recommend it if you aren’t planning on doing the Highline.

The best part about this trail is the hike up to the Overlook. The hike down to the lake closes for two to three weeks in late July when the fish are spawning in the lake, which brings grizzly bears down for the buffet. 

At the overlook, you’ll have a great view over Hidden Lake, with Bearhat Mountain rising several thousand feet above its shores. 

The hike heads back the way you came – there’s a water fill station at the Logan Pass Visitor Center (near the bathrooms) and the trailhead for the Highline, your next conquest, is out towards Going-to-the-Sun Road. 

Hike the Highline

The Highline Trail was one of our favorite hikes in the park, and it makes a nice one-two punch with the Hidden Lake Overlook. Combining the two makes it a big day of hiking, but we firmly believe that it’s worth the effort. 

First of all, we have a whole guide to the Highline Trail that you should absolutely go read if you’re planning on tackling it. It has all sorts of useful information for hikers – like what route to take, and a play-by-play of the trail so you know exactly what to expect.

Here’s a very condensed version of that guide. 

The best way to do the Highline Trail is as a one-way hike leaving from Logan Pass and ending at the Loop, which is a shuttle stop where you can catch the shuttle back to your accommodations.

That hike is just a hair over 11 miles, with 1,500 feet of elevation gain along the way (and a big descent at the end). You can do it as an out-and-back from the Logan Pass Visitor Center, but it’s 15 miles and 2,400 feet gained if you do it that way. 

The hike starts on a narrow ledge above Going-to-the-Sun Road, which is a little bit treacherous for people who are apprehensive about heights.

For context, I hate heights. They make my skin crawl. I was totally fine with this stretch of trail, which lasts for about a half mile before widening. There’s a garden hose looking thing attached to the inside wall that you can hang onto if you’re worried.

Hug the inside and get through the first half mile or so, and the rewards are immediate. 

The hike takes you out to the Granite Park Chalet , which is a rustic backcountry hut where you can stay the night if you’re able to get a reservation. 

The entire trail between Logan Pass and the Chalet is spectacular. You’ll traverse the mountainside, hugging the Garden Wall (part of the Continental Divide), which towers over you to your right. To your left, you have ever-changing views of the valley beyond.

The first several miles of trail have great views of Going-to-the-Sun Road, which is a couple of hundred feet below you, at times. 

At about 6.5 miles into the hike, there’s a turnoff to the Grinnell Glacier Overlook . It was a little smoky and visibility wasn’t great, so we skipped it. But everyone we talked to said it was their favorite part of the hike.

So what’s the problem? To get there, you climb 900 feet in 0.6 miles, which is brutal on its own, and even more brutal as part of a 15 mile day. Here’s the view you get from the top: 

If you follow this itinerary as written, you’ll have already seen the Grinnell Glacier from its base. But this is a different perspective for you from above. 

The chalet is at just over seven miles into the hike. It’s a good spot to break out your packed lunch and snacks, sit on a bench, and relax while you refuel and recoup. The rest of the hike – either down to the Loop shuttle stop or back to Logan Pass – is going to be brutal.

The descent to the Loop, while it’s downhill, loses 2,500 feet of elevation in four miles. It’s straight down, no breaks. Trekking poles are going to be your best friend. 

This hike is going to take the lion’s share of the day. It took us 5 hours, and we’re fast hikers (plus we skipped the overlook). Plan on somewhere around 6-7 hours, including stops. 

The Lake McDonald Lodge

On your way back to West Glacier, make a stop at the Lake McDonald Lodge for a well-earned drink on the shore of Lake McDonald.

Lucke’s Lounge is a great place to grab a drink and a bite with lake views – they have craft beer and cider, wine, and cocktails. Russell’s Dining Room is another option, and has a nearly identical drink menu. 

There are boat tours of Lake McDonald that leave from behind the lodge. If that’s something that sounds interesting to you, make sure to make a reservation well in advance. 

Otherwise, grab a drink (and maybe a bite to eat) and relax – you certainly earned it today. 

How to Spend One Day in Glacier National Park

If you only have a single day in Glacier, we’d focus exclusively on driving Going-to-the-Sun Road from start to finish, stopping for a hike or three along the way, and getting out at all the viewpoints that interest you. 

Here’s what that perfect day looks like in our minds. You’re going to want to drive and skip the shuttle so you can take it at your own pace. 

Start at the Apgar Visitor Center , talk to a ranger about hike closures and things to know, and grab a park map. Start along Going-to-the-Sun Road, making your first stop at the Lake McDonald Lodge to admire the beautiful architecture and, more importantly, Lake McDonald.

Continue along the road to the Trail of the Cedars / Avalanche Lake Trailhead. Get out and hike the Trail of the Cedars Loop at the very least, making sure to check out Avalanche Creek Gorge. 

The hike up to Avalanche Lake , which leaves from the same trailhead, is about 4 miles and is pretty easy. If you’re looking for an easy hike to a nice alpine lake, spend a couple of hours on that hike here. If you’re planning on doing one of the longer hikes in the park, skip it and continue along. 

You’ll start to gain elevation as you start the climb up to Logan Pass , which sits at 6,500 feet above sea level along the Continental Divide.

Here, you’re DEFINITELY going to want to hike to the Hidden Lake Lookout , which is 2.6 miles roundtrip, for one of the best views in the park. You can continue down to the lake and make it about five miles, but it was closed due to trout spawning and grizzly activity when we were there in late July. 

Logan Pass is the high point, and it’s all downhill from here to St. Mary at the eastern end of the road. Stop at the Jackson Glacier Overlook , St. Mary Falls (the relatively short hike to Virginia Falls is worth the trip too!), and Baring Falls .

Finally, enjoy the sun along the shore of St. Mary Lake before you reach the end of the road and make your way back to West Glacier via Highway 2 along the southern border of the park.

Stop at Goat Lick Overlook to check for mountain goats along the way (and stretch your legs). 

You could take the road up and over Logan Pass again on the way back, but we think it’s a more stressful drive given the number of people on the road, and the combination of steep and narrow two-lane roads. Plus, the speed limit is just 35 mph!

How to Spend 2 Days in Glacier National Park

If you have two days in the park, follow days 1 and 2 of the itinerary above. Do the scenic drive over Going-to-the-Sun Road to stay in Many Glacier on the first day, do a morning hike, and drive back the next day.

If you’re up for it, plan on fitting in a longer hike on the day where you do the scenic drive. You could add Avalanche Lake, Siyeh Pass, or the Highline without much issue. 

If you choose the Highline, plan on driving (instead of taking the shuttle) and head straight there as early as possible to get a parking spot.

In the summer of 2021, the parking lot was routinely full at 6:30am and closed to new vehicles by 9:00-10:00am. You’ll also need to do this hike out-and-back, which makes it 15 miles long if you go all the way to the Granite Park Chalet. It’s a big hike, so you’re going to have to sacrifice most of the day to tackle it. 

It’s 100% worth it. We’d do that plus the Hidden Lake Overlook, then continue along the road down into St. Mary with stops at the Jackson Glacier Overlook, St. Mary Falls, Baring Falls, and St. Mary Lake before heading into Many Glacier.  

Then, the next morning, hike the Grinnell Glacier Trail, head out to Fishercap Lake to see if you can spot some moose, and head back to West Glacier for the night (or to catch your flight). 

When to Visit Glacier National Park

The season for visiting Glacier is maddeningly short. Which is true for most alpine wonderlands up and down the west coast. 

The best time to be in Glacier is mid-June through Labor Day, also known as summer. 

July and August are peak season months because the roads are open, the trails are clear of snow (mostly), and the wildflowers are blooming. Crowds are heaviest in the summer, as you might imagine, but it’s nothing compared to Yellowstone or Yosemite, which see significantly more people each year. 

Note that in early June (usually through the 11th or so), Many Glacier Campground is closed. 

Still, if you’re visiting in the summer, you’re going to want to book things several months in advance (up to 13 months for the lodges inside the park!), and be prepared to show up to trailheads for the park’s most popular hikes early in the morning to secure a parking spot. 

The biggest issue with visiting Glacier outside of the summer is the fact that Going-to-the-Sun Road is closed until late June or early July (see past opening dates here ). Which essentially means you’re going to miss most of the best things to do and see in the park.

Plus, the high alpine hikes are going to be snow covered from October through the early summer, depending on the year. So even if you could get to them, you wouldn’t be able to enjoy them without serious winter hiking gear. 

Getting Around Glacier National Park

There are two options for getting around the park: driving and the park shuttle. 

Driving gives you the most flexibility , but the tradeoff is that parking can be a nightmare. 

The park shuttle , which basically has two lines that run along Going-to-the-Sun Road from the western and eastern ends of the park and meet at Logan Pass (the center), is a good option if you want to opt out of the parking nightmare OR your car will struggle with the 3,500 foot climb to Logan Pass (our van was not pleased about it). 

With that being said, it’s really a “why not both?” situation. You should absolutely have a car in Glacier National Park so that you can explore Going-to-the-Sun Road at your own pace, but you should utilize the park shuttle to get to the park’s most popular trailheads for your hikes and avoid getting into a fight-to-the-death for a parking spot or waking up at 4:30am every day (there’s no third option). 

We did the drive-to-every-hike thing until we realized the shuttle was a better option and allowed us to sleep in just a bit. 

In the guide below, we’ll cover when to use the park shuttle and when to drive in the day-by-day itinerary. 

A note on bigger vehicles in Glacier National Park : Vehicles over 21 feet long, 8 feet wide, or 10 feet high are prohibited along Going-to-the-Sun Road. It’s narrow, steep, and at times, short. You can travel from the west end of the park to the east end of the park via Highway 2, which is outside the park to the south, but you’ll be missing all the great stops along the scenic drive. If you have an RV, plan on parking it at the campground or Visitor Center and utilizing the shuttle.

Getting to Glacier National Park

There are basically two ways to get to Glacier – driving and flying. 

You can also take Amtrak to Glacier National Park (from Minneapolis, Seattle, Portland, or Chicago), but we don’t think it’s a great option unless you’re really excited about the train ride itself.

It takes a similar amount of time to driving, and you’ll have to rent a car once you arrive anyway… which basically combines the disadvantages of driving and flying without many real advantages. 

Driving to Glacier

Driving has the advantage of you bringing your own car and avoiding having to rent one, because you definitely need a car to visit Glacier National Park . However, the disadvantage is time – it’s going to take a whole day (if not more) to get to Glacier from most major cities in the country. 

If you’re driving and you’re coming from outside of Montana, it’s going to take a while. We drove from Seattle, and it took us a solid 9 hours. Here are some driving distances and times to the Apgar Visitor Center from major cities nearby: 

• Boise, Idaho: 10 hours / 500 miles
• Salt Lake City, Utah: 10 hours / 650 miles
• Seattle, Washington: 8 hours, 45 minutes / 552 miles 
• Portland, Oregon: 10 hours / 625 miles
• San Francisco, California: 19 hours / 1,200 miles

As you can see, if you’re planning on driving, you’ll need to include an extra day on either side of your trip to account for the drive time. 

If you’re coming from Yellowstone or Grand Teton, you can include Glacier as a third stop on your trip, but it’s not actually as close as it seems. It’s seven hours from the northern border of Yellowstone, and several more hours from Grand Teton. 

Flying to Glacier

If a couple of long days of driving doesn’t seem like your cup of tea, the best option is to fly into Kalispell, Montana (Glacier Park International Airport / FCA), rent a car, and drive the 30-45 minutes to the western side of the park from there.

Delta, United, and Alaska (the best airline!) have flights, but unless you’re coming from a select few cities, you’re probably going to have to make a connection. Most airlines increase the number of direct flights and routes during summer months, when demand is higher. 

Other airport options include Missoula (MSO) , which is just two hours south, Bozeman (BZN) , which would make a great central option if you want to combine this itinerary with our 7 day Yellowstone and Grand Teton itinerary .

Great Falls is also an option, but it’s not a great one since it’s a ways away, and it has fewer flight options. 

A Geography Overview of Glacier National Park

Glacier National Park is in northwestern Montana, just south of the US border with Canada. The biggest towns nearby are Kalispell and Whitefish , which are outside the western edge of the park, and Shelby and Great Falls , which are outside the eastern entrance. 

For the purposes of this guide, we’re going to break the park into three distinct areas. There are really five or six, but a few of them (Goat Haunt, Polebridge, and Two Medicine Lake) are a bit out of the way, and we’d recommend focusing your time unless you have more than four or five days in the park. 

Those three regions are West Glacier and East Glacier at either end of Going-to-the-Sun Road, and Many Glacier , which is north of that stretch and is accessed via Babb, MT. 

West Glacier

This is the stretch along Going-to-the-Sun Road from the West Entrance to Logan Pass, and is the most visited part of the park. It’s about 33 miles, and takes an hour and fifteen minutes to cover the whole thing without making any stops. 

Along the way, you’ll find the Apgar Visitor Center, Lake McDonald Lodge, Avalanche Lake, the Loop, and the world-famous Highline Trail, one of the best hikes in Glacier. It ends at Logan Pass, which is at 6,500 feet of elevation and is the highest point in the park accessible by car. 

East Glacier

This 17-mile stretch of Going-to-the-Sun Road starts at Logan Pass, and descends down to St. Mary Lake and the town of St. Mary, passing the Jackson Glacier Overlook, Baring Falls, St. Mary (and Virginia) Falls, and more. 

It’s slightly less visited than West Glacier, but is still worth spending some time exploring. There are some places to stay around St. Mary Lake would be a good backup option if you weren’t able to snag a spot near Many Glacier, which leads us to…

Many Glacier

If you like hiking, this is our favorite area of the three in the park. Many Glacier is not along Going-to-the-Sun Road. To get there, you have to leave the park through the east side, and reenter near the town of Babb, Montana. 

There are an unbelievable number of amazing hikes leaving from trailheads nearby, and a number of great lakes that are right off of the road if you’re not up for a long trek. There’s also some great spots to see wildlife (including moose), and a cool boat tour to do. 

We would highly recommend that you devote one day of your Glacier National Park itinerary to Many Glacier, and stay the night if you can. 

We’re going to use these three areas to help you organize your itinerary in the day-by-day section below, so we wanted to give you a crash course in Glacier National Park’s geography before we started throwing out terms that we haven’t explained. 

Of course, it goes without saying that this is our way of slicing and dicing the park up into more digestible chunks, and there is plenty to do and see outside of these three areas. 

And also, we’re not experts in the geography of the park – you should definitely talk to a ranger at one of the Visitor Centers to learn more!

Hey you! Planning a trip to Glacier National Park? Don’t miss our other Glacier travel guides to help you plan an incredible trip.

Matt is the founder and main writer behind Wheatless Wanderlust, which he started back in 2018 as a way to share his gluten free travel guides with his fellow Celiac travelers.

Since then, Matt and his wife Alysha have visited 18 national parks, spent three months in Europe and six weeks in Colombia, and have explored every corner of the Pacific Northwest, which is where Matt grew up.

He writes super detailed guides to the places they visit, bringing together personal experience and historical context to help YOU plan an amazing trip.

Leave a Reply Cancel reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed .

Glacier National Park Itineraries: Planning the Best One-, Two- or Five-day Trip

Glacier National Park, the Crown of the Continent, is truly a treasure. And we’ll tell you how to maximize the gems for your Montana itinerary. Here's how we recommend spending one, two or five days in beautiful Glacier National Park.

How to spend a day in Glacier

If your time is limited, you’ll be able to see and do the most in West Glacier. A variety of attractions are centrally located in this charming village on Glacier’s doorstep, including rafting, fishing, biking and mini golf with delicious food and drink mere steps away.

Sign up for a guided half-day river trip with Glacier Raft Co. or Glacier Anglers & Outfitters to tap into the skills of experienced guides. You can do it yourself, but you might miss out on the local knowledge you get with the pros. Either way, you’ll work up an appetite that can be quenched in the West Glacier Village. Find New York-style slices and whole pies at Glacier National Pizza, casual fare at Freda’s or head to the Belton Chalet for fine dining in the west side’s most historic lodge. And if you play a round of mini golf at Golfing to the Sun , then a friendly wager will make sure the loser has to pay.

For a bit of classic Glacier scenery to close out the day, head to Apgar and take in the views of beautiful Lake McDonald. Stay a while, soak it in and savour your newly made Montana memories.

How to spend two days in Glacier

Those lucky enough to plan a two-day trip can enjoy longer adventures. Book a full-day rafting or fishing trip with Glacier Raft Co. or Glacier Anglers & Outfitters and enjoy riverside dining, compliments of your fishing or rafting guides, plus more time on the Flathead River.

With a whole day of water-top adventuring under your belt, you can use your second day to go on a hike that will knock your socks off. Avalanche Lake and McDonald Creek are some of the most popular trails, but you’ll find plenty of other approachable trails for your day of hiking nearby . Make sure you have a vehicle reservation pass for all applicable entrances and dates. You can also enter restricted areas before 6 a.m. or after 3 p.m. without one.

If you don’t have a reservation, there are still plenty of trails to take on, including Apgar Lookout, Rocky Point Trail or Huckleberry Mountain Lookout. You can also head to Whitefish to explore the Whitefish Trail. 

To book your overnight stay, explore all the available accommodations in West Glacier. From the West Glacier RV Park to the Belton Chalet (and the Basecamp Lodge, Paddle Ridge and West Glacier Cabins in between) there’s something for everyone.

TIP: Looking to spend just one more day in Glacier? Check out our three-day itinerary!

How to spend five days in Glacier

If you have five days to spend in Glacier National Park, you’ll be lucky enough to see it all. Make sure you have your vehicle reservation, grab your car keys and hit the road — the Going-to-the-Sun Road, that is.

Start in West Glacier and plan accordingly with the one- and two-day trips above. Your legs and lungs will be warmed up by day three. Head to Logan Pass and choose your next epic trek: Hidden Lake Overlook or the impressive Virginia Falls trail.

Spend your third night at St. Mary Village or in one of the charming St. Mary Tiny Homes where there are sights, sounds and tasty treats aplenty. You can fuel up at the Triple Divide Coffee Co. in the morning and wind down at the Mountain Bar by night. Dine at the Snowgoose Grille or the Curly Bear Cafe in between your adventures to nearby St. Mary Lake, Virginia Falls, Many Glacier and Iceberg Lake Trail. If rugged and gorgeous Babb is on your route, don’t miss a chance to eat at the Two Sisters Café.

Make your way to East Glacier for night number four and book a room at the historic Glacier Park Lodge, where you’ll find timeless hospitality alongside the comforts of today. On-site dining will keep you satisfied any time of day, and the nine-hole pitch-and-putt course will keep you well occupied between meals.

On your fifth day, treat yourself to some relaxation and reflection aboard a boat tour on Two Medicine Lake. Depending on your travel plans, enjoy your final night at the lodge with dinner in the Great Northern Dining Room, retrace your steps on the Going-to-the-Sun Road or take the quicker route back to West Glacier along Highway 2.

Bonus: Extra adventure above the border

If your calendar allows, head north of the border to Waterton Lakes National Park in Canada, where there are plenty of ways to fill your days. The Prince of Wales Hotel will dazzle you with unparalleled views and a legendary tea service. Don’t forget your passport… and your best teatime manners.

No matter how long you spend in the Crown of the Continent, we’re sure you’ll leave with memories to last a lifetime. See you in Montana!

Book Your Experience

More Stories Like This

Stay connected.

Insider tips, inspiration and deals - delivered straight to your inbox.

1.844.868.7474 | CONTACT US

Stay connected

• Work with us

4 Day Glacier National Park Itinerary (Logan Pass, Lake McDonald, St. Mary, & North Fork)

Last updated on January 18th, 2024

In this Glacier National Park itinerary we are covering everything you need to know before visiting. Including when to visit, where to stay, and things to do at Glacier National Park! For years Glacier National Park has been at the top of not only our national park bucket list, but our United States bucket list. Every summer we would hope to finally get to visit the park. And it just never worked out because of timing or logistics. But despite a couple challenges, like traveling with our dog Kona and our van being too long (more on that later), we finally made it happen this summer and it was 1000% worth the wait! We didn’t know if it could meet our very high expectations, but to be honest, it exceeded them. When we visited in August 2020, it was during COVID-19. Which meant that our experience was a bit different than normal. (The east side, including Two Medicine and Many Glacier were closed.) But we still had the most incredible time!

We drove the crazy gorgeous Going-to-the-Sun Road, hiked the epic Highline Trail (our new favorite US hike!). We ate delicious local treats (huckleberry anyone?!), swam in a beautiful lake, and so much more. It was the most perfect few days and we are already counting down the days until we can return!

Watch our experience at Glacier National Park, including driving the Going-to-the-Sun Road, hiking the Highline Trail, and more!

We are excited to share this 4 day Glacier National Park itinerary. Which is full of our favorite sights, hikes, and eats from our time at the park! Prepare to turn into the heart eyed emoji and “oooh and ahhh” for 96 hours straight. This park is an absolute GEM and we are so pumped for you to experience it! Note: During our trip the majority of the east side of the park, which is on the Blackfeet Indian reservation, was closed due to COVID-19. This Glacier National Park itinerary will only focus on the areas along the Going-to-the-Sun Road. Including Logan Pass, part of St. Mary, and Lake McDonald, as well as the North Fork area. We hope to visit the rest of the park in 2021!

Important update about visiting the park in 2023 During specific dates and hours during the summer season you are required to have a reservation to access the park roads. We will share more details about this below!

Check out our other Glacier National Park guides:

• Driving the Going-to-the-Sun Road
• Hiking the Highline Trail to Grinnell Glacier Overlook

About Glacier National Park

Different regions of glacier national park, new: vehicle reservations for glacier national park, when to visit glacier national park, getting to glacier national park, getting around glacier national park, where to stay in glacier national park, things to know before you visit glacier national park, 4 days in glacier national park itinerary, if you have extra time….

Glacier National Park became the United State’s 8th National Park in 1910. And is located in northwestern Montana, right on the border of Canada. In fact, the park, combined with Waterton Lakes, which is right across the border on the Canadian side, became the first international peace park in 1932. Together, Glacier and Waterton Lakes are often referred to as the “Crown of the Continent”. Because they sit at the headwaters of streams that flow into the Pacific Ocean, Gulf of Mexico and Hudson Bay. By itself, Glacier National Park encompasses over 1 million acres. And is home to 762 lakes, most of which are unnamed, beautiful mountain views, waterfalls, and 26 named glaciers. All of which are shrinking in size. This makes creating a Glacier National Park itinerary so difficult because there’s so much to see! Despite not being fully open the majority of the year, Glacier is the 10th most visited National Park in the United States, with 3 million visitors annually. The park is absolutely magnificent and there is no doubt as to why millions flock to it every year. Note: it costs $35 per vehicle to enter Glacier National Park, which covers 7 days. However, we highly recommend getting the America the Beautiful pass . Which is $80 per year and will get you into any National Park, monument, or forest for free.

Before embarking on your adventure, please review the  Leave No Trace principles  to ensure you leave every place better than you found it, so that others can enjoy these beautiful places for many years to come! These seven principles include planning ahead and preparing, hiking and camping on durable surfaces, disposing of waste properly (pack out what you pack in!), understanding campfire rules and always fully extinguishing your fires, respecting wildlife, and being considerate of other visitors. 

There are a handful of different regions that make up Glacier National Park, each with incredible hikes and views. We’re sharing a map in the section above with each area marked. As well as information about each area below so you can plan accordingly for your Glacier National Park itinerary!

Lake McDonald Valley

Open: typically open year round On the west side of Glacier, sits Lake McDonald. Which is the largest lake in the park at 10 miles long, over a mile wide, and almost 500 feet deep. It is home to the historic Lake McDonald Lodge, as well as the Apgar Visitor Center. And there are many activities in the area. Including hiking, swimming, horseback riding, a boat tour, and a ranger led evening program. The Lake McDonald Valley is the beginning point of the Going-to-the-Sun Road from the west. So you’ll likely drive through this area almost daily during your Glacier National Park itinerary.

Open: Typically late June or early July until mid-October, but this varies depending on the weather This is a can’t miss area of the park and must be on your Glacier National Park itinerary! Located about 1 hour from the start of Lake McDonald, Logan Pass is the highest elevation you can reach in the park by car, which you get to by driving the iconic Going-to-the-Sun Road. Logan Pass is home to some of the most incredible and popular hikes in the park. Including Hidden Lake and the Highline Trail, as well as the Logan Pass Visitor Center. Because of this, the area can get very busy. We highly recommend arriving just before sunrise to get parking and an early start on the trails. The parking lot usually fills by 8:30 AM in the summer. There is also a shuttle that can bring you to Logan Pass. However it was not running in 2020, so make sure to check! Another perk of arriving early is to experience the early morning light hitting the mountains, which is magical. We saw some amazing sunrises from the visitor center parking lot! You also will have a very good chance of seeing some wildlife up close and personal. Including mountain goats and bighorn sheep!

Open: Typically late May to early October, but this varies depending on the weather St. Mary is located on the eastern end of the Going-to-the-Sun Road. It is just a short drive to the eastern part of the park, including Many Glacier. This part of the park is home to a visitor center, some amazing waterfalls, like St. Mary, Virginia, and Baring falls, as well as gorgeous views of St. Mary Lake. During our visit, a portion of the St. Mary area was closed. But from the part we got to see, it sure is beautiful. And offers a lot to explore for many different activity levels. Still worth adding to your Glacier National Park itinerary.

Open: Partially accessible in the winter The North Fork area is located in the northwest of the park. To access this area you will need your own car (all-wheel or 4 wheel drive is recommended). It’s a bumpy, dusty unpaved road. But don’t worry, it’s not too bad and our van was able to make it just fine! We originally didn’t plan to visit this area during our Glacier National Park itinerary. But we are so glad we did, as it’s much more remote and less busy than other areas of the park. But beware, there are very limited services and no cell phone service. So come prepared with a full tank of gas, snacks, offline maps, and a sense of adventure.  In North Fork you will find beautiful Bowman and Kintla Lakes and the cute, tiny community of Polebridge. Polebridge offers a tiny bit of accommodations and the Polebridge Mercantile. Where you’ll find coffee and the famous huckleberry bear claws (THE BEST!). We have learned since our visit that vehicles over 21 feet are not allowed to drive the roads once you enter the park past Polebridge. Our van is 22.5 ft long, but the ranger let us drive it anyway. But don’t risk it!

Many Glacier, Two Medicine, & Goat Haunt

Open: Partially open for winter activities like cross country skiing and snowshoeing in the winter These three regions are located on the east side of Glacier. Which we unfortunately were unable to visit during our Glacier National Park itinerary. Due to it being closed this year. We have heard that these areas are home to some of the most beautiful hikes and views in the park, so we cannot wait to go back and experience it for ourselves!

Since our visit in 2020, Glacier National Park has implemented a vehicle reservation system for all roads into the park. Between May 24-September 8, 2024 you are required to have a reservation to access the Going-to-the-Sun Road (from the west) and North Fork from the hours of 6 AM-3 PM MDT. And between July 1-September 8, 2024 you are required to have a reservation to access Many Glacier from the hours of 6 AM-3 PM MDT. You can either reserve a pass to drive the road or will have a pass included if you’re staying at certain lodging inside the park or have specific tours booked. Here are some details on the reservation and you can find out more about how to get your pass here .

• They cost $2 each (in addition to the park fee)
• Your reservation will get you onto the road for 1 day
• Some of the reservations become available 120 days before the day you want to get a reservation, while the rest become available the day before at 8 AM MDT.

Can’t get a reservation? If you cannot get a reservation, you can still enter the park and drive these roads before or after the hours that require them. For example, you can enter the road before 6 AM (which we’d recommend anyways) or after 3 PM. Only the Going-to-the-Sun Road from the west side requires a reservation. You can enter from St. Marys without one. So that is a great option if you’re unable to get a reservation and want to visit between 6 AM-3 PM. You can find out more details on how to get your pass here . This new requirement heavily impacts this guide, so make sure to plan accordingly!

While Glacier National Park is technically open 365 days a year, most of the park, including the Going-to-the-Sun Road, is closed during the winter. Late May through early July is typically when the majority of the park begins to open up again. And the most popular times to visit the park are July-September . This is when the trails tend to be clear of snow, fully accessible, and full of wildflowers. During this time, daytime temperatures average in the 70s and nighttime in the 40s. It’s absolutely perfect for a Glacier National Park itinerary! However, during these months, there are two things that can damper the fun. Crowds and wildfire smoke, which typically obscure the views in the park for a period of time every summer. If you want to avoid both, we’d suggest visiting in either late June or early September. Note: the Going-to-the-Sun Road may not be open in late June. If you want to drive the Going-to-the-Sun Road, which takes you from Lake McDonald to Logan Pass and St. Mary, the best time to visit is late June or early July to early October . While the road is partially maintained for much of the year, particularly the Lake McDonald to Avalanche Lake area, the alpine portions are not maintained in the winter months and there is no set date for when it reopens each year.

One of the best things about Glacier is how remote you feel when you’re in the park. But the downside is that it makes it a tiny bit trickier to get there. Although there are quite a few smaller cities surrounding the park, there are no major cities nearby, so you may have a bit of a drive to get there. If you’re flying into Glacier, the closest airport is Glacier Park International Airport (GPIA) in Kalispell, Montana. This airport can be accessed with direct flights from Los Angeles, Salt Lake City, Denver, Dallas, and Atlanta through major airlines such as Delta, United, Alaska, and American Airlines. The airport is pretty small (we rented a car here), so flights may be a bit pricier. And if you’re not located in one of the cities above, you will have a connection. But at around 44 minutes from the park entrance, it may be worth the cost or layover to be very close to the park. Two other airports you could fly into are Missoula International Airport(MSO) in Missoula (2.5 hours away), Montana serves many of the same airlines and cities as Glacier Park International Airport, or Spokane International Airport (GEG) in Spokane, Washington (4.5 hours away), which will have the most flight options available. Driving to the park? Here is how far popular nearby destinations are from the west entrance of the park: Kalispell, MT: 44 mins, 33 miles Missoula, MT: 2 hours 35 mins, 138 miles Calgary, AB (Canada): 3 hours, 140 miles. This would make for an EPIC trip to swing by Banff and Jasper before or after Glacier! Spokane, WA: 4 hours 36 mins, 273 miles Bozeman, MT: 4 hours 57 mins, 289 miles  Seattle, WA : 9 hours, 550 miles Boise, ID : 10 hours, 524 miles Portland, OR : 10 hours, 624 miles One other option to get to the park is by train ! Amtrak offers a few different options for train rides to Glacier, including various cities for departure, different trip lengths, and even adding on the Canadian Rockies (Banff and Jasper), Yosemite, Yellowstone, or even the Grand Canyon to your trip. Amtrak’s packages include lodging, as well as some activities while at Glacier National Park. This would be an incredible adventure!

Glacier National Park is 1,583 square miles, making it a huge park to explore! To truly enjoy the Glacier National Park itinerary we highly recommend renting a car for your time at the park if you’re flying in. If you’re road tripping in from somewhere in a car then you’re all set! Although, keep in mind that the Going-to-the-Sun road has a length limit of 21 feet, 8 feet wide, and 10 feet tall . So if you are in a van or RV be aware of how this might affect you. Our van is 22.5 feet and we had to rent a car so we could drive the road.

There are free shuttles that can take you along the Going-to-the-Sun Road. From the Apgar visitor center to St. Mary visitor center. This is a great option if your vehicle is too long and you want to explore the park, without renting a car. However, if you want to catch the shuttle at Apgar, you do need a vehicle reservation to even get to the shuttle stop. The St Mary Visitor Center bus stop is outside of the reservation area. So you could park there and take the shuttle to experience the Going-to-the-Sun road. Something else to know about these shuttles is that they are only open seasonally (usually July 1st through Labor Day). And they do not start running very early. So if you plan to do any long hikes or want to beat the crowds, we’d suggest having your own car. If you want a more unique and educational experience during your Glacier National Park itinerary, you can take a red bus tour through the park, which has various routes, ranging in length. These vintage vehicles are restored from the 1930s and are super cool. But the downside to these is that you do not get to hike on these tours. It’s more about learning about the park and seeing the sights from the road.  The Blackfeet Perspective by Sun Tours is another amazing tour opportunity. These half-day and full-day tours let you learn more about the park through the Blackfeet perspective. You will learn about history, culture, family, and local knowledge about the area that Blackfeet have long called home for many years. There are tours of the East and West sides, individually, or both. If you want a shuttle to connect you from different lodges and areas outside of the park to the park shuttle, Xanterra operates a paid shuttle that can help you get to a few different destinations.

With a handful of awesome smaller cities nearby, as well as accommodations in the park, there are quite a few options of places to stay for your Glacier National Park itinerary. Here are some lodging options that we would recommend. Starting with options inside of the park. Which is great if you’re looking for convenience and less time driving to the park and more time exploring.

Park Campgrounds

There are 13 park campgrounds to choose from at Glacier National Park and 1,009 sites, ranging from $10-$23 per night. While most campgrounds in the park are on a first come first served basis, Fish Creek , St. Mary , Many Glacier , and Apgar’s group sites allow reservations. Make sure to book very far in advance (you can book up to 6 months in advance) to secure a spot! For the rest of the park’s campgrounds, you can check the current conditions and see what time they filled up on this page , which is super helpful to make sure you snag a first come, first served site. For the sake of this Glacier National Park itinerary, Fish Creek, Apgar, Sprague Creek, Avalanche, Rising Sun, and St. Mary would be the most convenient options to the majority of the items on this guide. If you want to be close to both the town and the park, we’d suggest Apgar or Fish Creek. Note: According to the NPS, RVs and truck and trailer combinations are not recommended at these campgrounds: Bowman Lake, Cut Bank, Kintla Lake, Logging Creek, Quartz Creek, and Sprague Creek.

Want to find campsites all over the US? Try the Dyrt PRO for FREE for one month! The Dyrt is the #1 camping app in the US! Sign up for a FREE 30 day trial of their PRO version using our code AplusK ! The Dyrt PRO offers many incredible features to make finding campsites even easier (+ cheaper). Some of our favorite features are: -Offline maps, so you can find campsites without cell service -Map layers to find free camping areas (+ cell phone service map layers) -Discounts from PRO partners and on campground bookings (up to 40%!)

Park Lodges

If you are looking for a “step back in time” experience while at the park, look no further than staying at a classic lodge in the park. No televisions or elevators, floors that creak, and hand carved staircases and railings are part of the experience at these lodges.  The Lake McDonald Lodge is a historic lodge built in 1913 on the eastern shore of Lake McDonald. It is a 3 story Swiss chalet style lodge with 82 rustic, but comfortable rooms. We can’t imagine waking up to a view of the lake! The Village Inn at Apgar is on the western shore of Lake McDonald and has one and two bedroom motel style units with full kitchens, making it perfect if you’re with a small group and/or want to cook meals. The Inn was built in 1956 and still retains that 50s charm in its decor and style.  Apgar Village Lodge & Cabins is located in Apgar Village where you can easily rent a bike, book a tour, or swim in Lake McDonald. There are cabins available with and without kitchens and family units.

Backcountry Chalets

A backcountry chalet is something we have been dying to stay in since our trip to Italy and the Dolomites a few years ago! There are only 2 chalets remaining in the park and they both are only reached by trail, the Sperry Chalet and Granite Park Chalet . Neither are exactly cheap, but what an experience they would be to stay in! The Granite Park Chalet is a hikers hostel where you can cook your own food in the kitchen and need to bring all of your necessities. The Sperry Chalet is more of a full service experience. This chalet features private rooms, bedding and 3 meals from the restaurant.

Outside of the Park

If you want to stay outside of the park during the Glacier National Park itinerary, we’d highly recommend looking into Columbia Falls, Kalispell, and Whitefish as your home base, all of which have lots of options for places to stay, as well as restaurants, coffee shops, and grocery stores. Here are a handful of options, ranging from Airbnbs, hotels, campgrounds, and more!

vacation rentalS

If you plan to start your adventures super early in the park, which we’d recommend in the Glacier National Park itinerary, a vacation rental would be a great option for a place to stay. With access to a kitchen, you’ll be able to whip yourself up some very early morning coffee and food before hitting the trails, as well as have a comfortable place to return to everyday. Columbia Falls Columbia Falls is probably the closest you can stay to the park at just a 20 minute drive to the entrance. Bergie’s Bunkhouse: A 1 bedroom, 1 bathroom home Cozy Condo: A 2 bedroom, 1 bathroom condo that sleeps 6 Heart of Glacier Country:  A 3 bedroom, 2.5 bathroom house, perfect for the whole family Kalispell While a little bit south of the park, this area is convenient to the local airport and has tons of amenities. The “Love” Cottage : A 1 bedroom, 1 bathroom guest house Modern House : A 2 bedroom, 2 bathroom house for up to 5 guests Updated Charming Home: a 3 bedroom, 2 bathroom home that’s pet friendly Whitefish We loved the town of Whitefish! It’s super cute and is close to both Glacier, as well as tons of other outdoor activities! Downtown Whitefish Condo: 1 bedroom, 1 bathroom simple but upgraded apartment Cowboy Condo: A 2 bedroom, 1 bathroom condo that sleeps 6 Whitefish Home: A gorgeous 3 bedroom, 2 bathroom home that sleeps 8 and has a hot tub Flathead Lake This will be a bit further to the park, but this area is gorgeous! Modern Tiny House : A gorgeous 1 bedroom, 1 bathroom tiny house in a beautiful setting Mountain Home with Flathead Lake Views: A bright 2 bedroom, 2 bath home with insane views! Stunning Lakeside House: A gorgeous 3 bedroom, 3 bathroom home with mountain views. Bigfork Townhome: A 3 bedroom, 3.5 bathroom townhouse on a golf course.

Reclusive Moose Cabins (Columbia Falls) Cedar Creek Lodge (Columbia Falls) Glacier Outdoor Center (West Glacier) Country Inn & Suites (Kalispell) Hampton Inn (Kalispell) Springhill Suites (Kalispell) Best Western Plus Flathead Lake (Kalispell) Homewood Suites (Kalispell) Hampton Inn (Whitefish) Best Western Rocky Mountain Lodge (Whitefish) Bar W Guest Ranch (Whitefish)

CAMPGROUNDS

RV Parks Mountain Meadow RV Park (Hungry Horse): this is where we stayed during our Glacier National Park itinerary! We didn’t want to risk not getting a free campground during the busy season, so we booked this spot to have somewhere to keep the van while we hiked and to not stress about where to sleep at night. Like most RV parks, the spots are kind of close together, but we did like how this one had tons of trees to give it more of a campground feel vs. RV park feel. Glacier Campground : There are both RV and tent sites here, as well as cabins! West Glacier KOA : This KOA is close to the west entrance of the park. Similar to most KOAs, it doesn’t have much privacy at all, so be prepared to have close neighbors. National Forest Campgrounds These campgrounds are all reservable 6 months in advance and are great for both tents and RVs. Tally Lake Campground Big Creek Campground Lost Johnny Point Campground Emery Bay Campground Free Campgrounds Middle Fork Flathead River : This free campground looks amazing! It’s right on the river and good for RVs and vans, although the road can be a bit rough. You can only stay here for 3 days though. Find more free campsites on Campendium and freecampsites.net ! 

For a luxurious camping experience check out Under Canvas Glacier ! At this location they offer lofted Treehouse canvas tents and safari-inspired suites complete with king size beds, private bathrooms, and a wood burning stove! This accommodation is located only 7 miles from the park entrance.

Before you visit Glacier National Park itinerary, here are a few of our top tips to ensure you have a fun and safe time:

• Get to the park early! We always recommend getting anywhere early, but if you want to enjoy some solitude, shoot for arriving by 7 AM. 
• Visit during the week. Weekdays are a lot less busy at the park and can be more enjoyable.
• Make sure to pack the 10 essentials. Although many of the trails are well trafficked and well marked, always have the 10 essentials with you just in case things do not go according to plan. 
• Be bear (and wildlife) aware . Black and grizzly bears (the more aggressive of the two) both call Glacier National Park home. While attacks are very uncommon , there is a good chance you will see a bear at the park (we saw two black bears from the car), so please review what to do if you see a bear . Mountain lions, moose, mountain goats, and bighorn sheep also call the park home, so please keep your distance from them as well.
• Carry bear spray! It is crucial to carry bear spray in the park just in case you encounter a bear and it starts to get aggressive. You can rent this from Glacier Outfitters in West Glacier if you’re flying in.
• Be flexible! During our trip to Glacier we couldn’t hike two popular trails that we were excited about due to bear activity. It is pretty common for trails to close due to grizzlies, which is for everyone’s safety, so we appreciated it, so be prepared to have plans change and make sure to have back up options!
• Pack food + water and fill up with gas! There aren’t really any food options in the park past Lake McDonald, so make sure to pack meals to enjoy during your hikes! If you start near visitor centers, they will have water fountains, but if not, make sure you have enough water on you, or a water filter in case you need to fill up in a stream. There is also only one gas station on the road, right at West Glacier, so make sure you have a full tank!
• Dogs are not allowed! Just like the other National Parks, dogs are not allowed outside of parking areas and campgrounds at Glacier National Park. Traveling with your dog? Learn what we do with Kona if she cannot join us during our travels. For this trip, Kona stayed at Columbia Mountain Kennels .
• Be prepared for variable weather. The temperature at Logan Pass can be 10 degrees cooler than at Lake McDonald, so make sure to pack layers (and sunscreen for sunny days)!
• Download maps beforehand. With little to no service in the park, we highly recommend downloading AllTrails maps before you go. You will need an AllTrails+ membership to do so, which is $35.99 a year and so worth it!

Want to get 30% off an AllTrails+ membership ? Use our code aplusk30 (you must redeem this code on the website, not the app)! We use AllTrails+ on every single hike and it is the most helpful hiking tool out there! Some of the features we love are offline maps (so we can navigate even without cell service), wrong-turn alerts, and its 3D maps feature, so we can get a feel for trails before we hike.

Now that you know how to get to Glacier, when to visit, where to stay, and tips for your visit, it’s time to start planning! Here is a 4 day Glacier National Park itinerary with the best hikes, places to eat, roadside stops, and things to do at Glacier National Park!

Day 1 of this Glacier National Park itinerary is all about seeing highlights along the Going-to-the-Sun highway, as well as doing some iconic, but not too long hikes! Total miles of hiking: 11.3 miles

• Make a quick coffee and hit the road early to get to Logan Pass for sunrise to start off the Glacier National Park itinerary. I know this sounds brutal, but trust us, it’ll be sooo worth it! You can either enjoy the sunrise from along the Going-to-the-Sun road or at the Logan Pass visitor center, which has incredible views!  
• Hike the Hidden Lake Trail , which is 5.3 miles with 1,374 feet of elevation. This trail starts at the Logan Pass visitor center and after 1.4 miles you’ll reach the Hidden Lake Overlook, but make sure to continue on to Hidden Lake.   Note: When we visited, this hike was closed due to grizzly bear activity (the trail was closed for at least a week) so we suggest checking the trail’s status in advance so you’re not disappointed. From the photos we have seen, this hike looks incredible and it’s high on our list for next time!  
• Drive the EPIC Going-to-the-Sun Road ( reservation required during specific times)! After leaving the Logan Pass visitor center and Hidden Lake trailhead, continue east along the Going-to-the-Sun road towards Sun Point and St. Mary. There are a handful of overlooks along the way to give you even more crazy beautiful views of the park, including the Jackson Glacier Overlook and Wild Goose Island Lookout.   Want a more detailed guide on the Going-to-the-Sun road and the must visit stops and tips? Check out our Guide to Driving the Going-to-the-Sun Road!  
• Hike to see Baring, St. Mary, and Virginia Falls , which we think is about 6 miles total. You will start this hike at the Sun Point parking area . Take the Sun Point nature trail about 0.1 miles to Sun Point, which overlooks Saint Mary Lake. After soaking in the views, head back towards the parking area, but instead of turning right, continue straight towards Baring Falls.   You’ll go along Saint Mary Lake to the falls, as well as some bare trees, which were burned in a fire, and possibly wildflowers, which makes for some beautiful and unique scenery. After seeing Baring Falls, follow the trail to St. Mary Falls, which is Gatorade blue, and finally Virginia Falls, which has these super cool red rocks.   The waterfalls get better and better as you go and if you’re lucky like us you might see a moose or other wildlife! We couldn’t find an AllTrails route page for it, but this is the best representation we could find! Our friends, The Mandagies , also wrote a great blog post about the trail too!  
• End the day by driving back west on the Going-to-the-Sun Road. If you’re in the park for sunset, we highly recommend the Big Bend Overlook for sunset. It’s absolutely magical to watch the valley fill with light as the sun goes down.  
• Looking for a dinner spot close to the park? Check out Backslope Brewing , Gunsight Saloon , or The DeSoto Grill .

On day 2 of this Glacier National Park itinerary, you’ll take things a little easier with some delicious coffee and breakfast, a gorgeous hike, and time relaxing at Lake McDonald! Total miles of hiking: 6.7

• Sleep in a bit and grab coffee and breakfast at Uptown Hearth (closed Monday and Tuesday), located in Columbia Falls. A couple other coffee shops to check out in the area are: Montana Coffee Traders and Azul Coffee Bar .  
• Hike to Avalanche Lake via the Trail of the Cedars , which is 6.7 miles and 757 ft of elevation gain. Similar to our experience with Hidden Lake, when we went to hike the trail to Avalanche Lake, it was unfortunately closed for bear activity.   But we did get to experience the Trail of the Cedars and it was a very nice walk in the woods with a super cool gorge with bright blue, glacial water. And from what we can see, Avalanche Lake looks very worth the additional miles!  
• After your hike, spend the rest of the day at Lake McDonald . This lake marks the beginning of the Going-to-the-Sun Road from the west and at 10 miles long, and over a mile wide and 472 feet deep, it is the largest lake in the park. It’s known for its amazing views of the mountains, colorful rocks, and clear water.   There is a lot you can do in this area of the park, including horseback riding, hikes, and swimming in the lake. We spent our time at a day use area , which had some beach space and great views of the lake and mountains. We floated around on a floaty, but you can also rent kayaks by Apgar village!   PS: If you have time, do the Johns Lake Loop hike to McDonald Falls on the way to the lake!  
• For dinner, check out Backslope Brewing , Gunsight Saloon , or The DeSoto Grill , all of which are close to the park.  
• Get lots of sleep because tomorrow will be a BIG day!

Prepare to be amazed! Day 3 on this Glacier National Park itinerary includes one of the most epic hikes the park has to offer. It’ll be a long day, but your eyes will be in awe the entire time! Total miles of hiking: 15.2

• Get a very early start and head up to Logan Pass to spend the day experiencing one of the greatest trails that the park has to offer, the Highline Trail!  
• There are a few different ways to hike the Highline Trail, including different starting and ending points, hiking to a chalet, hiking to a glacier overlook, or only hiking a portion of the trail. We have an entire guide on hiking the Highline Trail , which covers everything you need to know about the trail, your options, what to bring, and so much more , so we suggest reading that to find out everything you need to know before you go.   But for the sake of this guide, we’re going to recommend hiking the Highline Trail to the Grinnell Glacier Overlook , which is about 15.2 miles round trip (AllTrails says it’s 14.7 miles, but the park maps said 15.2) and 3,507 ft of elevation gain.   This trail is absolutely stunning and quickly became our favorite hike in the US (so far)! However, it can be a bit tough at times, especially the 0.6 miles to the top of the Grinnell Glacier Overlook on the Garden Wall trail. Longest 0.6 miles ever! But don’t let that scare you, it’s 100% worth it for the view at the top! The Gatorade blue water and lakes off in the distance are stunning!   The hike took us about 8 hours , but we’d recommend planning for 10 just to be safe. Also, starting early is KEY to having some solitude on the trail! We hardly ran into anyone on the way to the overlook, but we did have to move to the side on the way back, especially the last couple miles, to let people pass. And make sure to bring lots of water and food for fuel. You’ll need it!   PS: If 15.2 miles is too much for you to do in one day, we highly recommend doing at least some of the trail during your Glacier National Park itinerary to see some of the best views in the park!  
• After conquering the Highline Trail, treat yourself to some huckleberry pie at The Huckleberry Patch ! While a bit of a touristy spot, the pie is delicious and tastes even better after 15+ miles. They also have regular food, but we didn’t have a chance to try it.

Day 4 

Spend your last day of the Glacier National Park itinerary exploring a less busy, but just as incredible, part of the park. As well as eating one of our new favorite treats! Total miles of hiking: 0-11.6

• Recover a bit from yesterday’s hike by sleeping in a bit and then heading to the North Fork area of the park ( reservation required during specific times)!   We didn’t originally plan on visiting this area of the park during our trip, but when our original plans fell through on our last day and we had no cell service to figure out what to do, we remembered hearing about this area of the park and we decided why the heck not! We followed signs to get there and are so glad we made the trek out there to experience a more off the beaten path side of one of the most beautiful places on Earth.   There is no cell phone service on the drive and getting to this area requires driving on dirt roads, but it’s really not bad. And if you’re lucky, you’ll have a bear run right in front of you like we did!  
• Right at the entrance of the North Fork area is the cute town of Polebridge . This town is home to the Polebridge Mercantile , which has been open for 106 years…crazy! The mercantile is part store, coffee shop, bakery, and pizzeria. But they are probably most famous for an insanely delicious pastry called a Huckleberry bear claw .   These pastries are loaded with huckleberry (and we think some sort of cheese?), shaped like a bear claw, and are drizzled with a sauce and strudel on top. These are crazy delicious and are a MUST EAT item while near Glacier! Note: you do NOT need a reservation to access the mercantile.  
• If you have a reservation for North Fork Road, we highly recommend taking your bear claw to Bowman Lake , which is a gorgeous, large lake surrounded by mountains. It’s about a 35 minute drive from Polebridge and requires more driving on dirt roads, but it makes an epic spot to picnic with your bear claws (notice we said claws, not claw, because you’ll definitely want more than one!)   If you want to do some hiking while at Bowman Lake, we suggest checking out the Numa Ridge Lookout Trail , which is 11.6 miles and 3,021 ft of gain and ends with a great view of Bowman lake, the surrounding mountains, and an operating fire lookout!   That may be a bit ambitious after tackling the Highline Trail the day before, so if you’re looking for something easier, you can hike along Bowman Lake for a bit.  
• After spending the day in the North Fork area, head to Whitefish . We loved this little mountain town’s vibe and views! Whether you are rewarding yourself after a hike or rewarding yourself for relaxing at Bowman Lake all day, do NOT skip a meal at the Wich Haus (Closed Mondays and Tuesdays)!   They might possibly have the best sandwich we’ve had outside of our favorite in Italy! They have “a locally-driven and often changing menu that tastes of Montana” so you are sure to have something unique to try.  
• And for dessert (the bear claw was technically breakfast, so it doesn’t count as dessert, right?), head to Sweet Peaks Ice Cream . We loved their flavors! The perfect way to end a Glacier National Park itinerary.

We could have easily spent a month (or more!) in this area and never gotten bored. If you have more than 4 days at Glacier, here are some other ideas of things to do and places to eat to add to your Glacier National Park itinerary!

• Mudman Burgers (Columbia Falls)
• Last Chair Kitchen & Bar (Whitefish)
• Loula’s Cafe (Whitefish)
• The Farmhouse Inn and Kitchen (Whitefish)
• Abruzzo Italian Kitchen (Whitefish)
• Jalisco Cantina (Whitefish)
• Tupelo Grille (Whitefish)
• Whitefish Handcrafted Spirits (Kalispell)
• Skyes Diner (Kalispell)
• The Knead Cafe (Kalispell)
• Fleur Bake Shop (Whitefish)
• Amazing Crepes (Whitefish)
• Ceres Bakery Inc (Kalispell)
• Wild Coffee (Whitefish)
• Folklore Coffee (Whitefish)
• Colter Coffee (Kalispell)
• Visit Flathead Lake ! We loved this lake so much. It’s crystal clear, huge, and surrounded by mountains. We visited Wayfarers State Park and highly recommend grabbing Flathead cherries while in the area (we got ours at Bigfork Orchards ). We hear Burgertown Dairy Freeze is a great post-lake food stop! It’s a little further away, but an awesome bonus to the Glacier National Park itinerary.
• Explore the Many Glacier and Two Medicine areas of the park (if they are open)! We hear that Iceberg Lake (9.3 miles 1,450 feet of elevation gain), Grinnell Glacier (11.2 miles, 2,181 feet of elevation gain), Ptarmigan Lake and Tunnel Trail (8.6 miles, 1,896 feet of elevation gain), and Cracker Lake (12 miles, 1,650 feet of elevation gain) are some of the best!  
• Siyeh Pass Trail : 9.7 miles, 2,234 feet of elevation gain
• Piegan Pass Trail : 12.4 miles, 2,014 feet of elevation gain
• Gunsight Pass Trail : 18.8 miles, 3,727 feet of elevation gain
• Haystack Butte Trail : 8.2 miles, 1,689 feet of elevation gain
• Mount Oberlin Trail : 3.5 miles, 1,519 feet of elevation gain
• Go on a guided river rafting, horseback riding, fly fishing, or hiking tour with Glacier Guides Montana Raft or Wild River Adventures  
• Ride an alpine slide at Whitefish Mountain Resort ! We did this during our Glacier National Park itinerary and it was SO FUN! They also have mountain biking, a zipline, and more!

Ready to explore Glacier National Park?

Pin this Glacier National Park itinerary to help plan your trip!

get the behind the scenes scoop!

4 thoughts on “ 4 day glacier national park itinerary (logan pass, lake mcdonald, st. mary, & north fork) ”.

Very Nice of you to include ALL this info.

We’re glad you enjoyed it!

Thanks so much for all of this info! I will be driving from Boston, MA to Glacier later in July with my mom! This information is so helpful. I’m one of your usual YouTube video watchers 🙂 (and I love you guys!) but I’ve been re-watching your Glacier videos on repeat! I also watched your South Dakota videos since we’ll be stopping along the way at Mt. Rushmore, Badlands, etc. Thanks again! I can’t wait to watch your Alaska videos!

We are so glad you found it helpful! Thank you so much for watching and we hope you have a blast!

Leave a Reply Cancel reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

© 2023 Adventures of A+K. All Rights Reserved. Website built with love by  Dreamworthy Design . – Stock Photos provided by our partner  Depositphotos

Privacy Policy

• Meetings and Conventions
• Tour Operators
• Glaciers to Geysers
• Partner Center

Welcome to Glacier Country.

• Interactive Travel Guide
• Maps & Resources
• Montana Regions
• Newsletter Signup

Adventure unfolds in every direction.

• CSKT Bison Range
• Communities
• Continental Divide Trail
• Flathead Lake
• Ghost Towns
• Glacier National Park
• Historical Sites
• Hot Springs
• Lewis & Clark
• Nez Perce Trail
• Pacific Northwest Trail
• Public Land
• Scenic Byways
• Travel Corridors
• Tribal Nations
• Visitor Centers
• 102 Things to Do
• Itineraries
• Arts and Culture
• Education & Classes
• Conservation
• Things to Do in the Fall
• Things to Do in the Spring
• Things to Do in the Summer
• Things to Do in the Winter
• Things to Do in the Water
• Things to Do Outdoors
• Things to Do Indoors
• Agritourism
• Arts & Culture
• Education & Classes
• Explore Fall in Glacier Park
• Fall Events
• Fall Road Trips
• Farmers Markets
• Health & Wellness
• Llama Trekking
• Wildlife Watching
• ATV Trails + Rentals
• Camping & RV
• Guided Tours
• Guides & Outfitters
• Hiking & Backpacking Trips
• Horseback Riding
• Outdoor Gear Rental
• Photography
• Rock Climbing
• Skateboarding
• Wagon Rides
• River Surfing
• Stand-Up Paddleboarding
• Backcountry Skiing
• Cross-Country Skiing
• Dog Sledding
• Downhill Skiing
• Explore Winter in Glacier Park
• Ice Climbing
• Ice Fishing
• Ice Skating
• Skijoring Competitions
• Sleigh Rides
• Snowmobiling
• Snowshoeing
• Winter Itineraries
• Explore Spring in Glacier Park
• Food + Drink
• Performing Arts

Western hospitality at its finest.

• All Lodging
• Bed & Breakfasts
• Camping & RV
• Health & Wellness
• Hotels & Motels
• Unique Lodging
• Vacation Homes

A Noteworthy Culinary Landscape

• Bars & Nightlife
• Coffee & Tea
• Distilleries
• Restaurants

Start planning your Montana vacation.

• Accessible Adventures
• Airports and Direct Flights
• Bicycle Rental
• Electric Travel
• International Border Crossings
• Recreate Responsibly
• Recreational Marijuana
• Service Businesses
• Ski Area Snow Report
• Stream Report
• Travel Updates
• Travel on Tribal Lands
• Traveling With Pets

Western Montana’s Natural Treasure

• Facts & FAQ
• Glacier to Yellowstone
• Near the Park
• Stay in the Park
• Wildlife & Bear Safety

Glacier National Park Itineraries

• Facts & FAQ
• Wildlife & Bear Safety

Trip-Planning Help

It can be a little overwhelming—albeit exciting—to wrap your head around how you might spend your time exploring our 1-million-acre park, whether you’re looking for an hours-long guided trip or a multiday excursion. From driving the Going-to-the-Sun Road in the summer to snowshoeing along the shores of Lake McDonald in the winter, the park’s four distinct seasons provide endless possibilities. Here are some suggested itineraries to help you along. Happy travels.

Spring Seven: Western Montana’s Must-Do List

Dive into the season with our exclusive "Spring Seven" list—a treasure trove of must-do experiences that prove spring in Montana is the perfect time to visit.

Which season would you like to visit Glacier National Park and for how many days?

Spring (May + June)

May 24 – September 8, 2024 Without a Vehicle Reservation

Summer (July + August)

Fall (September + October)

Winter (November - April)

SPRING: ONE DAY IN GLACIER NATIONAL PARK

Knock this beauty off your bucket list and bike the Going-to-the-Sun Road in the spring before it's open to vehicular traffic. Take in some of America's most breathtaking scenery and experience the park in its quiet and most serene season.

You can rent bikes or e-bikes in West Glacier from Sky Eco Rentals in Coram or Glacier Guides in West Glacier, or bring your own. Please wear a helmet.

Post-ride, celebrate your feat with a burger and beer at Backslope Brewing in Columbia Falls, where tasty food meets finely crafted local brew.

Please note: Between May 26 and September 11, 2022, a vehicle reservation is required for each vehicle accessing the Going-to-the-Sun Road Corridor, which includes all points inside the West Entrance Station, Camas Entrance Station, and the Rising Sun checkpoint (6 miles west of the St. Mary Entrance). The reservation period is 6 a.m. to 4 p.m. daily.

SPRING: TWO DAYS IN GLACIER NATIONAL PARK

Day One : Experience the wild wonder of whitewater rafting with an outfitter in West Glacier. No park entry is needed for this experience, and the Middle Fork of the Flathead's class II-III rapids are family friendly.

Camp at Apgar Campground, but note that, depending on your timing, there may not be running water or flush toilets available. Don't miss the dazzling sunset over Lake McDonald from Apgar Village. If you'd rather not rough it, stay at Wonderstone at Glacier , a newly renovated, modern boutique hotel.

Day Two : Hike to Apgar Lookout for grand mountain views of the whole of Lake McDonald or hike along the lake on West Shore Lake McDonald Trail. For a more mellow hike, head to the Trail of the Cedars (one of two wheelchair-accessible trails in the park), a loop trail with beautiful views of Avalanche Gorge.

SPRING: THREE DAYS IN GLACIER NATIONAL PARK

Day One : Take in some of America's most breathtaking scenery and experience the park in its quiet and most serene season—bike the Going-to-the-Sun Road in the spring before it opens to vehicular traffic. Begin in St. Mary and stay at St. Mary Village (typically open in early June), where cozy accommodations meet epic park views.

Day Two : Head for the hills on a hike. Explore the Beaver Pond Loop, the St. Mary and Virginia Falls Trail or the Red Eagle Lake Trail. Or explore the town of Browning —Agency Headquarters for the Blackfeet Nation—or book a unique and informative, guided Tribal Cultural Workshop Hike with Iron Shield Creative—half and full day options available.

Day Three : Drive to Two Medicine and enjoy a picnic at scenic Running Eagle Falls. Then visit the architecturally stunning Glacier Park Lodge and take in the grandeur of its magnificent lobby. Explore the quaint and historic community of East Glacier Park , complete with a 9-hole golf course and historic train depot. If there's time, see how far you can hike on the Scenic Point Trail before you reach snow (probably two thirds of the way in).

If you're visiting in June, drive to Many Glacier and hike to Red Rock Falls (a unique set of cascading falls). Keep your eyes peeled for moose at Fishercap Lake, and take in the epic views of Mt. Grinnell, Swiftcurrent Glacier and Swiftcurrent Mountain from Redrock Lake. Or, view the Glacier National Park scenery from the back of a horse or from the water with a horseback ride or boat tour.

ONE DAY IN GLACIER NATIONAL PARK WITH NO VEHICAL RESERVATION

Reservations with the following concessionaires will get you into the park for your booked activity, which means you will not need a vehicle reservation. Check with the service provider for details on park entry on the day(s) of your booking.

Leave the driving to someone else and take in all the breathtaking scenery on a Sun Tour or a Red Bus Tour of one of America's most scenic roadways, the Going-to-the-Sun Road. Tours leave from both the east and west sides of the park.

TWO DAYS IN GLACIER NATIONAL PARK WITH NO VEHICAL RESERVATION

Day One : Raft the emerald waters of the Middle Fork of the Flathead and Bike the Going-to-the-Sun Road on a Glacier Guides full-day Paddle and Pedal Adventure.

Please note: The Paddle and Pedal Adventure is only available before the Going-to-the-Sun Road fully opens (mid-June).

Day Two : Embark on an informative, guided day hike with the knowledgeable guides at The Glacier Institute (leaving from Columbia Falls) or take a unique guided Tribal Cultural Workshop Hike with Iron Shield Creative on the Blackfeet Indian Reservation just to the east of Glacier National Park.

THREE DAYS IN GLACIER NATIONAL PARK WITH NO VEHICAL RESERVATION

Day One : Saddle up with Swan Mountain Outfitters for a trail ride, with corrals at West Glacier, Apgar, Lake McDonald and Many Glacier, you have multiple options for an unforgettable horseback adventure.

Day Two : Take in the Glacier National Park scenery from the water on a scenic boat tour with Glacier Park Boat Company at Lake McDonald, Many Glacier, St. Mary at Rising Sun or Two Medicine. Enjoy sparkling water, majestic peaks and informative guided commentary from your boat's captain.

Day Three : Take a guided nature walk in the Lake McDonald Valley or the North Fork with Glacier Guides , and learn all about the flora and fauna of the area from these experienced guides.

Note: Between May 26 and September 10, 2023, a vehicle reservation is required for four areas of the park: the Going-to-the-Sun Road, the North Fork, Two Medicine, and Many Glacier. Each location has unique details and requires a separate reservation. The reservation period is 6 a.m. to 3 p.m. daily.

SUMMER: ONE DAY IN GLACIER NATIONAL PARK

Set your sites on the ultimate scenic drive and head to the Going-to-the-Sun Road—one of the most breathtaking roadways in America. Along the way, stop and hike at one or more of the following trails: McDonald Creek, Hidden Lake Trail and St. Mary Falls.

SUMMER: TWO DAYS IN GLACIER NATIONAL PARK

Day One : Drive the famous and gorgeous Going-to-the-Sun Road to Lake McDonald Lodge and take a boat tour of scenic Lake McDonald, or hike the Trail of the Cedars (a wheelchair-accessible loop trail with beautiful views of Avalanche Gorge). Or, after driving over the Going-to-the-Sun Road, hike Sun Point Nature Trail, next to St. Mary Lake, which is sometimes referred to as "Three Falls Trail” for the three waterfalls you'll encounter along the way.

Camp at Rising Sun or stay in a cabin at St. Mary/East Glacier KOA Holiday or Johnson's of St. Mary. You can also rent a teepee at Chewing Black Bones Campground on the eastern shore of St. Mary Lake, complete with a visitor center, gift shop and general store, plus fishing and recreational rentals.

Day Two : Drive to Many Glacier—the "Switzerland of North America”—and take a horseback ride among the awe-inspiring peaks. (Don't miss a glimpse of the Many Glacier Hotel lobby while you're there.) Grab dinner at Two Sisters Café in Babb, for heavenly handmade food using local ingredients and Montana flavors.

SUMMER: THREE DAYS IN GLACIER NATIONAL PARK

Day One : Leave the driving to someone else and take in all the breathtaking scenery on a Sun Tour or a Red Bus Tour of one of America's most scenic roadways, the Going-to-the-Sun Road.

Spend the night in Apgar or West Glacier, both quaint villages with delicious food and cozy lodging options.

Day Two : Set out on a guided day hike with The Glacier Institute or Glacier Guides . These experienced guides can tell you all about the flora and fauna along the way, and they'll also make sure you're properly outfitted for a day on the trail.

Day Three : Get out on the lake! Rent a stand-up paddleboard or kayak and paddle beautiful and serene Lake McDonald. If hiking is more your speed, there are plenty of trails in the area, and the scenery astounds no matter where you trek.

FALL: ONE DAY IN GLACIER NATIONAL PARK

Take an epic, fall-color road trip on the Going-to-the-Sun Road. Then loop around the park for more captivating views on U.S. Highway 89 and U.S. Highway 2. Stretch your legs and stop for a snack in the charming little town of East Glacier Park. If the Going-to-the-Sun Road has closed to vehicles  for the season, bike this beautiful roadway and cross that off your bucket list.

FALL: TWO DAYS IN GLACIER NATIONAL PARK

Day One : If the Going-to-the-Sun Road has closed to vehicles for the season, bike this beautiful roadway and cross that off your bucket list.

Rough it at Apgar Campground—a primitive camping area near Apgar Village—or overnight at Glacier Outdoor Center cabins, Glacier Guides Lodge or Great Northern Resort .

Please note: Most lodging in the park is closed for the season by mid-October.

Day Two : Take a guided fly-fishing trip on the Flathead River. The pristine emerald waters and autumn colors provide the quintessential setting for casting flies and reeling in trout, and the experienced guides will make sure you're fishing all the right spots.

FALL: THREE DAYS IN GLACIER NATIONAL PARK

Day One : Fall is the perfect time to fish a quiet lake or a stream in the park. No license is required, the colors are epic, the fish are biting, and other anglers are few this time of year.

Stay at Cedar Creek Lodge in Columbia Falls or the historic Belton Chalet in West Glacier.

Please note: The Belton Chalet closes for the season mid-October.

Day Two : Drive up to the tiny, off-the-grid and off-the-beaten-path community of Polebridge and fill up on baked goods at the famous Polebridge Mercantile. Then, drive to Bowman lake (down a windy and narrow dirt road). Take a picnic lunch to enjoy at the lake, and, if you're up for some water play, bring your stand-up paddleboard or kayak.

Day Three : Take a scenic float trip down the gorgeous Flathead River or hike the Highline Trail. The Highline Trail begins at Logan Pass and offers spectacular scenery as it follows along the Continental Divide, aka the Garden Wall.

WINTER: ONE DAY IN GLACIER NATIONAL PARK

While July and August are the most popular times to visit Glacier National Park , the park is open—and lovely—year-round, and each season provides its own distinct experience within this part of the Crown of the Continent region. Plus, winter is one of the most peaceful times to visit the park. Our suggestion: Strap on a pair of snowshoes and head out along the east shore of Lake McDonald, or cross-country ski on the Going-to-the-Sun Road. For a complete map, visit . The trail system at Marias Pass is also a prime area for snowshoeing. Local outfitters, including Glacier Adventure Guides and Whitefish Outfitters and Tours, offer guided snowshoeing and cross-country excursions into the park.

If you go...

• Plan to pack a snack, water or lunch, as services are limited during the winter.
• Check weather and trail conditions before you go.
• Keep in mind that many of the park's roads are closed to vehicles during winter.
• When recreating in the backcountry, always check current snow and avalanche conditions.
• Skiing on frozen lakes is not recommended.
• Glacier Outdoor Center offers winter rentals on snowshoes, crampons, trekking poles, and ice axes, as well as one-bedroom cabins.

Many travelers to Montana wisely plan their trips to include both of our national parks: Glacier and Yellowstone. To help make the most of your time, we've put together several road-trip itineraries that offer authentic park-to-park experiences. For inspiration, visit Glaciers to Geysers .

WINTER: TWO DAYS IN GLACIER NATIONAL PARK

Day One: Downhill Ski at Whitefish Mountain Resort

Spend your first day hitting the slopes at Whitefish Mountain Resort . With 3,000 acres of terrain, 111 marked trails, four terrain parks and a skier/boardercross course, vast amounts of bowl and tree skiing and a 3.3-mile-long run (Hellfire), Whitefish Mountain Resort is an ideal mountain for skiers and boarders of all experience levels. Take a break for lunch and warm up at their mountaintop restaurant. Plus, you'll be able to see views of both the Flathead Valley and Glacier National Park.

Ever been night skiing? Ski under the lights at Whitefish Mountain Resort on chairs 2, 3 and 6, including the terrain parks.

Overnight options include Whitefish Mountain Resort, Hidden Moose Lodge , Garden Wall Inn and Pine Lodge , all in Whitefish.

• For ski-in access on Whitefish Mountain Resort, consider booking on-mountain lodging at Kandahar Lodge or Snow Bear Chalets .
• Take a few laps while the little ones are at the on-site Kids Center (for 6-months-old to 6-year-olds).
• Rub elbows with the locals by enjoying a cocktail at Spotted Bear Spirits in Whitefish.
• End your day with dinner downtown at Abruzzo Italian Kitchen.

Day Two: Nordic Ski With Glacier Nordic Center in Whitefish

At Glacier Nordic Center, enjoy 13 km of trails groomed daily for skate skiing and classic techniques. When the sun goes down, take advantage of 4 km of trails that are lit for night skiing 7 days a week. Trails meander over the Whitefish 36-hole golf course. Glacier Nordic Center also grooms trails at Whitefish Mountain Resort, where snowshoes and dogs are allowed on the trails.

• All equipment is available for rent in the center’s Nordic Shop.
• Lessons from professionally trained + licensed guides are available for all ages.

WINTER: THREE DAYS IN GLACIER NATIONAL PARK

Day One: Dog Sled With Base Camp Bigfork

Mush your own team of friendly and hardworking Inuit sled dogs with Base Camp Bigfork’s hands-on approach to this wildly fun adventure in the gorgeous northwest Montana landscape. After your sled trip, book a relaxing winter sauna session on-site at Base Camp Bigfork.

Overnight in the Base Camp Bigfork lodge.

Day Two: Snowshoe or Nordic Ski the Going-to-the-Sun Road

Make your way to the snow-covered Going-to-the-Sun Road. During the winter, most of the road is closed to vehicular travel as snowfall creates a sanctuary for cross-country skiing and snowshoeing. The road is plowed from the west entrance to Lake McDonald Lodge, and snow lovers can access the road just past the lodge.

Overnight in Columbia Falls at the North Forty Resort or Cedar Creek Lodge .

Day Three: Snowmobile Canyon Creek

For adrenaline-pumping fun, set out on a guided tour with Swan Mountain Outfitters for a guided two-hour, half-day, full-day or twilight snowmobile tour of the Canyon Creek trail system just north of Columbia Falls. Take in spectacular ridge views and play in deep powder bowls before summiting Whitefish Mountain Resort. See jaw-dropping views of the Canadian Rockies, Glacier National Park and the Flathead Valley.

Overnight at ROAM Beyond in Columbia Falls.

• Be sure to take time out for photos on your snowmobile. You'll see plenty of gorgeous views, and you may even see wildlife.
• Explore some of the small towns in the northern end of the Flathead Valley. Shop local artwork and jewelry in Bigfork's galleries and studios and stroll through locally owned boutiques on Central Avenue in Whitefish.
• I-90 Corridor
• Bitterroot Valley
• Blackfoot Corridor
• East Glacier Corridor
• Flathead Corridor
• Northwest Corridor
• Clark Fork Corridor
• Glacier National Park Surrounding Area
• Seeley Swan Corridor
• Columbia Falls
• East Glacier Park
• Hungry Horse
• Martin City
• Philipsburg
• Seeley Lake
• St. Ignatius
• Stevensville
• Thompson Falls
• Trout Creek
• West Glacier

From the blog

This spring, Western Montana’s Glacier Country is the perfect place for a fresh perspective and a breath of fresh air....

While we believe that every day is Earth Day around here, this special day is the time to show our...

Spring has sprung in the heart of Western Montana's Glacier Country, and the trails are calling us out for hiking...

Spring is in the air—the fresh mountain air—here in Western Montana’s Glacier Country. Each year spring is full of activities and...

• Maps & Resources
• Lewis & Clark
• Bed & Breakfasts
• Hotels & Motels
• Bars & Nightlife
• Coffee & Tea

EPIC 3-Day Glacier National Park Itinerary Perfect For First-timers

By: Author Kris

Posted on Last updated: April 6, 2023

Here is our 3-day Glacier National Park Itinerary. I hope you’re ready for some great outdoor time because this park has tons of impressive natural attractions.

Over the course of 3 amazing days, you will see some of the famous highlights of this park including the breathtaking Going-to-the-Sun road and the iconic Many Glacier hotel.

We provided time for some hiking so you can discover these beautiful landscapes in search of waterfalls and beautiful mountain lakes.

You may even see some wildlife, the park is home to bears, mountain goats, marmots, and more.

Read on and start dreaming about this epic outdoor adventure.

There is a really good chance that this post contains affiliate links. If you click one of them, we may receive a small commission (for which we are deeply grateful) at no extra cost to you.

Table of Contents

In a Hurry? This is What You Will See in Short

Day 1 : Today we explore the Lake McDonald Area. We take a boat trip across the lake, hike to nearby beautiful waterfalls, and drive all the way up to Logan Pass to enjoy the magical vistas of this mountain pass. You spend the night at West Glacier. Here we share a list of fun activities in West Glacier.

Day 2 : Pack your stuff as today we will shift bases as we drive all the way across the Going-to-the-Sun road. If you haven’t yet done so you can hike a short part of the Highline trail or go on a quest (again) for mountain goats and marmots. We also provide time for the beautiful region around sun point with its many photogenic waterfalls. You spend the night at Saint Mary, Babb, or Many Glacier.

Day 3 : There’s no better place to end our 3 days than at the Many Glacier area of the park. Surrounded by imposing mountains in all directions, you can enjoy the magnificent landscape here endlessly. Put on your hiking boots and head to Swiftcurrent Lake, a truly magical area in the park. Hike to Grinnel Lake or use the concessioner’s boat service for a family-friendly alternative. Lastly, before you head back home, make a stop at Apikuni Falls.

Best 3-Day Itinerary Glacier National Park

Here’s our 3-day Itinerary for Glacier National Park.

Be sure to bring your hiking shoes and your photo camera. After all, you’re in the mountains and I promise you will be taking loads of pictures.

We start our adventure in West Glacier.

Day 1 of Our Glacier Itinerary

Visiting the park between May 26 and September 10? Then you will need to make a reservation for the Going-to-the-Sun road. Read more about this below.

Lake McDonald

As soon as you enter the park you will see the pristine Lake McDonald lake.

This glacial lake is the largest in the park. Driving on the Going-to-the-Sun road, you’ll only get an occasional glimpse of the lake between the trees.

You can stop at the Lake McDonald Lodge, a historic Swiss-style chalet that was originally constructed in 1913. As you enjoy the view from behind the hotel, looking at the lake that is almost completely surrounded by mountains, you get the feeling that you might be standing in a fjord in Norway.

Be sure to also take a peek inside the hotel. The lobby is impressive with a large fireplace and a 3-floor atrium. It’s a nice play to stay but you will have to book your room as soon as reservations are opened, a year in advance.

There’re several options to see even more beautiful lake views.

The family-friendly option is a lake boat tour. The historic DeSmet vessel makes 5 tours a day and leaves from behind the hotel. This boat has been taking tourists across the lake since 1930.

Do you prefer to be a bit more active? Then you can also rent a canoe or kayak and explore the lake at your own pace.

The hike to Rocky Point is also recommended. Rocky point is located along the western shore of the lake and you will see many picture-postcard views, not only at the viewpoint but also on the way there and back.

McDonald Falls and the Sacred Dancing Cascade

Time to say goodbye to Lake McDonald and move on to McDonald Falls.

As their name suggests they’re not far. They are close to where the McDonald river flows into the lake.

You can park your car at the John’s Lake Loop trailhead or if it’s full at the next parking lot at the intersection. If that’s also complete you can continue until the Sacred Dancing Cascade parking.

If you haven’t already put them on, now is the time to put on your hiking boots.

We go for a short, family-friendly walk along the McDonald river.

Depending on how much energy you have, you can hike the John’s Lake Loop or just follow the trail along the river from McDonald Falls to the Sacred Dancing Cascade and back.

John’s Lake Loop is 2 miles, and the hike out and back along the river is 1.4 miles.

If you start from either the John’s Lake Loop trailhead or the parking at the intersection you start by walking across the bridge on N McDonald rd. Right after that bridge, you will see the trail that hugs the river on your right.

The first falls you see are the McDonald falls, as you continue following the trail you will eventually arrive at the Sacred Dancing Cascade.

The falls got their mystical name because they used to be a sacred place for the Kootenai Indians who held various ceremonies in this area.

You can’t blame them, this place really invites you to sit down and just enjoy the moment.

Find yourself a comfortable place on the rocks and take in the beauty of the region. If you brought a picnic this would be the ideal place.

At this point, you can decide to go back the same way, or if you want to hike the loop trail you cross the bridge and head up to the road where the trail continues across the road.

Trail of the Cedars

Now it is time to continue our way along the Going-to-the-sun road. Hop back in your car and drive about 3 miles further to the Trail Of the Cedars.

Where you thought you were in a Norwegian fjord this morning, you have now arrived in what seems like a real tropical rainforest.

The Trail of the Cedars is a super-easy loop of about a mile.

The path winds between the tall centuries-old cedars, some as high as 80 feet.

This is one of the few areas in the park that has remained fire free and where you can still find these giants. The ground is covered in moss and ferns and there are several informative signs about the vegetation that you find in the region.

Halfway through the trail, you get to Avalanche Creek. It’s worth making a small detour at this point. If you follow the trail to Avalanch Lake to the left it will take you to a beautiful narrow gorge and waterfall.

Depending on the time you can decide to continue all the way to Avalanche lake. Hiking the forested trail will add about 2 hours.

The lake is absolutely worth it but on the way to the lake, there are no views worth mentioning.

For our last stop of the day, we head to the Logan Pass Visitors center.

This visitor center marks the highest point of the Going-to-the-Sun road.

But let’s not forget the two other sights we pass on our way to this destination.

Things to see

First, there is “ The Loop “. A hairpin bend in the “Going-to-the-Sun” road with a small parking lot in the middle.

The parking lot is often full, but if you see a spot, it is worth stopping here so that you can take a moment to enjoy the view.

Weeping Wall

Next, you will pass the weeping wall. When we passed here at the end of September last year, only a small trickle of water flowed down the rock face. Seeing it like that you might wonder why people call it the weeping wall.

If you are here earlier in the season you will see something completely different. The meltwater then forms a real waterfall on the road and it is best to close your car windows if you do not want to get wet.

It is not possible to stop at the Weeping wall but just 200 meters further is a large parking lot from where you can take pictures.

Logan Pass Visitor Center

Another 3 miles and you’re at the Logan Pass Visitor Center. Here is a large parking lot for 200 cars, but it is still completely full at the busiest of the day. That’s why we planned our first visit late in the afternoon, from around 3 o’clock the first visitors start leaving again.

Mountain Goats are often seen at Logan Pass and this is one of the reasons that we already come here on day one.

Wildlife sightings are never guaranteed, but the more often you come, the more likely you are to see them.

You can see them both from the Highline trail and towards Hidden Lake.

On the Highline trail, they are often hiding high in the mountains while on the Hidden Lake trail they can be on the trail.

Especially early in the season when the fresh young blades of grass appear from under the snow.

Our preference, therefore, goes out to the hidden lake trail.

Mountain goats are often seen in the meadows at the start of the trail or the section that follows the overlook.

You don’t need to hike all the way to the lake but we advise you to hike another 10 minutes past the overlook.

Now it’s time to wrap up day 1 so you can get some rest for another well-filled day tomorrow.

How to get there

Driving yourself vs using the park shuttles.

We’re huge fans of the park’s shuttle system.

The park does get congested and by using the bus you can save yourself a lot of parking stress.

We’ve designed this first day so that you should be able to do it with both your own car as well as the shuttle.

Things to keep in mind if you’re driving yourself

You need a reservation to drive on the Going-to-the-sun road! More about this later.

Parking at Avalanche Creek and Logan Pass can be a problem.

If you don’t find parking at Avalanche Creek on your way to Logan Pass you can stop there on the way back. The parking at Logan Pass tends to fill up during the day but if you arrive in the late afternoon you should be good.

If there’s a sign that says that a parking lot is complete but there’s no ranger to stop you from entering it doesn’t hurt to go and see if it’s really complete. Rangers put up these signs and they then remain there even though many people have already left.

Things to keep in mind when using the shuttle

The shuttle leaves from the Apgar Visitor Center. The bus that you board at the visitor center takes you to Avalanche Creek where you need to transfer into a smaller shuttle that continues to Logan Pass.

The first bus runs every 30 minutes, the second every 15 minutes. In the peak season, there may be queues for the shuttles so you see 1 or 2 buses pass you by before you can get a seat.

Day 2 in Glacier

Enjoy a hearty breakfast this morning so that you are ready for some of Glacier’s best walks. There’s a saying, “The early bird catches the worm”.

In Glacier one says “The early visitor catches the parking space”.

We recommend that you don’t wait too long and that you make your way directly to Logan Pass without any stops. It’s recommended to arrive no later than 8:30 am.

Once there, there are 2 hikes you absolutely must do.

The Hidden Lake Overlook

The one to start with, if you haven’t already done it yesterday, is the hike to the Hidden Lake Overlook .

It offers you the chance to see the mountain goats up close and the view of the hidden lake is not to be missed.

Remember to continue hiking for about 10 minutes past the overlook, mountain goats are often enjoying the juicy grass that grows in that area.

The HIghline Trail

Next on the agenda is the Highline trail. The start of the trail is on the opposite side of the road.

Experienced hikers can hike all the way to “The Loop” where they can take a shuttle back to Logan Pass.

This trail is close to 12 miles so if you hike the full trail it won’t leave much time for other things.

That’s why we recommend only hiking the first part of the trail.

That part is really spectacular with impressive views of the valley and the Going-to-the-Sun road below. It’s certainly not recommended for those with a fear of heights.

You can decide how far you go. We hiked the first 3.7 miles until we arrived at a point where you could see into the other valley.

It’s a nice walk with lots of scenic views and we also saw marmots along the way.

But it’s probably better not to go that far so you still have time and energy for your next hikes. The first few 1000 feet already provide you with beautiful views.

The Visitor Center

Lastly, before we leave Logan Pass, don’t forget to take a peek inside the visitor center.

Inside and around the visitor center are various exhibits about the local vegetation and the animals that call this place home.

The extreme weather conditions at this altitude require special abilities.

It’s fun to read how the animals and plants have adapted themselves to survive in this area.

From Logan Pass we continue our way along the Going-to-the-Sun road toward Saint Mary.

Lunch Creek Waterfall

The first highlight we pass, almost right after we have left the Logan Pass car park, is the Lunch Creek waterfall .

Lunch Creek is the first river you cross and you can see the waterfall directly from the road. There’s a pullout right before and right after you cross the creek.

Jackson Glacier Overlook

You will also pass the Jackson Glacier overlook .

Jackson Glacier is the 7th largest Glacier in the park and unfortunately, like all glaciers, it’s shrinking every year.

Today it can still be seen from the road.

There’s usually ample parking so pull over, grab your binoculars, and enjoy this view.

Our next stop is for St. Mary Falls , Baring Falls , and Virginia Falls . This is a very scenic and very popular area of the park.

St Mary Falls, Baring Falls, and Virginia Falls

Most of this area of the park was burned in 2015.

You walk between the remains of the burned trees, stumps that protrude from the ground like blackened torches, and all the new life that has arisen in between.

Thanks to the young low vegetation you can enjoy beautiful views in all directions.

On one side is Saint Mary Lake and the imposing background is formed by Dusty Star Mountain, Little Chief Mountain, and several others.

You first pass Baring Falls, then Saint Mary Falls, then 2 unnamed falls, to finally get to the highlight of them all, the Virginia waterfall.

All of them are worth seeing, even the unnamed falls, still Virginia falls are the icing on the cake.

These falls are 50 feet high and can be seen from up close, so close that you feel the spray on your face.

Keep your eyes peeled for Grizzlies as you head out of the park toward St. Mary. There are 300 grizzly bears in the park and they’re known to hang out around the Rising Sun area and the 2 dog flats.

This marks the end of your second amazing day in Glacier.

Where to Park

St. Mary Falls and Baring Falls both have small car parks, if you’re lucky you can park there.

St. Mary Falls

If you found a parking spot at St. Mary Falls you can choose whether to go to Virginia Falls first and do Baring Falls at the end or vice versa.

If you decide to stop at Baring Falls, you can even take the shuttle back to Saint Mary Falls.

If there’s no space you will need to continue a little further to Sun point.

If you need to park at Sun Point it will add some mileage to your trail but not too much, all these spots are relatively close to each other.

Note that if you parked at Baring Falls or Sun Point you start walking in a westerly direction, keeping the lake on your left.

Don’t worry if this sounds a little complicated, the trail map you’re given on arrival at the park will clear things up and the trails are very well signposted.

Day 3 in Glacier

Visiting the park between July 1 and September 10? Then you will need to make a reservation for the Many Glacier area. Read more about this below.

If you were foresighted and could book a room in the Many Glacier Hotel or the Swiftcurrent Motor Inn, you will have impeccable views from the moment you get out of bed.

But as you can read below, staying in St. Mary also has its advantages.

Beaver Pond (When Staying in St. Mary)

If you are staying in St. Mary, get up a little earlier this morning so you have time for a short walk before continuing to Many Glacier.

The Beaver Pond Loop is a less-traveled trail close to St. Mary.

It starts at the Historic Ranger station and loops around a small pond which is an excellent feeding ground for moose.

They often come to feed on the aquatic plants in the morning, it’s an important source of mineral sodium.

The beaver pond is 1.5 miles from the Ranger Station. Follow the left path, which will take you the fastest to the lake.

Swiftcurrent Lake to Grinnell Lake

Good news if you’re staying at the Many Glacier Hotel.

This is where all the action will be today.

This iconic hotel is an excellent place to stay. It will take you back to yesteryear’s charms, a time when tourism in this area was just starting.

The hotel is still exactly as it was back then so you’re effectively stepping a little back in time when you cross the threshold of this hotel. And you really can’t imagine a more beautiful location for such a landmark.

You will be presented with many beautiful views of this hotel today.

The hotel has a large parking lot, so whether you’re staying at the hotel or not, you will often find a place to park your car.

Grinnel Lake

Today we will be going to Grinnell Lake, by many seen as one of the most beautiful lakes of the park.

On sunny days it has a stunning turquoise appearance thanks to the silt that is coming down from the Glacier.

The picture is completed by the imposing mountains surrounding the lake and Grinnell Falls.

High in the mountains, you can see a spur of the Grinnell Glacier.

In addition to this marvelous lake, you can also admire the Hidden Falls.

You will see a short spur trail leading to this falls right before you arrive at Grinnell Lake.

Which Hikes Can You Do

When you walk you have several options, you can adjust the length of the walk to your fitness level or time frame.

Eastern Shore

The shortest option is to stick to the eastern shore of both Swiftcurrent Lake and Josephine Lake and come back the same way.

Western Shore

For more scenic views on both lakes and the Many Glacier hotel, you could come back along the western shore of Lake Josephine.

We would say that this path is nicer than the one on the other side. This adds 0.7 miles to the trail.

Southwestern Tip of Swiftcurrent Lake

From the southwestern tip of Swiftcurrent Lake you have fantastic vistas of the lake with the hotel in the backdrop.

At this point, you can go right and cross between the two lakes. This will take you back to the previous trail.

Walk Around Swiftcurrent Lake

You can also continue straight and walk completely around Swiftcurrent Lake.

Following this path, you will get to the Grinnell Glacier trailhead parking where you will see another path that runs parallel with Many Glacier Rd towards the hotel.

Take a windbreaker if you plan on spending a little more time at Grinnell Lake. It is an excellent place for a picnic but it can be a little windy.

There really are no words to say how amazing this trail is, we met loyal visitors to the park that hike this trail each time they’re here.

Where to Start the Hike

Depending on your hiking appetite, or the energy left in those legs after all that walking yesterday, you can start your hike at the hotel or use the shuttle boats to cross Swiftcurrent Lake and Lake Josephine.

The boats shorten the hike to 2.8 miles (out and back) effectively making this one of the best family-friendly hikes you can do in the park.

Apikuni Falls

Apikuni Falls is our last stop before it’s time to say goodbye to Glacier National Park.

This is a high two-tiered waterfall that comes down in a gorge between Altyn Peak and Apikuni Mountain.

The hike to the falls is short but strenuous.

The trail starts flat after which there is a steep part. That section has several spur trails that you can use to catch your breath.

Take your binoculars and scan the opposite mountain for mountain goats. We spotted several while we were there.

The trail leads to the base of the second smaller waterfall.

You have to go past the viewing platform and scramble a little bit higher for a good view of the highest waterfall.

This brings our itinerary to an end. Let’s continue with some general park tips.

Glacier Park Tips

Read our Glacier Park Tips for a stress-free trip to the park.

When To Go to Glacier National Park

Even though Glacier National Park is open year-round, the Going-to-the-Sun road is only accessible from late June to the second or third week of October.

This is the absolute highlight of the park and most visitors plan their visit during this period.

If you go to the park outside this period you will encounter far fewer crowds but you will need to be self-sufficient.

Most restaurants and hotels are only open during the peak summer season.

As this itinerary involves driving across the Going-to-the-Sun road it needs to be done during July, August, or September.

You can check the park’s official website to read about the road’s conditions.

How to Get to Glacier

Did you know that Glacier National Park has its own international airport? Nicknamed the Gateway to the Rocky Mountains, Glacier International Airport is located in Kalispell.

It is serviced by all major US airlines and offers direct connections to all corners of the United States.

The closest airport in Canada is Calgary. It’s a 4-hour drive from Calgary to Glacier National Park.

Cars can be rented at both airports.

Check prices or car rentals:

Glacier Airport

Calgary Airport

The park is not close to any interstate highways. If you drive to the park you will probably use either highway 2 or highway 89 for the last few kilometers.

We recommend using your GPS and entering your hotel or Airbnb as the address. Some of the accommodations are still several kilometers outside the park.

Haven’t yet booked your accommodation?  Let us give you some advice on the best places to stay near Glacier National Park.

How to Get Around Glacier

Good, you made it to Glacier! You may have heard about how busy the park becomes in summer with traffic jams and parking stress as a result.

We can confirm that these stories are not exaggerated. Even in late September it was still extremely busy.

Nothing is as unpleasant as having a nice trip to nature in mind but having to worry about parking all the time.

So, be prepared, with a little planning, you can make your trip more enjoyable.

It is absolutely still possible to visit Glacier National Park by car.

We have created this itinerary with that in mind. Just know that driving yourself does not only have advantages, there are also some disadvantages.

Mostly so involving the Going-to-the-Sun road. Being a mountain pass means the road is narrow with only limited parking areas. It’s not always possible to make a U-turn, it can be tricky to find a parking spot and due to the constant flow of traffic, you can’t just stop in the middle of the road.

However, you can plan for that. As long as you try to arrive early or late at hotspots you should be fine. We also took this into account when planning this route.

In 2021 Glacier National Park has implemented a reservation system to limit the number of cars in the park. The reservation system has been expanded in 2022 and will again be expanded in 2023. As of 2023, you will need a reservation for almost the entire park. Don’t forget to make this reservation or it could ruin your plans!

Read more about this reservation system.

We’re big fans of the shuttle system. We don’t recommend it for this itinerary because if you have just 3 days you want to fill these to the brim.

The park’s shuttle is great, but it does involve transfers and wait times, time you’d rather spend exploring the park’s attractions than waiting at bus stops.

The buses are small, they have to be able to navigate the narrow road, and are sometimes already full when they arrive at your stop.

If you use the shuttles, you should keep in mind that you may have to let 1 or 2 buses pass before you can hop onboard.

Don’t get us wrong, except for these inconveniences the shuttle system is excellent.

Depending on where you are there are shuttles every 15 to every 30 minutes which is pretty impressive knowing that the use of these shuttles is completely free.

There are stops at all major sights. This makes them a really good option to discover the park in a calm and stress-free way.

Another advantage of the system is that you can exit the shuttle at one stop and board it again at another. Particularly welcome for some of those one-way trails, think of the Highline trail as one example.

The full details of the shuttle system can be found here .

Organized Tours

Organized tours are a third option to explore the park.

Red Bus Tours is one of the most well-known tour companies. You can’t miss their iconic red buses. They have a number of different tours varying from 3 to 8 hours. You can choose from a number of pick-up locations.

Glacier Sun Tours celebrated its 30th anniversary in 2022. Ed has been offering tours since 1992 and he is also a member of the Blackfeet Country Chamber of Commerce. When you join one of his half-day or full-day tours you will not only learn a lot about Glacier but also about the Blackfeet, the original inhabitants of this region.

Where to Stay in Glacier

Hotels in glacier.

There aren’t that many hotels in Glacier and they tend to be sold out the day that reservations are opened.

If you want to stay in the iconic Many Glacier Hotel or the Lake McDonald Lodge you better mark your agenda.

Reservations are taken 13 months in advance, to be precise, starting on the first day of a month the reservations for that entire month next year are accepted.

eg. Starting September 1st 2022, reservations can be made for the period September 1-30 2023.

When making a reservation you have to pre-pay the first day. You will receive a full refund of this deposit if you cancel at least 3 days in advance.

Many visitors who don’t know their exact travel dates one year in advance are known to create several reservations. If you don’t see availability the first time you check it doesn’t hurt to recheck closer to your actual travel date, a lot of those duplicate bookings will be canceled. Unfortunately, these vacant rooms are also quickly taken back by other travelers who are also lurking.

Campgrounds

There are several campgrounds in the various areas of the park. Some can be reserved others are on a first-come-first-serve basis. Reservations typically open 6 months in advance.

Reservations are highly recommended as it is just a minority of the sites that is available first-come-first-serve.

Click here for an overview of the campsites including the amenities and the full details about the reservations .

Staying Outside the Park

Couldn’t score a hotel room in the park? Not to worry, there’re plenty of accommodation options near the park.

West Glacier

West Glacier is the most popular entrance to the park and this area is also where you will find most hotels.

There are several quaint hotels in West Glacier itself and if you continue a little further to the more developed cities of Kalispell and Whitefish you will find brands of all the household names including Hilton, Marriott, and IHG.

St. Mary is situated at the opposite end of the Going-to-the-Sun road.

It is an artificial town that revives when the park is open but is completely dead outside of that period.

Towards the end of the season, many businesses start to close again, regardless of whether the Going-to-theSun road is still open or not.

When we were here on September 15, only 1 restaurant was still open and we had pizza every day.

East Glacier

East Glacier is a slightly more developed village with a number of accommodation options.

It is located near the Two Medicine entrance, about an hour’s drive from the St. Mary entrance and the Going-to-the-Sun road.

You can also find a few hotels in Babb , the closest settlement to the Many Glacier entrance.

Here is an overview of more vacation rentals in Glacier National Park.

How Many Days do You Need in Glacier?

While 3 days in Glacier National Park is enough to see the highlights we recommend staying a little longer if you can.

3 days is enough if you don’t plan to hike, but there are several beautiful places in the park that you can only hike to and 3 or even 5 days won’t allow you to discover them all.

With 5 days you can discover all the regions of the park and you have time for several of the shorter walks.

With 7 days you can also hike some of the day trips while you’re visiting the park.

Glacier Reservation System

Unfortunately, Glacier fell victim to its success.

Because the Going-to-the-Sun road is only open for a few months every year, everyone visits the park during this short period.

The park is not equipped for this huge influx of visitors and traffic jams and parking problems are the result.

This reservation system was implemented in order to reduce the congestion at the various park sites.

It comes with some extra administration, but in return, you can expect a better, less crowded experience at the park.

The reservations were first implemented in 2021 for the Going-to-the-Sun road. Starting in 2023 almost the entire park will require a reservation.

Here’s everything you need to know.

What Areas of the Park Require Reservations?

Starting 2023 reservations are required for

• Going-to-the-Sun Road . Checkpoints are at West-Entrance and Camas Entrance. At these two entrances, reservations are required from May 26th. Coming from St. Mary the checkpoint is at Rising Sun, reservations are required from July 1st.
• Two Medicine , starting July 1st
• Many Glacier , starting July 1st
• North Fork , starting May 26th

Reservations are required until September 10.

Each Area of the Park Requires a Different Reservation

The 4 areas mentioned above each require a separate reservation.

You will have to plan your visit carefully and identify in advance which region you wish to visit on which day.

A reservation for the Going-to-the-Sun road is valid for 3 consecutive days. All other reservations grant you access for one day.

When are Reservations Open?

Reservations can be made approx. 120 days in advance. Not all tickets are released at this time. A number is only released 24 hours in advance.

If you couldn’t make a reservation in advance you can try again the day before.

Going-to-the-Sun-Road

Regarding the Going-to-the-Sun Road.

If you don’t see any available slots for your specific day you can also check a day earlier.

The reservations are valid for 3 days and you don’t need to enter the park on your first day.

If you will only be driving on the road for 1 day you can therefore also make a reservation for 1 or 2 days earlier.

How Much Does a Ticket Cost?

A ticket is free but there is a reservation fee of 2$.

The reservation does not replace a park pass.

What if I Don’t Have a Reservation

Don’t worry, you don’t have to cancel your travel plans if you didn’t manage to make a reservation. There are a few ways you can still visit the park.

• Use the shuttle service to visit the Going-to-the-Sun road. The Shuttle is an excellent alternative, the buses run every 15 to 13 minutes and they stop at all major sights. Best of all, this is completely free! The shuttle stop at St. Mary can be reached by car if you don’t have a reservation. If you want to drive to the shuttle stop at the West Entrance (Apgar Visitor Center) you will need a reservation. The Apgar Visitor Center is 2 miles from West Glacier Village so it’s possible to hike or bike to the center.
• Book an organized tour . With proof of an organized tour, you are allowed inside the park. The tour must leave from the respective area. This can be tours offered by Red Bus Tours, Sun Tours, or boat cruises on one of the lakes. If you have a half-day tour you can also spend the rest of the day in the park.
• Book accommodation inside the park . A reservation for any of the campgrounds or hotels in that area of the park will serve as a reservation for that day.
• Enter the park before 6 am or after 3 pm . Reservations are only required between these two hours. You can enter before 6 am and stay inside the park the whole day.

What to Do With Your Reservation?

Print your reservation or make a screenshot of it that you store on your phone.

Cell phone reception can be spotty in and around Glacier National Park.

Don’t rely on accessing the reservation online at the moment that you arrive at the checkpoint.

If you still have questions after reading this information, check out our detailed guide on the Glacier National Park reservation system.

Entrance Fees and Passes

Travelers require a park pass to visit the park.

The most common option is a $35 car park pass. This pass is valid for 7 days for everyone in the vehicle.

If you plan on returning in the same year you can buy an annual pass for $70.

If you’re doing a road trip and will visit multiple national parks you can buy the America the Beautifull Pass. It costs $80, is valid for a full year, and is accepted in all national parks.

What to Pack for Glacier

With the right attire, your visit to Glacier will be even more enjoyable. Here’s what you absolutely mustn’t forget.

This list is made up for a summer visit.

• Hiking shoes or boots
• Trekking Poles
• Rain Jacket / Windbreaker
• Water Bottle
• Photo Camera

Bear Spray is also recommended when hiking some of the trails. You don’t need to bring this yourself, you can also buy or rent it at the park.

It’s hard to summarize the beauty of Glacier National Park in one article.

But the visitor numbers don’t lie. Glacier is annually in the top 10 of the most visited parks. And even if you don’t hike, Glacier offers plenty of other fun activities.

Do you also want to visit the park? Then you can use this itinerary to visit some of the most idyllic spots in the park in 3 days.

Be sure to let us know how your visit was.

See the web story that accompanies this post.

An Amazingly Fun 3-Day Glacier National Park Itinerary

W ith a northern Montana location on the US border with Canada, Glacier National Park offers a short summer season to explore. You’ll need a good Glacier National Park itinerary if you hope to see the best of this iconic spot.

With more than one million acres, an itinerary is a must, especially for travelers with limited time. From hiking to boat cruises to wildflowers, here are the best things to do in Glacier in a well-structured 3-day National Park Itinerary.

Best Time to Visit Glacier National Park

Since it is located in Northern Montana and its main features are glaciers and the Rocky Mountains, the summer months are the best, and easiest, time to visit.

One of the most beautiful drives anywhere, the Going-to-the-Sun Road, opens for the season in late June or early July and closes in early fall. The summer also is the time to see the park’s wildflowers, waterfalls and animals. The campgrounds and the lodges are all open too.

For fall color trips, the autumn comes early and doesn’t stay around long. Trees begin to change colors in mid-September and the leaves last until mid-October. The lodges close for the season beginning in September, though lodging is available outside of the park.

In the spring, expect to see snow in most areas. Visitors to Glacier in the fall have to pick one side or the other; the Going-to-the-Sun Road is closed from mid-October until late June.

Hardy outdoor enthusiasts visit in the winter for snowshoeing and other cold-weather pursuits. Primitive camping is available at Apgar and St Mary.

3 Day Glacier National Park Itinerary

Start your 3-day Glacier National Park Itinerary at one of the main entrances to the park. It doesn’t really matter which direction you travel, although reservations can be easier to secure on the east side of the park.

SheBuysTravel Tip: Reservations for lodging and camping are essential if you want to stay in or near the park. Additionally, if you drive into the park, a vehicle reservation is required in addition to the 7-day entrance fee.

Day 1—West Glacier: Apgar and Lake McDonald

For visitors entering from Kalispell, Columbia Falls or Whitefish, Montana, the West Entrance offers something for most from hiking trails to boat tours to the historic Lake McDonald Lodge.

Apgar Visitor Center

I always recommend stopping at the visitor centers in a national park since each offers different exhibits. A visitor center usually features the nicest, most equipped restrooms (think flushing) with water fountains and hydration stations.

Located 2 miles east of the West Glacier Entrance, the Apgar Visitor Center is housed in a 1929 log cabin. Inside, rangers offer tips and maps along with the National Park Service Junior Ranger booklet for kids. This is also the spot where the Ranger-led programs meet.

Another reason to stop at the Apgar Visitor Center: It’s one of the main stops for the Glacier National Park West Side shuttle. The shuttle runs during the summer and travels the Going-to-the-Sun Road to Logan Pass. Taking the shuttle means letting someone else drive so you can spend the entire ride looking out the windows at the stunning landscapes.

Apgar also has one of the largest parking lots in Glacier.

The Apgar Visitors Center is open daily from mid-May to mid-September and weekends only in the spring from mid-April to mid-May and in the fall from mid-September until mid-October.

Top Activities Near the West Entrance

For the best experience, choose a couple of activities to explore the west side of the park, such as a morning hike followed by an afternoon boat cruise on Lake McDonald.

Lake McDonald Valley

Carved by glaciers, Lake McDonald is 10 miles long (16 km) and 500 feet deep (152 m) and is the largest lake in the park.

Located near the Apgar Visitor Center, it’s a hub of activity in the summer in the western part of Glacier National Park. It is also the location of the Lake McDonald Lodge.

Lake McDonald Lodge

As a classic Swiss chalet along the shore of Lake McDonald, the Lake McDonald Lodge was built in 1913 and is a popular place to visit. The three-story lodge building features historic furnishings and log-style design elements, a hallmark of historic National Park Service lodges.

Visitors can walk through and there are even places to eat (or grab a coffee, cocktail or quick snack) inside the lodge. Outside, snap one of the rocking chairs on the patio with rocking chairs overlooking the lake for a quick break.

Best Hiking in the Area

With more than 700 miles of hiking trails in Glacier National Park, including 110 miles of the Continental Divide National Scenic Trail, there is a trail for most hikers. Additionally, the Pacific Northwest National Scenic Trail traverses Glacier National Park for 52 miles.

• Trail of the Cedars —0.7-mile accessible trail
• Apgar Bike Path —1.5 miles and level
• Fish Creek to Apgar Trail —2.9 miles and gains 25 feet.
• Lake MacDonald West Shore Trail —6.3 miles and mostly level
• Avalanche Lake —2.3 miles one way and gains 500 feet

Guided day hikes along with multi-day hikes are available from authorized NPS concessionaires at several locations in the park. Check the schedule here. And check our list of what to pack for a day hike.

How to See the Best of Glacier

Boating in glacier.

Guided boat tours in Glacier National Park are a popular activity during the summer months. Lake McDonald offers a boat cruise several times a day. Visitors will also find cruises at Many Glacier and Swift Current lakes on the east side along with Two Medicine in the southeast portion of the park.

Advance reservations and tickets are required. Kayaks are available for rent as well.

Rafting is another top activity around Glacier National Park. Authorized concessionaires operate guided rafting tours of the Flathead River near West Glacier.

Red Bus Tours

One of the iconic symbols of Glacier National Park is the Red Jammer, the restored White Motor Company touring buses from the 1930s. The Ford Motor Company rebuilt the buses putting them on a modern van chassis and converting each to use propane.

Glacier National Park offers a fleet of 33 red buses. Each bus offers a roll-top viewing roof and seats 16 passengers, with four on each row of bench seats. For west-side tours, the buses depart from Apgar Visitor Center, Village Inn at Apgar and Lake McDonald Lodge along with locations outside Glacier National Park.

Reservations are required for this highly-recommended activity. Tours range from 4 to 8 hours and are round-trip tours.

Horseback Riding in Glacier National Park

For another way to see the park known as the Crown of the Continent, visitors can take a horseback ride in Glacier National Park from Lake McDonald and Apgar. Rides range from one hour to all-day horseback rides to Sperry Chalet. Reservations are a must and weight and age restrictions apply.

Read More: Why Belton Chalet is a Great Place to Stay in Glacier National Park

Where to Eat on the West side

Jammer Joe’s Grill & Pizzeria serves a lunch buffet, soups, salads, sandwiches and create-your-own pizza. Open daily from 11 a.m. to 9 p.m. during the season.

Lucke’s Lounge offers a bar menu with burgers, sandwiches, salads and appetizers. Find a full bar along with regional wines and microbrews. Open daily from 11 a.m. to 10 p.m. during the season.

Russell’s Fireside Dining Room serves a breakfast buffet along with continental options. Find a lunch and dinner menu infused with local flavors, like elk burgers. Open daily from 6:30 a.m. to 9:30 p.m. with hours for breakfast, lunch and dinner during the season.

Apgar Village

Since 1946, Eddie’s Cafe and Mercantile has offered Glacier classics breakfast, lunch and dinner along with its iconic must-try Huckleberry ice cream. Open daily from 8 a.m. to 8 p.m. during the season.

Picnicking on the West Side

Developed picnic areas with tables are located at Apgar Village, Avalanche Creek, Sprague Creek and Fish Creek. Buy supplies at the general stores located at Apgar’s Eddie’s Mercantile and Lake McDonald’s Lodge camp store.

Where to Stay and Camp near the West Entranc e

Apgar village lodge and cabins.

Just inside the West Entrance of Glacier National Park, Apgar Village offers motel rooms and equipped cabins for budget travelers. Each cabin is unique and some offer equipped kitchens with refrigerators, ranges and coffee makers. Motel rooms feature one or two queen beds.

Open seasonal from mid-May until early October. Reservations required.

Village Inn Motel

Located a few miles inside of the west entrance in the Apgar Village, the Village Inn Motel was built in 1956 and renovated in 2015. Find units equipped with basic kitchens as well as family units that accommodate five or six people.

Open seasonal from mid-May until late September. Reservations required.

A classic Swiss chalet along the shore of Lake McDonald, it was built in 1913 and features a three-story lodge building with lodge rooms. The interiors feature historic furnishings and log-style design elements.

Lake McDonald Lodge features cabins along with some suites in Cobb House, a separate building.

Open seasonal from early May until late September. Reservations required.

Motel Lake McDonald

Located 10 miles inside Glacier’s west entrance, Motel Lake MacDonald is along the shores of the largest lake in Glacier. It offers basic motel rooms with one or two double beds with private bathrooms.

Open seasonal from early June until mid-September. Reservations required.

Camping on the West Side of Glacier

• Apgar Campground
• Fish Creek Campground
• Avalanche Campground
• Sprague Creek Campground

Day 2—Going-to-the-Sun Road

After exploring the western portion of Glacier, spend a full day driving across the park across Logan Pass to St. Mary. Then spend the night on the east side of the park.

Going-to-the-Sun Road

One of the top things to do in Glacier NP is traversing the Going-to-the-Sun Road Scenic Drive. The scenic byway travels 50 miles (80 km) from the west entrance close to the Apgar area across Glacier National Park to the St Mary entrance on the east side of the park.

Completed in 1932, this scenic drive provided better access into the wilderness that had previously been limited to the edges of the park. Many of the top features in Glacier National Park are along the Going-to-the-Sun road.

Top Sites Along Going to the Sun Road

Visitors will pass the Weeping Wall, a rock face with melting snow run-off glistening in the sun. The Garden Wall area is also visible, a rock face with plants clinging to its sides.

As the highest point along the Going-to-Sun Road at 6,646 feet (2,025 m), it is a popular area. Surrounded by peaks, visitors can see Reynolds Mountain and Clements Mountain. This area offers hiking trails along with a seasonal visitor center.

Logan Pass Visitor Center

This is your destination for restrooms, a water fountain and bottle fillers. It offers a bookstore along with an interpretive area. Ranger-led activities meet at the Logan Pass Visitor Center.

Visitors will find the trail to the Hidden Lake Overlook, the opportunity to see mountain goats (a symbol of Glacier National Park) along with summertime wildflowers.

Open daily when the road clears in the summer until the end of September. Hours are 9 a.m. to 5 p.m. It is also the home of the popular Logan Pass Star Parties.

SheBuysTravel Tip:  The Logan Pass parking lot fills up quickly and stays filled during the day. Arrive early if you want a spot!

Hiking at Logan Pass

Hikers will be surrounded by wildflowers on the hike to the Hidden Lake Overlook. Mountain goats are also known to be found in this area of the park.

• Hidden Lake Overlook —A one-way 1.4-mile hike with a 460-foot elevation gain.
• Hidden Lake Nature Trail —A 2.6-mile hike, one-way with a 460-foot elevation gain, followed by a 780-foot drop to the lake.
• Highline Trail —A 7.2-mile hike with a 624-foot elevation gain and a 253-foot loss.

Glacier Viewing

Most visitors want to see a glacier on their visit. The Jackson Glacier is visible from the Going-to-the-Sun overlook, 5 miles east of Logan Pass. Other glaciers are visible on the east side of the park.

Ironically, Glacier National Park is not the best place to see glaciers in the US. If that’s your goal, opt instead for an Alaskan cruise that includes a visit to a tidewater glacier. In the lower 48 U.S. states, Washington’s North Cascades National Park offers more glaciers than Glacier National Park. Even nearby Grand Teton National Park offers glaciers.

SheBuysTravel Tip:  Pack a pair of binoculars for the best glacier viewing without a hike.

After Logan Pass, the road heads back down to the east side of the park. This area is anchored by St. Mary Lake and the Rising Sun area.

Rising Sun is “where the mountains met the prairies” and offers a good place for a hot meal along with lodging. It also offers some signature hikes and waterfall viewing.

Hiking Trails near St. Mary Lake

• St. Mary Falls —A 0.8-mile hike (one-way) with a 260-foot elevation loss.
• Sun Point Nature Trail —A 0.8-mile hike (one-way) with a 250-foot elevation loss.
• Virginia Falls —A 1.6-mile hike (one-way) with a 260-foot elevation loss followed by a 285-foot gain.

St. Mary Visitor Center

Located near the St. Mary’s east entrance, the St. Mary Visitor Center features interpretive information on the American Indian Nations along with a park film. It is open daily from late May to early October

Where to Eat and Sleep in East Glacier

Due to the amount of time to travel the Going-to-the-Sun Road, it is easier to stay on the east side of the park for the night rather than traveling back to the Apgar area.

Since there are few food options in the Logan Pass area, be prepared to picnic for lunch. Picnic tables are available at Avalanche Creek, Rising Sun and the Sun Point Nature Trail.

For a hot meal, Rising Sun Motor Inn & Cabins offers the  Two Dog Flats Grill with American favorites like build-your-own burgers, soups, sandwiches and salads. Open daily at 4 p.m. for dinner during the season.

Rising Sun Motor Inn

Built in 1940 and renovated in 2015, the Rising Sun Motor Inn is West of the St. Mary Visitor Center. It offers 72 motor lodge rooms along with cabins. Guests will find a restaurant and a general store in the complex.

Open seasonally from mid-June to mid-September. Reservations required.

Camping near St. Mary

• St. Mary Campground
• Rising Sun Campground

Details for the Going-to-the-Sun Corridor Vehicle Permit

Driving the entire length of Going-to-the-Sun Road takes at least 2 hours without stopping, usually more due to summer construction delays and traffic along the way.

To enter Glacier National Park from the West Side, a 3-day vehicle permit is required. This permit is in addition to the park’s 7-day entrance fee. It must be secured in advance via Recreation.gov and costs $2 per permit.

For visitors with reservations inside the park, like lodging, camping and concessionaire-led tours , a permit is not required. For campers with a first-come, first-serve campsite, a permit can be obtained after registering.

Permits are required from 6 a.m. to 3 p.m. during the busy summer season. For the west side of the park, permits will be required from May 26, 2023, until September 10, 2023. To enter the east side of the park, permits are required from St. Mary at Rising Sun checkpoint July 1, 2023 to September 10, 2023.

Additionally, the North Fork entrance requires a one-day vehicle permit from May 26, 2023, until September 10, 2023, to enter from 6 a.m. to 3 p.m.

Two Medicine and Many Glacier entrances all require one-day vehicle passes as well from July 1 to September 10, 2023, to enter from 6 a.m. to 3 p.m. Note: It is a different one-day vehicle pass for each entrance.

SheBuysTravel Tip: The cell coverage in Glacier National Park is non-existent, so make your online reservations before entering the park. Glacier National Park is not a destination that you can see without advance reservations during the summer.

Glacier’s Free Shuttle Bus

For travelers who didn’t get the required vehicle pass (or don’t want to drive over a mountain pass), there is a free shuttle between the Apgar Visitor Center and the St Mary Visitor Center. It runs daily from 7 a.m. to 7 p.m. from the west side of the park. From the east side of the park, it runs from 8 a.m. to 7 p.m. Shuttles depart every 15 to 30 minutes, depending on the stop. It is a first-come, first-served service and reservations aren’t accepted.

Since the route has some vehicle restrictions, transfers are required to travel to Logan Pass. Passengers will disembark from the NPS bus and travel to Logan Pass in a smaller Sprinter van.

The NPS advises shuttle riders to know the latest shuttle departures times of the day, especially when crossing the entire park.

Day 3—Many Glacier Area

For your third day in Glacier National Park, I recommend the Many Glacier park entrance. It will require its own 1-day vehicle permit if you plan to day trip. Visitors with lodging or camping reservations don’t need a vehicle permit.

Many Glacier Valley

Located through a separate entrance on the eastern side of the park, this is a quieter corner of Glacier National Park with many of the same activities found at McDonald Lake and St. Mary.

This area is anchored by the historic Many Glacier Hotel along with Swiftcurrent Motor Inn . It is also the location for several popular hiking including Grinnell Lake and Grinnell Glacier.

Many Glacier Hiking Trails

Grinnell Glacier and Swiftcurrent Pass are the main trailheads.

• Swiftcurrent Nature Trail —A 2.5-mile loop around Swiftcurrent Lake and partially accessible
• Bedrock Falls —A 1.8-mile hike with a 200-foot gain
• Grinnell Lake Trail —A 4.6-mile hike with a 40-foot gain
• Grinnell Glacier Trail (viewpoint) —A 5.3-mile hike with a 1,600-foot gain that passes Lake Josephine
• Ptarmigan Falls —A 2.7-mile hike with a 700-foot gain
• Iceberg Lake —A 4.8-mile hike with a 1200-foot gain

Top Activities at Many Glacier

There is a boat cruise at Many Glacier that glides along the water of Swiftcurrent Lake and Lake Josephine. Reservations are required and the Glacier Park Boat Company offers several departures a day during the summer.

One and two-hour horseback riding trips are offered at the corral close to the Many Glacier Hotel parking lot. Reservations are required along with age and weight restrictions.

The Red Bus Tours depart from both Many Glacier Hotel and Swiftcurrent Motor Inn. This Red Bus Tour visits Two Medicine Lake and Wild Goose Island before completing the loop back to Many Glacier.

Where to Eat at Many Glacier

Picnickers will find picnic tables at Swiftcurrent Lake. This area offers vault toilets as well. The Swiftcurrent area offers a camp store too.

Many Glacier Hotel

Ptarmigan Dining Room starts the day with a continental or deluxe breakfast buffet. It also serves a lunch and dinner menu stocked with local flavors, like smoked trout and bison short ribs. Open daily from 6:30 a.m. to 9:30 p.m. with hours for breakfast, lunch and dinner during the season. No reservations are accepted.

Located alongside the Ptarmigan Dining Room, the Swiss Lounge features a small plates menu with salads, sandwiches and burgers. It also serves cocktails, wine or micro-brews from its full bar. Open daily from 11 a.m. to 10 p.m. during the season.

Heidi’s Snack Shop brews up espresso drinks along with several grab-n-go items like baked goods and sandwiches. It offers snacks to pack for your hike as well. Open daily during the season.

Swiftcurrent Motor Inn & Cabins

Nell’s at Swiftcurrent Restaurant serves up American breakfast favorites, like egg dishes and cereal. Lunch and dinner menus feature burgers, wraps, pizzas and salads. Open daily from 7 a.m. to 9 p.m. with hours for breakfast, lunch and dinner during the season.

Where to Stay at Many Glacier

Built in 1914 and 1915 by Great Northern Railway, it’s the largest property in Glacier National Park. Inside its central lobby, visitors will find rough-hewn logs and soaring ceilings of National Park Service Parkitecture.

The Many Glacier Hotel has 205 guest rooms, two suites and seven guest rooms. All rooms feature a private bathroom.

Swiftcurrent Motor Inn

As the more family-friendly option, the Swiftcurrent Motor Inn is located within a mile of Many Glacier Hotel. It features 95 cabins, some of which are historic, along with motel rooms. The area sports a casual restaurant and camp store.

Open seasonally from early June until mid-September. Reservations required.

Camping at Many Glacier

Campers will find the Many Glacier Campground near the Swiftcurrent Motor Inn.

Getting to Glacier National Park

Glacier Park International Airport (FCA) is located in Kalispell, Montana. It’s the closest airport to Glacier National Park and is serviced by Alaskan Airlines, Delta Air Lines and United Airlines. Visitors can also obtain rental cars in this location.

To take the Amtrak to Glacier National Park on the Empire Builder line, rail passengers can travel from Chicago, Seattle or Portland, Oregon. Amtrak stations are located at West Glacier and East Glacier and Amtrak offers vacation packages.

Glacier National Park is open 365 days a year, 24 hours a day. Admission is $35 for a 7-day pass for a private vehicle. If visiting several national parks within 12 months, consider an America the Beautiful annual pass .

Waterton Glacier International Peace Park

Sharing an international border with Canada, Waterton Lakes National Park adjoins the USA Glacier National Park. It’s home to the iconic Prince of Wales Hotel along with camping, hiking and boating. It’s also a UNESCO World Heritage Site.

A seasonal border crossing is located within the park. Visitors will need to exit Glacier National Park and head north on Chief Mountain Highway (MT Hwy 17/AB Hwy 6). This is a seasonal border crossing and typically opens in mid-May and closes for the season at the end of September.

Drivers must have a valid driver’s license with proper vehicle registration and vehicle insurance. Since this is a land crossing, a valid U.S. passport book isn’t required. A U.S. passport card can be used.

Bears in Glacier

Glacier National Park is home to the largest grizzly bear population in the continental U.S. (outside of Alaska). Though encounters are rare, Park Rangers offer some guidelines to reduce bear encounters:

• Remain observant.
• Hike in groups.
• Keep campsites clean.
• Make noise while hiking by wearing bear bells and talking.
• Don’t approach bears or let bears approach you.
• If a bear notices you, you are too close. Back away slowly and if attacked, fight back. Don’t play dead.
• If you are comfortable, consider carrying bear spray.

Jetsetting Fools

Travel Far. Discover More. Spend Less.

A Perfect Glacier National Park Itinerary

Welcome to JetSetting Fools, here you will find our best travel tips for destinations worldwide. Some of the links on this site are Affiliate Links and if you use them to make a purchase, we may earn a commission. For more information, read our Disclosure Policy .

Glacier National Park Montana is a massive 1-million-acre wonderland characterized by soaring mountain peaks, teal blue lakes and tumbling waterfalls. We created the perfect Glacier National Park Itinerary to help fellow travelers to Montana experience the best of this incredible area.

Driving and hiking to scenic viewpoints are highlights of any Glacier National Park vacation. However, planning what to do in Glacier National Park Montana – and in what order – can be a real challenge. No worries; we are here to help! In our detailed Glacier National Park trip itinerary, we show you the best way to tour GNP.

Plan The Best Trip to Glacier National Park Montana

Planning a trip to Glacier National Park is no easy task. Nicknamed ‘The Crown of the Continent’ – the park is enormous – and beautiful scenery is literally around every corner. Deciding where to start your visit to Montana can be overwhelming and creating a complete Glacier National Park itinerary can be stressful.

How to plan a trip to Glacier National Park will depend on your interests, budget and overall time allotted for your Montana trip. In our Glacier Itinerary, we include top Glacier National Park things to do…and a few hidden gems as well!

We traveled to the park as a couple, but our Glacier National Park vacation planner can be used by anyone. Whether you are planning a Glacier National Park honeymoon itinerary, a family trip to Glacier National Park or a solo GNP adventure, you can use our itinerary to plan your trip to Glacier NP!

Pro Tip:  Get (and stay) organized for your Montana vacation with our Trip Planning Printables !

3 Day Trip: Glacier National Park Itinerary

In our Glacier National Park trip planner, we outline how to spend 3 days in Glacier NP. We think creating an itinerary for 3 days in Glacier National Park is just enough time to experience the highlights. That said, 3 days in Glacier N.P. might not be the right amount of time for your trip. 

How Many Days to Spend in Glacier National Park?

If you are asking the question, How many days do you need in Glacier National Park?, you are not alone. We, too, struggled with how long to spend at Glacier National Park. We ended up staying near West Glacier for an entire month…and never got bored of our almost daily GNP adventures. 

How Many Days for Glacier National Park is Enough?

We understand that not everyone has a month to spend in Montana – and we contemplated how many days at Glacier National Park are needed to see just the incredible highlights. In our estimation, 3 days in Glacier National Park is an ideal amount of time. Therefore, we created our itinerary for how to see Glacier National Park for 3 days. 

What if I Have More or Less than Three Days in Glacier National Park?

Visitors planning 3-day Glacier National Park vacations can use our Glacier National Park outline as it is written. That said, if you are still unsure how many days to spend at Glacier National Park, we outline the best way to spend more – or less – time as well.

At the end of the article, you will find our alternate Glacier NP itineraries for the top things to do at Glacier National Park in 1 to 7 days. With our tips, you can easily plan your best itinerary for GNP.

Planning a longer Montana trip? Use our guide to the Best Montana Road Trip !

Glacier National Park Itinerary 3 Days

Our itinerary for Glacier National Park includes everything you need to plan your trip to GNP. In addition to summarizing a plan for 3 days in Glacier NP, we also detail other pertinent Montana travel information; like how to get there and where to stay.

Furthermore, we provide information about what to pack for Glacier National Park, the best time of year to visit Glacier National Park and the essential 2023 ticketed entry for GNP.

Tips about Our Glacier National Park Itinerary

For this GNP itinerary, we recommend staying in West Glacier – either in the park or outside of the West Entrance in one of the nearby towns.

Hiking is one of the top activities in Glacier National Park – and we feature many of the best easy to moderate hikes in our trip plan. For complete details about each hike, be sure to also read our Hike Glacier National Park guide.

Our sample Glacier NP Itinerary includes 3 full days of sightseeing and outdoor adventures. However, heavy crowds and foul weather can wreak havoc on any Glacier National Park trip plan. With only 3 days in Glacier NP, we highly recommend having a backup plan to each day’s activities. To help, we offer alternatives throughout our Glacier National Park Montana Itinerary.

Save, Pin or Bookmark our Glacier NP Itinerary so that you can access it while planning your trip to Montana!

Day 1 of 3 Days in Glacier National Park: WEST GLACIER

On Day 1 of your Glacier National Park Trip Itinerary explore the hikes and lakes in West Glacier. Bring a packed lunch and plenty of water so that you can enjoy the entire day outdoors.

Hike to Avalanche Lake in the Morning

Kick off your Montana trip with one of the top activities in Glacier National Park: Hike up to picture-perfect Avalanche Lake. Although this Glacier hike is considered moderate, hikers who complete the trek are rewarded with an absolutely grand vista. Consider spending some time at Avalanche Lake to relax, swim or have a picnic.

Pro Tip : You will want to get to the park early to snag a parking space at the Avalanche Lake trailhead. If there are no spaces available, be patient and circle around a few times or find a spot further along the road and walk back.

Drive to Logan Pass in the Afternoon

In the early afternoon, continue driving east on Going To The Sun Road to Logan Pass. The pass marks the Continental Divide – and is the starting point for two fabulous Glacier hikes: Hidden Lake Overlook and the Highline Trail.

While avid hikers will want to set off on these iconic Glacier NP hikes, those not interested in hiking can still take in the fabulous views.

Stop into the Logan Pass Visitor Center for trail maps, interesting displays and souvenirs from the bookshop. Visitors can also obtain information about National Park Service Ranger-led Activities.

Pro Tip : The drive on Going To The Sun Road between Avalanche Lake and Logan Pass is the prettiest section – and there are several pull-offs to stop and take in some of the truly incredible Glacier National Park views. As you will be returning to West Glacier after visiting Logan Pass, you can stop at some on the way up and others on the way back. 

Watch Sunset at Lake McDonald in the Evening

End your first day of your 3 Day Itinerary Glacier National Park along the water and watch the glow of the setting sun over Lake McDonald. There are numerous places to stop along the 10-mile long lake – our favorite spot is a small unnamed beach ( MAP ). To really enjoy the shifting light, we bring folding chairs (but we have seen others use a blanket or hammock) and a cooler with drinks and snacks. Just remember to pack out whatever you pack in – and leave no trace!

Alternate Glacier NP Itinerary Suggestions for Day 1

Whether you are looking for easier hikes, less driving, optional activities or alternate parking, consider these other options of top things to do in Glacier National Park.

Hike Johns Lake Loop and/or Upper McDonald Creek Trails

The hike at Johns Lake and Upper McDonald Creek are less strenuous than Avalanche Lake – and, as they are less crowded, there tends to be more parking, as well.

No-Hike Glacier NP Viewpoints

GNP visitors do not need to hike to find outstanding scenery – there are scenic viewpoints all along Going To The Sun Road. A few of our favorites in West Glacier are McDonald Falls, Sacred Dancing Cascade and Weeping Wall/Paradise Meadow. The Loop, Big Bend and Oberlin Bend are also good viewpoints on the way to Logan Pass and taking in the scenery is one of the top things to do Glacier National Park.

Kayak Lake McDonald

Kayaking at Glacier National Park is a top activity – and a phenomenal way to gain a different perspective of the park. Kayak rentals on Lake McDonald are available near the Apgar Visitor Center.

Day 2 of your Glacier National Park 3 Day Itinerary: EAST GLACIER

On the second day of your Glacier Park Itinerary, discover the beauty of East Glacier. As you will be traveling to the opposite side of the park, you will need to get an early start.

Drive Going To The Sun Road in the Morning to Glacier National Park East

Start your day early (and we mean really early!) and drive the entire length of Going To The Sun Road. Note how different the mountains look in the morning light – compared to the late afternoon from the previous day.

Consider making a stop at St. Mary Lake to hike to St. Mary Falls and Virginia Falls. You will find all the details for these in our Glacier National Park Hiking article.

While there are an astounding number of roadside viewpoints along GTTS Road, don’t miss the viewpoint for Wild Goose Island. The Wild Goose Island Lookout offers an awe-inspiring panoramic view; in fact, the view is said to be the most photographed point in all of Glacier National Park.

Many Glacier by Mid-Day

At East Glacier, drive through the Blackfeet Indian Reservation and the small town of Babb to Many Glacier – one of the most picturesque places in Glacier NP. Make your way to Swiftcurrent Lake – the site of the historic Many Glacier Lodge – and stretch your legs on the Swiftcurrent Lake Nature Trail.

Pro Tip : If you didn’t bring lunch, consider a sit-down meal with a fabulous view at the Ptarmigan Dining Room (or, if the dining room is full booked, try the lounge or snack shop, which are also located within the Many Glacier Lodge).

Two Medicine in the late Afternoon

Arrive at Two Medicine Lake by late afternoon and hop on a boat to discover a lesser-visited part of Glacier Park. Sinopah, a historic wooden boat, takes guests to the upper west shoreline of the lake – where passengers can opt to depart for a hike (and take a boat back afterwards).

In addition to the enjoying the stellar East Glacier views, guests will learn about the Blackfeet Tribe and the region during the boat ride. On your way out of Two Medicine, make a quick stop at Running Eagle Falls for a short walk to a unique waterfall.

Pro Tip : Rather than returning on Going To The Sun Road, consider taking Highway 2, which rounds the southern end of Glacier NP. If there is still daylight left – and it is Spring or Summer – make a stop at Goat Lick Overlook and try to spot mountain goats!

Alternate Glacier National Park Trip Plan for Day 2

Day 2 of our itinerary for Glacier National Park includes epic scenery…and covers some miles. We have a few alternate itinerary suggestions and tips to cut down on drive times.

Choose between Many Glacier or Two Medicine

Rather than trying to visit both regions of East Glacier, choose to either spend time at Many Glacier or Two Medicine. Both areas offer ample opportunities for boating and hiking. In fact, if you limit your itinerary to just seeing Many Glacier and are an avid hiker, embark on the challenging and beautiful Grinnell Glacier Trail. Just be aware that completing the strenuous Grinnell Glacier Hike is a full day adventure.  

Only Drive Going To The Sun Road to St. Mary Lake

St. Mary is the second-largest lake in Glacier National Park. Offering scenic overlooks (the aforementioned Wild Goose Island is on St. Mary Lake), incredible hikes, boat rides and amazing wildlife spotting opportunities, visitors could spend an entire day in East Glacier at Saint Mary Lake.

Stay in East Glacier National Park

Depending on your overall Montana trip plan, consider staying in East Glacier for the night. In order to fit this into our itinerary for Glacier NP, we recommend rearranging our 3-day trip plan by swapping days 2 and 3.

Limit Your Exploration to West Glacier

To completely avoid the drive to East Glacier, spend the day diving deeper into West Glacier with additional Glacier hikes or participating in one of the fun park activities (which you can learn about later in the post).

Day 3 of your 3-Day Itinerary Glacier National Park: NORTH GLACIER

On the last day of your Glacier National Park 3 Days Itinerary, travel north to a historic Montana town and remote lake. While you will want to bring sufficient water, you can pick up lunch (and treats) on the route.

Drive to Polebridge, Montana in the Morning

In the morning, make the drive over unpaved roads to Polebridge (use Camas Road and Outside North Fork Road) – and keep an eye out for Montana wildlife along the way. At the historic town of Polebridge is the popular Polebridge Mercantile (or simply the Merc), which has been in operation since 1914. The small shop is famous for Huckleberry Bear Claws – but everything they make is delicious! You can grab food to go for lunch from the Merc, too.

Spend the Afternoon at Lake Bowman

After your stop in Polebridge, re-enter the park and make the bumpy drive over gravel roads to Bowman Lake – one of our absolute favorite places in Glacier National Park. Spectacular, serene and secluded, Lake Bowman is the perfect place to sit back and appreciate the natural beauty of GNP. Besides staring at the awe-inspiring scene, visitors can take a swim, kayak or go for a peaceful Bowman Lake shoreline hike.

Watch Sunset from Rocky Point in the Evening

End your Glacier National Park trip in a quiet spot with an unforgettable view: Rocky Point. It is just a short hike up to the rocky outcrop – and a phenomenal place to savor the inspiring Montana scenery. As the shadows grow long and the sun starts to set, the light illuminates the Glacier mountain peaks – creating an unforgettable moment. We think it is one of the best sights in Glacier National Park!

Alternate Itinerary for Glacier National Park for Day 3

If you are not up for a trip north over unpaved roads, consider spending your last day in Glacier National Park doing one of the following activities.

All Day Hike at Logan Pass

Tackle one of the most incredible hikes in Glacier National Park on the Highline Trail. Trekkers can start at Logan Pass, hike up to Grinnell Glacier Overlook, continue on to Granite Park Chalet and complete the 16 mile hike at The Loop (then catch a ride back to Logan Pass on the GNP shuttlebus or by hitchhiking).

More Montana Hikes and Viewpoints

Another way to spend your final day in Glacier NP is to take any other hikes or visit any viewpoints that you missed on your first two days because of parking issues or inclement weather. We outline additional GNP activity options in the next section as well!

More Things To Do: Glacier National Park

We highlighted our favorite Glacier National Park activities, but there are many more things to do in Glacier NP! As we already mentioned, choosing what to do at Glacier National Park will depend on your personal interests, budget and energy level. 

Guided Hiking Tours

The trails in GNP can be intimidating – and many hikers are more comfortable letting a guide lead the way. There are park-sponsored Ranger-led talks, walks and hikes that visitors can join; information is available at ranger stations and the visitor centers. 

Additionally, visitors can hire guides for organized or private hikes and tours. Glacier Institute is one of many companies that offer guided expeditions. 

Horseback Riding Glacier National Park

On vacations to Glacier National Park, a unique way to see the sights is on horseback. Visitors can join one of the horseback riding tours in Glacier NP that follow popular hiking trails – or get off the beaten path and take an overnight trip into the backcountry.

Glacier National Park Rafting and Floating

Rafting down the Flathead River is an exciting way to spend a day in astounding scenery! There are several companies that offer rafting trips that you could include on your Glacier National Park Itinerary. This rafting tour is led by a professional rafting guide and is suitable for beginners as well as seasoned rafters. Tours depart in the morning or afternoon. Get the details!

Travelers looking for a more relaxing ride down the river can join a scenic floating tour on the Middle Fork of the Flathead River. Rather than battling the rapids, enjoy the serenity and beauty. The tour can even be upgraded to include a riverside dinner. Find out more!

Fishing in Glacier National Park

Many people wonder if you can fish in Glacier National Park – and the answer is yes! In fact, Glacier National Park fly fishing is one of the top activities to do in Glacier NP. There are some exclusions and catch limits for fishing at Glacier, so you will want to check the regulations. If you don’t have your own fishing gear, there are plenty of places where you can rent it either in or near the park.

Glacier National Park Kayaking, Stand-Up Paddle Boarding and Swimming

Renting a Glacier National Park kayak or stand up paddle board and spending a couple of hours on (or in! ) a crystal-clear lake are some of the highly rated park activities. In addition to kayaking in Glacier National Park, visitors can rent canoes, rowboats or just jump right in for an invigorating swim! Rentals are available at Lake McDonald, Two Medicine and Swiftcurrent Lake.

Glacier National Park Tips for Swimming

The crystal-clear lakes and streams of Montana are perfect for a refreshing swim after a long day in the park and on the trails. There are plenty of places to wade or jump in the water at Glacier. Just be aware of your surroundings and use caution, as the water is chilly, currents can be strong and rocks beneath the water can be slippery. 

Biking Glacier National Park

Bicycling in Glacier National Park is permitted on roads (including Going To The Sun Road) and a few select trails. While avid cyclists may like the challenge of biking uphill to Logan Pass, there are electric bike rentals and downhill tours available as well.

Red Bus Glacier National Park Driving Tour

One of the best Glacier National Park tours, the Red Bus Tours in GNP are iconic. The historic red buses have been transporting passengers through the park for more than 100 years. With limited seating, it is essential to book in advance to ensure you get a spot. 

Find more information about these Glacier NP activities and Glacier National Park tours at one of the Visitor’s Centers .

Glacier National Park: How Many Days?

Deciding how many days to visit Glacier National Park can be quite the conundrum. Ultimately, you will need to determine how long to spend in Glacier National Park based on your interests, budget and overall time limits for your trip. 

Above we highlighted what to see in Glacier National Park in 3 Days, but what if you have more – or less – time? We have devised a few more Glacier National Park Itineraries that cover 1 to 7 days in Glacier NP that can help you decide how many days in Glacier National Park for your trip.

Day Trip to Glacier National Park

Trying to visit Glacier National Park in one day is a big feat and not one we recommend. The park is humungous and there is so much to see. However, if one day is all you have, then we recommend making the most of your time.

One Day Itinerary for Glacier National Park

The best way to see Glacier National Park in a day is to get an early start! With just one day it is possible to see the Glacier National Park highlights, but you will need to have a solid plan.

Begin with an easy to moderate hike in West Glacier that can be accessed easily from Going To The Sun Road (like Johns Lake Loop or Avalanche Lake). After your hike, continue to Logan Pass and make a quick stop to take in the views. Be in Many Glacier by the afternoon for an easy hike around Swiftcurrent Lake, then end the day in Two Medicine.

Glacier National Park Itinerary 2 Days

With 2 Days in Glacier National Park, visitors should choose two areas to explore: East and West or West and North. Either way, the two days will be filled with epic nature.

Glacier National Park 2-Day Itinerary

To plan a trip to Glacier National Park in 2 days, you can use our above outline – choosing Day 1 and Day 2 (West and East) or Day 1 and Day 3 (West and North).

Alternatively, really ambitious travelers could pack in a lot more sightseeing. With two days in Glacier National Park, start Day 1 at the crack of dawn and drive to Lake Bowman in the morning, then hike Avalanche Lake in the afternoon and spend the evening on Lake McDonald. On Day 2, drive Going To The Sun Road to East Glacier and visit both Many Glacier and Two Medicine.

Alternate Glacier National Park Itinerary 3 Days

We have offered a detailed outline of the best 3-day vacation to Glacier National Park. However, we have tips for travelers who would rather plan a vacation in Glacier National Park that requires less driving and more hiking. 

Alternate 3 Day Glacier National Park Itinerary

Rather than driving to different areas of the park, base yourself in either East or West Glacier and fully explore it. For example, if you stay in West Glacier, spend one day hiking McDonald Lake and Avalanche. On the second day, drive to Logan Pass and hike the Highline and the Hidden Lake Trail. Then, on the last day, head north to Bowman Lake via Polebridge. 

Glacier National Park Itinerary 4 Days

On a 4-day trip to Glacier National Park, visitors can spend more time in nature – either hiking or participating in one of the other park activities.

Glacier National Park 4-Day Itinerary

We think the best way to spend 4 days in Glacier National Park is to use our outlined 3 Days in Glacier National Park Itinerary, then on the last day, hike the complete Highline Trail. Another way to plan a Glacier National Park 4-day trip would be to select one of the activities – like rafting or horseback riding – for your last day.

Glacier National Park Itinerary 5 Days

Creating a 5-Day Itinerary Glacier National Park allows visitors the opportunity to truly enjoy the splendid nature on offer.

Glacier National Park 5-Day Itinerary

With 5 days in Glacier National Park, we recommend spending 2 nights in West Glacier and 3 nights in East Glacier. Spend the first day at McDonald and Avalanche (as outlined in Day 1). On Day 2, go to Bowman (which is Day 3 in our 3-Day Glacier NP Itinerary). For Day 3, check out of your accommodations early and spend the day hiking at Logan Pass or St. Mary Lake – then make your way to your East Glacier accommodations. Spend Day 4 at Many Glacier and Day 5 at Two Medicine.

Glacier National Park Itinerary 7 Days

Spending 7 days in Glacier National Park is ideal for visitors who really want to immerse themselves in nature.

Glacier National Park 7-Day Itinerary

To create an optimal 7 Day Itinerary Glacier National Park, we recommend splitting your time between East and West Glacier. Use our 5-Day Glacier National Park Itinerary above, then add one additional day to each side of the park.

For example, spend the first day at McDonald and Avalanche (as outlined in Day 1). On Day 2 go to Bowman, then on Day 3, go horseback riding or rafting. On Day 4, check out of your West Glacier accommodations early and spend the day hiking at Logan Pass or St. Mary Lake – then check in to your East Glacier accommodations.

Spend Day 5 at Many Glacier hiking the trails around the lake. On Day 6, learn more about the Blackfeet Tribe by visiting museums, hiring a Native American fishing guide or attending a pow wow. Spend your last day at Two Medicine, where you can take an early boat ride, go for a hike and catch an afternoon boat ride back.

Alternatively, spend a day of your One Week Glacier National Park Itinerary visiting a nearby town – like quaint Whitefish , historic Kalispell or youthful Missoula .  

More Itineraries for Glacier National Park

We have outlined the best 3 Day Glacier National Park Itinerary – and how to plan a trip to Glacier NP with more or less time. However, you can also create a Glacier Itinerary that originates in nearby…and one that includes both Yellowstone and Glacier National Parks. 

Glacier National Park and Yellowstone Itinerary

Using our Glacier National Park suggested itinerary, you can easily create a longer Montana trip by adding Yellowstone National Park to your plan. To create a One-Week Yellowstone and Glacier National Park Itinerary, use this helpful Yellowstone trip plan. 

Waterton Lakes and Glacier National Parks Itinerary

The same beauty that is found in Glacier National Park extends north of the US-Canada border into Waterton Lakes National Park. In fact, the two parks combined are called Waterton-Glacier International Peace Park and is designated as a UNESCO World Heritage Site. 

Visitors can plan a Waterton-Glacier Itinerary that explores the Canadian side of the Crown of the Continent using these tips on Waterton NP . 

That said, we have a few tips of our own. First, don’t forget your passport – as you will need it to cross the Canadian border! Trekkers looking to hit the trails should aim for one of the best in the park, like Crypt Lake Trail, Carthew-Alderson or Akamina Ridge. Travelers who want to stay in Waterton Lakes NP should book a room at The Prince of Wales Hotel – and enjoy an afternoon of high tea, too! 

Spokane to Glacier National Park Itinerary

Many travelers opt to take a road trip journey to GNP from Spokane, Washington – as there are often cheap flights to Spokane airport (more tips about flying to Glacier NP later). There are a few different routes you can take from Spokane to Glacier NP – and many sights to see along the way.

First, spend some Exploring Spokane like we did! For a scenic drive to Glacier from Spokane, we recommend driving east from Spokane to Coeur d’Alene, then north to Kootenai Falls. Next, hop on the Lake Koocanusa Scenic Byway to Whitefish and Kalispell – and complete the drive to Glacier National Park. You can find tips on this route in our Ultimate Montana Road Trip article.

Missoula to Glacier National Park Itinerary 

Missoula, Montana is another great starting point for a trip to National Park Glacier. 

After seeing the Sights in Missoula , embark on a road trip journey north. Sights to see along the way are the Bison Range, Buddha Garden and Flathead Lake (among others!). Use our Road Trip in Montana for more details of what to see from Missoula to Glacier NP.

Looking for more fabulous trips in the United States? Use our guide to the Best Weekend Getaways in USA !

Glacier National Park Tips for Your Itinerary

Now that we have outlined the top things to do in Glacier National Park and the best way to spend time there, we have a few more tips to help you plan your trip to Glacier.

Glacier National Park Fee

There are weekly (7-day) and Annual Glacier National Park passes – but no daily pass. As of 2023, the Weekly Glacier National Park Pass cost $35 USD and the Annual Glacier NP Pass cost $70. Passes can be purchased in person at any entrance gate when the booths are staffed or online .

America The Beautiful Pass

If you plan on visiting any other national or federal parks within a year, the America The Beautiful interagency pass is the best deal. Glacier NP and 2,000 other federal recreation sites can be visited with an America The Beautiful Pass. The annual pass costs $80 USD and can be purchased at GNP or online .

Top Tip : US Military members, Volunteers and 4th Grade Students are offered free annual America The Beautiful passes. Additionally, there are discounted Senior passes available.

Pro Tip : Remember to pick up a free and useful Glacier National Park visitors guide at the entrance!

New 2023 Additional Ticket for Daily Vehicle Use in the Park

In addition to a park pass, for summer 2023, visitors will need to purchase a Entry Reservation Ticket in order to enter specific areas – including Going To The Sun Road.

Not only is there Going To The Sun Road ticketed entry for 2023, but visitors also need a Vehicle Reservation Pass to enter North Fork, Many Glacier and Two Medicine. Each location has specific details – including the dates the passes are required and how long the passes are valid.

For example, passes for Going To The Sun Road from both the West Entrance and St. Mary Entrance are good for 3 consecutive days, while the other passes are only good for one day. 

The Vehicle Reservation Passes are available online, but only a limited number of tickets are sold for each day. Visitors can purchase the tickets about 120 days in advance – and any cancelled reservations will become available again 24 hour prior.

Find current information about when the extra ticket will be required and how to purchase it on the official GNP website . 

How To Visit Glacier National Park without a Vehicle Reservation Ticket

There is no doubt that driving Going To The Sun Road and visiting the other extra ticketed areas are highlights of our Glacier National Park Itinerary 3 Days. However, travelers who are unable to secure the Vehicle Reservation Pass for GNP have a few options.

First, the passes are only required for entry between the hours of 6am and 3pm – so visitors who are unable to get a pass can enter the park very early in the morning or in the late afternoon. 

Second, visitors who stay inside the park at one of the GNP accommodations don’t need the extra pass (however, these reservations are booked out far in advance!). 

Finally, visitors who make advance reservations for in-park activities – like a boat tour – are exempt from purchasing a pass for that day. 

Driving Glacier National Park Going To The Sun Road

Taking a road trip through Glacier National Park is one of the best ways to experience it…and one of the best drives in Glacier National Park is Going To The Sun Road. 

The route, which extends from Glacier National Park West Entrance to the Saint Mary Entrance in East Glacier, features sweeping panoramic mountain views, epic lake vistas and plenty of places to stop and admire the beauty.

That said, it’s a narrow, winding road on the side of a cliff and is prone to congestion (even with the ticketing systems). When too crowded, the Park Rangers will not hesitate shutting the road down for a couple of hours to let it clear out (always have a Plan B when visiting GNP).

Tips for Getting Around Glacier National Park in a Car

It is important to note that not all the roads are paved (the gravel road to Bowman Lake is notoriously rough!). Road construction projects can also cause havoc in and around the park. It’s essential to keep up to date with the current conditions and road projects . 

Drivers (and passengers!) can enhance their drive through the park with GNP Commentary that highlights the history of the park and insider stories. Get it here!

To succeed at driving in Glacier National Park, we suggest slowing down, enjoying the scenery and being patient. Read all our tips and advice for a Road Trip to Glacier National Park !

Is a Car Necessary for Visiting Glacier National Park? 

We think touring Glacier National Park by car (and then hiking) is the best way to experience the vast natural landscapes. That said, driving is one of the most frustrating parts of visiting the park – as roads are congested and parking lots are often full. 

Travelers not interested in fighting the crowds can opt to go car-free…with some limitations. The best way to visit Glacier National Park without a car is to utilize the park’s free shuttle service. The Glacier summer shuttle bus stops at major points of interest and trailheads, but bear in mind that it’s a first-come, first-serve shuttle – so waiting may be required. 

Best Time to Visit Glacier National Park

Deciding when to visit Glacier National Park is an important first step of planning your trip. Our above outlined itinerary is best suited for summer and autumn visitors, which we think is the best time to go to Glacier National Park. While the park is technically open year-round, activities are extremely limited during the long winter (which can last up to 6 months).

Glacier National Park: Montana Weather

The weather in Glacier National Park can be as wild as the animals. It can snow in July and be hot in October. Generally speaking, the summer months are warm, but with cool evenings. Winters are cold, snowy and sometimes windy, too. Spring and autumn are completely unpredictable.

Best Month To Visit Glacier National Park

Determining the best time to go to Glacier National Park will depend on your interests. Below, we offer a little insight regarding what to expect in each season so that you can plan your Glacier park trip. 

Glacier National Park in Summer

Due to the pleasant weather, summer is the best time to travel to Glacier National Park to enjoy the outdoors. Temperatures top in the mid-80s and there is usually little precipitation. Although not guaranteed, it is likely that all of the roads and hiking trails will be open during July and August. The downside, however, is that the crowds will be full-on.

Glacier National Park in Fall

We, personally, think the best time to see Glacier National Park is in the autumn, when the crowds are lighter, the air is crisp and the leaves start changing color. That said, the weather can be erratic and some park services are already closed by mid-to-late-autumn.

During our month-long trip to Glacier National Park in the fall, we experienced warm sunshine, a few days of rain, an entire week of smoke (from nearby wildfires) and the first dusting of snow.

We also experienced the absolutely stunning autumn leaves and a bout of unusually warm weather (high temperatures were still in the 70s through the first week of October!). Regardless, most of the facilities were closing for winter (including restrooms and water sources).

Glacier National Park in Winter

Most of GNP is closed during the long and brutal winter – including visitor centers, restroom facilities and all but 10 miles of the Going To The Sun Road. Highlights of the park in wintertime are snowshoeing and cross country skiing.

Glacier National Park in Spring

Winter-like conditions last through most of the spring…and much of the lower areas are wet and sloppy. Because facilities and most roads remain closed until at least late May, it is a very unpopular time to visit. However, there are some perks to visiting in the spring! First, the crowds are extremely light and, second, wildlife is abundant as it awakens from a sleepy slumber.

Getting To Glacier National Park, Montana

Glacier National Park is located in northwest Montana, near the town of Kalispell. As we mentioned, the beautiful nature of GNP extends into the Waterton Lakes National Park in Canada. Glacier NP can be reached by plane, train or car. One of the first things you need to do when planning a trip to Glacier National Park is figure out how to get there. 

Glacier National Park Airport

The Glacier Park International Airport is the closest airport to Glacier NP. Located in north Kalispell, it’s  just 25 miles from Glacier NP West Entrance.

For our trip, we flew from Portland (PDX) to Glacier Airport (FCA). Served by all major US airlines, it is the best way to fly to Glacier National Park. 

However, FCA isn’t the only place to fly into when visiting Glacier National Park. Other nearby airports that are within a few hours drive are Missoula, Spokane or even Bozeman. 

To find the best flights to Glacier National Park, start your search on Skyscanner . But, first, read our Top Tips for Booking Plane Tickets !

Glacier National Park Amtrak

Visitors can also get to Glacier National Park by train! The Empire Builder Amtrak line, which extends from Chicago to Seattle , makes stops at Whitefish, West Glacier, Essex and East Glacier Stations.

Travelers opting to stay in Whitefish, for example, can take the train to Glacier National Park via the East Glacier Station. Once in East Glacier, a shuttle or rental car can get you the rest of the way.

Car Rental for Glacier National Park

In most of our travels, we prefer to be car-free – instead opting to use public transport and Uber to get around the places we visit. In Montana, however, that is impossible . A key factor when planning your Glacier National Park 3 Day Itinerary is renting a car .

Glacier National Park Car Rental

One of our top tips for visiting Glacier National Park is to rent the right vehicle. We completely underestimated how much driving is required when visiting Glacier National Park.

For our trip, we foolishly booked a compact car. Thankfully, we hit a stroke of good luck and were upgraded to a Subaru Forester – a Mid-Size SUV – which was much better for navigating the roads in GNP! Strat your search here for the best rates and options for car rentals .

Where To Stay at Glacier National Park

When we first started searching for places to stay in Glacier National Park, we were a bit overwhelmed. Guests have a choice of accommodations inside the park, outside the west entrance, outside the east entrance and in nearby cities.

Staying Inside the Park

One of the fun things to do in Glacier National Park is to stay onsite. Accommodations range from historic lodges and rustic cabins to reserved campgrounds and primitive camping sites. While staying inside Glacier National Park would be epic, guests will need to plan their Glacier National Park trip itinerary far in advance.

Visitors who want to get reservations in a cabin or one of the lodges inside Glacier NP should look at Lake McDonald Lodge, Village Inn at Apgar, Swiftcurrent Motor Inn and Cabins, Rising Sun Motor Inn and Cabins, Many Glacier Hotel and Cedar Creek Lodge. 

Staying Outside the Park

Outside of the park, in nearby towns like West Glacier, Coram and Hungry Horse, there are additional options for places to stay. Glacier Outdoor Center Chalets, Sky Eco Cabins and Under Canvas Glamping are just a few of the top-rated spots, which can be reserved on Booking.com .

Travelers looking for unique hotels near Glacier National Park should consider the Isaak Walton Inn. Located about halfway between the East and West park entrances in the town of Essex, visitors can opt to stay in one of the luxury converted train cars! 

Before booking, use our tips for Finding the Best Hotel Deals !

Airbnb Glacier National Park

For our trip to GNP, we went with our go-to accommodation resource: Airbnb. Luxury cabins, tiny homes, tipis and tent sites can all be found through Airbnb. While there are only a few accommodations listed on Airbnb inside the park, there are numerous options just beyond the entrances.

We stayed in a newly renovated house with a cozy cabin interior in Martin City – which is just a 15-minute drive to the West Glacier NP Entrance. The location was our main priority, but we absolutely loved having our own kitchen, BBQ, firepit, washer and dryer along with a very comfortable place to relax after long days exploring Montana.

Not already a member of Airbnb? Read our Top Tips for Airbnb Guests ! 

Glacier National Park Cabins

Renting a Glacier National Park cabin in Swiftcurrent or Rising Sun would be phenomenal…but there are only a few available. On the other hand, there are hundreds of cabins at Glacier National Park outside of the park where visitors can stay. Cabin accommodations range from basic to extravagant, with prices to match. To find your perfect cabin, we recommend searching both Booking.com and Airbnb .

Camping in Glacier National Park

Visitors who want to spend a night in a tent under the stars within GNP have 13 campgrounds to choose from – which offer a combined total of more than 1,000 tent sites. Find out more on the official park website . 

Camping Near Glacier National Park

Although there are 1,000 sites inside the park, they do fill up in the summertime. However, visitors can find campsites near Glacier National Park with ease. The West Glacier KOA Resort, located just 2.5 miles from the West Glacier Entrance, has tent sites, cabins and RV sites.

Backpack Glacier National Park

Visitors who want to get off the beaten path can discover hidden gems by backcountry backpacking Glacier National Park. Backcountry permits are required and backcountry campers should be well prepared for their trip.

Glacier National Park RV Park

Traveling to Glacier National Park with an RV can be a bit complicated – as there are size limits within the park (21 feet long, 10 feet high and 8 feet wide) and maneuvering larger vehicles on Going To The Sun Road and crowded parking lots can be a challenge. That said, there are plenty of places outside the park where visitors with RVs can park. In addition to West Glacier KOA Resort, West Glacier RV Park is another good option.

Eating and Drinking at GNP

Vacations to Glacier NP are not just about hiking and scenery – you have to eat, too!

There are just a handful of Glacier National Park restaurants where visitors can eat a meal inside the park. While some of the establishments are iconic (like the Many Glacier Lodge restaurant), seating is extremely limited and waiting for a table can take up a big part of your day.

Instead of eating at restaurants in Glacier National Park, we recommend bringing a portable lunch and snacks that you can eat at scenic overlooks or on hikes. We shopped for picnic lunch items at Smith’s – a large grocery store in Columbia Falls. There are mega stores – like Walmart and Target – in Kalispell, too.

Where to Eat on your Glacier NP Itinerary

There are not an abundance of dining options close to the park, but there are a few places to get a tasty meal in the towns near the West Glacier entrance.

Josephine’s Bar and Kitchen

Located off Highway 2 in Coram, Josephine’s is a fantastic little spot to grab some grub and a drink. Everything we ate at Josephine’s was fantastic – but we highly recommend their legendary Bison Gyro and the Spicy Trout Cakes.

Columbia Falls Restaurants

Columbia Falls is about a 20-minute drive from the West Entrance of Glacier NP. There are several restaurants in Columbia Falls where you can get a filling meal after a day of exploring. Nite Owl is known for their barbeque and Backslope Brewing offers modern food in a lively setting.

However, our top pick for food in Columbia Falls are the glutinous and oh-so-delish burgers at Mudman . The original Mudman Burger is a 1/3-pound patty topped with lettuce, tomato, cheese, bacon, homemade chili and secret sauce. It is decadent, messy and worth every calorie.

Bars Near Glacier National Park

We liked to end most of our days relaxing quietly lakeside watching the sunset with a chilled can of locally crafted beer. However, there are a few establishments to pop into for a drink that you can include on your Glacier National Park Itinerary.

Glacier Distilling Company

Featuring small-batch whiskeys made from locally sourced products, the Glacier Distilling Company tasting room in Coram makes for a fabulous stop. The distillery tasting flights are an optimal way to try the local spirits – and they sell bottles to go as well. Our favorite was the award-winning Fireweed Bourbon Whiskey, which is made with cherries from nearby Flathead Lake.

Packer’s Roost, Coram

A local bar that welcomes visitors, Packer’s Roost is a fun drinking establishment with a full line up of typical bar fare (and a few specialties). Whether you go for the booze, food or atmosphere, it is nearly guaranteed to be an interesting time!  

Planning A Trip to Glacier National Park: What You Will Need

When packing for Glacier National Park, you will want to make sure you have the right gear. We have a few final travel tips and packing hacks for your Glacier NP trip.

Proper Shoes for Montana

Depending on which activities you plan for Glacier National Park, you will want to make sure you pack the right footwear! On our autumn trip, when the trails were mostly dry, I wore my everyday trainers  and Kris wore Merrell trail shoes for hikes in the park – and they both worked great for us! However, a good pair of weather-proof hiking boots would be a much better option in other seasons. Find more travel footwear tips in our blog post, The Best Travel Shoes . 

Appropriate Apparel

The weather at Glacier is…unpredictable. We experienced foggy valleys and clear peaks, sunny weather that quickly turned stormy and cold mornings followed by hot afternoons. We recommend wearing layers so that you can change your outfit as quickly as the Montana weather. For hiking, it is best to wear comfortable clothing made of breathable, moisture-wicking material.  

Of course, don’t forget weather essentials like sunglasses , a wide-brimmed travel hat , some sunscreen , a packable raincoat plus the Perfect Day Bag to pack them all in!

Travel Camera and Binoculars

It is best to capture the beauty of GNP with a good camera that has a zoom lens. We use a Canon Rebel with an everyday 18-135mm lens , which we actually thought was a slightly lacking for this trip. Instead, we wished we would have brought along our zoom 55-250mm lens so that we could have taken better photos of wildlife.

Binoculars are another thing we regret not having! We would have been able to better see mountain goats, big horn sheep and bears if we would have brought binoculars along on our trip.

Final Glacier National Park Travel Tips

By now, you are well on your way to planning your best itinerary for Glacier National Park! Whether it’s your first time to Glacier National Park or your tenth, this advice is essential. 

Plan Ahead… Way Ahead

When planning a trip to GNP – even just a quick 3 Days Glacier National Park trip – you need to plan ahead. 

For Glacier Park vacations, it’s best to book lodging (especially inside the park) at least a year in advance. Start looking at flights and car rentals – and get them booked – about 8 months before your trip. When you are 6 months out from your trip, take a look at the park website for extra ticket requirements – and set a reminder for when those tickets will be available so that you don’t miss out!

Stay Up To Date on GNP Info

After you have planned your itinerary for Glacier National Park, it is important to stay up to date with the latest information. From the time that you plan your Glacier Itinerary to actually experiencing 3 days in Glacier National Park a lot can change!

It’s not enough to show up with a simple Glacier National Park Map when visiting – you need to have the current status of the roads, trails and weather. 

The official website is a good place to start – as is the National Park Service App (NPS App). However, be prepared for sudden road or parking lot closures due to overcrowding or bears. Also, always inquire and share information with the park rangers!

Visitors can also sign up for Glacier National Park text notifications.

• Text GNPROADS to 333111 for road closures.
• Text GNPTRAILS to 333111 for trail status – including postings and closures. 
• Text GNPCGS to 333111 for campground availability.

Organize your 3 Day Glacier National Park Itinerary Details

Needless to say, staying organized is imperative when planning a Glacier trip itinerary! In addition to your daily sightseeing and hiking plans – and back up plans, if those fall through due to crowds, weather or closures – you also need to keep track of hotel reservations, car rental and ticketed activities. 

We recommend using a travel planner for all the details your trip. Our Printable Travel Planner has 26 pages of travel planning organization…and you can get started right away! 

More Travel Guides for your Glacier Park Vacation and Montana Adventures

In addition to this Glacier National Park travel blog post, we have also created articles that can help you plan your 3 days at Glacier National Park and the whole region. 

• Our Top Glacier National Park Hiking Tips for Easy to Moderate Hikes
• Things To Do in Whitefish, Montana
• What To Do in Kalispell, MT
• Day Trip to Missoula, MT
• Planning the Ultimate Montana Road Trip

Start planning your trip to Montana ! Search for the lowest airfares , the best accommodations and fun things to do …then start packing !   Want more travel planning tips? Head over to our Travel Planning Page for more information and tips on traveling – and for country-specific information, take a look at our Travel Guides Page !

Looking for More of the Great Outdoors in the USA?

Hit the trails with our detailed guides to Hiking in Oregon , up the Best Peaks of Phoenix , and all around the State of Ohio (including Hocking Hills , Mohican State Park and Columbus Metro Parks ).

How about a road trip? Yes, we’ve got you covered there as well with our insider tips for California Highway 1 , Columbia River Gorge  and the Complete Coast Of Oregon !

Find all of our tips on USA Travel on our dedicated United States Travel Page !

Pin it! See all of our travel pins on our JetSetting Fools Pinterest Board .

Share This Story!

• Click to share on Pinterest (Opens in new window)
• Click to share on Facebook (Opens in new window)
• Click to share on Twitter (Opens in new window)
• Click to share on LinkedIn (Opens in new window)

A Local’s Glacier National Park Itinerary: 1 to 7 Perfect Days in 2024

This guide contains affiliate links to trusted partners.

Let me help you put together your Glacier National Park itinerary!

Whether you are looking to spend several days in the park or just a weekend, there are some stops you want to make the time to see when you’re headed to Glacier, which is why I put together this Glacier National Park itinerary !

After growing up there, I found a few spots that I highly recommend—and a few I think can be skipped. Having an itinerary can help you to make the most of your time there while also giving you an opportunity to enjoy the magnificent nature in the area.

This itinerary for Glacier National Park covers one day to one week , which should be plenty of time to enjoy the park. If you only have three days or less, I’ve front loaded this Glacier National Park itinerary so you can see the most popular spots first. (If you can, stay longer so you can check out some of Glacier’s hidden gems!)

Use my Glacier National Park itinerary to plan up to a week!

Itinerary suggestions

• 2 days: perfect for a weekend visit with short hikes
• 3 days: ideal for hikers or those looking to add a tour
• 7 days: perfect for those who want to see almost everything and the surrounding area

Quick tip: Don’t forget to have some time out of the park to explore the Flathead Valley–there’s a lot to see there too!

How many days do I need in Glacier National Park?

The time you’d like to spend at the park is totally up to you and what you enjoy . I’ve known locals who make it a weekend ritual in the summer and can’t get enough of the place! That being said, you can still take in most of the sights in just one day if that’s what works best for you.

When putting together your Glacier National Park itinerary, I’d suggest planning for at least three days . But hey, if you have up to seven days, you’ll have ample time to see all the main attractions and take part in a bunch of fun hiking adventures!

Glacier National Park itinerary: the perfect 3 days

This itinerary covers if you have 1 to 3 days available , but I will be covering more options of things to do later in this article. This Glacier National Park itinerary is built on the premise that you are staying on the west side of the park. It can be completed in reverse if you are staying on the east side.

Day 1: Apgar Village, Lake McDonald, and the Trail of the Cedars

Today is a quiet day exploring the western side of the park. Immediately after the entrance, you will enter Apgar Village . Take some time to wander the grounds, check out the visitor’s center, or visit the shores of the lake. There is also some delicious ice cream here worth tasting too.

After that, head down the shore of Lake McDonald until you reach the lodge. Built in 1914, it’s the perfect place to relax with a picnic lunch and enjoy the gorgeous views. If you would like, you can also take a boat ride from the nearby dock—the tours are informative and you might even spot some wildlife heading down to the water for a drink–I highly recommend it for your Glacier National Park itinerary!

For those looking for a little extra to end their day, head over to the Trail of the Cedars . Much of the trail is on a boardwalk, so tourists of all ages can experience the running rivers and smell of the large trees.

If you want to take on a slightly more difficult hike, consider the Avalanche Lake Trail . It connects from Trail of the Cedars, so all you have to do is just keep hiking in order to reach it.

Need help planning your national park trip?

I offer custom national park itinerary planning as a service to help you make the most of your adventures! These itineraries cover everything from where to stay, eat, what to do, and more!

⭐ CHECK OUT CUSTOM NATIONAL PARK ITINERARY PACKAGES HERE ⭐

Day 2: Going-to-the-Sun, Logan Pass, and hiking

For those who want to check out the best hikes in Glacier National Park , some of the most famous and beautiful hikes are located at Logan Pass . You need to take Going-to-the-Sun Road in order to get there, so it’s worth it to get up pretty early in order to get both in. Parking spaces fill up fast—skip the extra 30 minutes of sleep so you can be up there at 7:00 am sharp.

Going-to-the-Sun is an impressive feat of engineering , and you will have to take it slow because of the steep drop. There are several stops along the way that include openings to short trails and springs worth checking out if you have the time.

Once you reach Logan Pass , you have the option to hike a number of different trails . For day hikes, I recommend Hidden Lake and the Highline Trail . They offer beautiful views and will get you back to your campsite by dinner. Of course, for those who want a more extensive hike, you will have to plan accordingly and make sure you have a backcountry permit if necessary.

Day 3: Whitewater rafting, fly fishing, or horseback riding

Take a break from hiking today (aren’t you relieved?) and head out on some other adventurous activities instead . Almost all tours depart from West Glacier, so keep that in mind when you’re booking your trip or move this day to another one if you plan on camping in the park. Glacier National Park rafting is definitely something you should check out.

The area has a number of different whitewater rafting companies –all are reputable and known for doing a good job of taking care of their customers on some pretty crazy rapids. I recommend this tour here . They’ve been around for several years and also offer additional tours that include fly fishing . (You can’t beat the rivers here!)

Glacier is also known for its horseback riding trails , which can be a fun activity if you have some kids or you are tired of walking. Horses were used before cars to transport people and items throughout the park and it’s fun to step back in time with a ride.

Another reason to book horseback riding is that you can start the trail at a number of different spots–not just at Apgar! It’s also quite affordable at around $45 for a day. Here’s some more information if horseback riding appeals to you.

Extended Glacier National Park itinerary

If you have some extra time , you’re going to want to make sure to add these things to do in Glacier to your itinerary! You’re extra lucky that you have the time to explore some of the less-visited parts of the park. These activities are located on the east side of the park, so keep that in mind when planning!

Day 4: Grinnell Glacier Trail, Lake Josephine, Many Glacier Hotel

It’s back to the trail for the memorable Grinnell Glacier hike . Named after the man who was an integral part of establishing the park, you get the chance to touch glacier ice today. Be warned–this hike is not for the faint of heart, and those who don’t want to push themselves too hard should opt for one of the other best hikes in Glacier National Park .

It’s about seven miles round trip, and make sure to bring your bear spray since this is a spot heavily populated by momma grizzlies and babies in the summer.

After your hike, relax in the cold waters of Lake Josephine , located close to the trailhead for Grinnell. This is a great opportunity to take a boat ride if you haven’t on Lake McDonald, and if you are staying at the Swiftcurrent Inn it makes for an easy day. If you are staying on the west side of the park, you’ll want to get up super early for this hike so you can get back decently for the evening.

To finish the day, head to the Many Glacier Hotel and grab some lunch or a snack. This historic hotel is a must-see for those looking to enjoy a quick bite before heading off on your next hike.

Day 5: St. Mary, Goat Haunt, and hiking

The east side of the park is a hiker’s paradise, and it’s often where multi-day hikes begin on your Glacier National Park itinerary. However, if you are only in the park for three days, it’s still worth visiting. First, make a stop at Lake St. Mary —site of numerous movie shoots and some of the clearest water in the United States. You can take a boat cruise here or just enjoy the cool water on your feet.

Many head to Goat Haunt as their introduction to Waterton National Park, but you don’t have to head across the border if you don’t want to. It’s also the site of a great day hike if you are willing to strap on your hiking boots again.

This is another location is where backpackers start their journeys into the wilderness for a few days, but you can also walk to a few waterfalls and turn back if you don’t want it to be a multi-day affair–definitely something to keep in mind when you’re on a Montana road trip .

Day 6: Iceberg Lake hike or quiet day

Another day, another hike. For those looking for the ultimate Instagram picture, Iceberg Lake is the ideal hike for you. However, it’s not easy and might be the most difficult on this Glacier National Park itinerary. Plan to spend the whole day on this hike and bring a decent-sized lunch and enough water to last you throughout the day.

You’ll hike through nine miles of amazing scenery and have the chance to spot bears (again, bring your spray!), moose, deer, and mountain goats. You will gain some elevation during the latter part of the hike, so make sure you’re physically prepared to handle it.

If you would like a quieter day, consider a shorter hike like Twin Falls or Baring Falls . Both start in the Two Medicine area of the park and lead you to some great Glacier National Park waterfalls.

Day 7: North Fork Area and Polebridge Mercantile

Venture into the North Fork area and Polebridge of Glacier National Park for a serene and off-the-beaten-path experience. This lesser-known region offers a unique blend of picturesque landscapes, delightful encounters with wildlife, and a taste of local charm.

If you’re up for a bit of adventure, consider taking a hike to one of the nearby hidden gems like Bowman Lake or Kintla Lake . These trails offer stunning views and a chance to spot wildlife such as bears, moose, and deer in their natural habitat.

While the hikes in the North Fork area might be less strenuous compared to some other parts of the park, it’s still important to be prepared with adequate supplies and a keen sense of adventure.

A visit to the Polebridge Mercantile wouldn’t be complete without indulging in their legendary bear claw pastries. These delightful treats are the perfect reward after a day of exploring the North Fork area of Glacier National Park.

Each bear claw is meticulously crafted with layers of flaky, buttery pastry dough, enveloping a scrumptious filling made from local ingredients. Take a bite, and you’ll instantly understand why these pastries have become a must-try staple for visitors and locals alike.

Quick tip: Get there early since the bear claws are often sold out by afternoon!

Information on Glacier National Park reservations

Glacier National Park requires reservations for the 2024 season. To find out more, head to my guide on  Glacier National Park reservations  so you know how to get them and you’re prepared before you go!

For the year 2024, visitors must reserve a vehicle for three specific areas of Glacier National Park, namely Going-to-the-Sun Road, the North Fork, and Many Glacier.

It is important to note that each location has distinct particulars that necessitate a separate reservation. Check out my guide on Glacier National Park reservations in order to find out more.

Join the community! Love the outdoors? Join my free Facebook community where we chat and share information about national parks, hiking, outdoor activities, and more! JOIN HERE!

Best restaurants near Glacier National Park

There isn’t a ton of amazing dining within the park itself, but there are some West Glacier restaurants that serve up some good dishes. If you are planning on staying within the park, consider the chalets and lodges as your main places for food. These Glacier National Park restaurants are located right near or in the park itself.

Freda’s

190 Going-to-the-Sun Rd

+1 406-888-5359

This is one of the few restaurants within the park worth checking out . You have very basic dishes here, but it serves as a good way to eat up before your hike. It’s also a good spot for families and those looking for some huckleberry-flavored goodies.

Belton Grill

+1 406-888-5000

Hidden away from the main drag is the Belton Chalet, where you can find some fine dining right outside the park . This historic lodge (built in 1910) was one of the first structures to house tourists traveling on the Great Northern Railway. Now, it has a restaurant created to honor that past. I recommend sneaking this spot into your Glacier National Park itinerary if you can!

Can’t-miss things to do in Glacier National Park

There’s so much to do in the area, and it’s hard to narrow down the best things to do in Glacier National Park to just five! However, there are some certain areas that I think you must visit while you are there. This itinerary covers all of these, but if you do choose to skip one or two days, make sure to see these spots for sure! Whether you are looking for 3 days in Glacier National Park or more, you don’t want to miss these.

Going-to-the-Sun Road

This is Montana’s most famous road , and for good reason. Make sure that if you are planning to see Going-to-the-Sun Road that you’re comfortable driving in tight areas, and I recommend folding your side mirrors in just in case. Take it slow and enjoy the stunning views on the side. You might also see some bears if you’re really on the lookout.

Lake McDonald

I have a soft spot for Lake McDonald since I was married there, but it’s also one of the clearest lakes in the country . I recommend taking a boat tour from the Lake McDonald Lodge if you can (they run several times a day) or braving the water and taking a swim. Watch out! It’s cold!

You’ll reach Logan Pass as you go up Going-to-the-Sun. It’s also where you will want to s tart most of your hikes . Be sure to get up super early in order to get a parking spot, or consider taking the shuttle system. It can get really popular there later in the day, so if you want to make sure you have a spot without waiting for hours, then you’ll want to arrive as early as you can.

Avalanche Lake Trail

If you’re going to go on any hike while on your Glacier National Park itinerary, then make sure to take the time for the Avalanche Lake Trail . It’s not a super hard hike and the views offered are an amazing reward. Again, just make sure you arrive early in the morning since it gets crowded quickly during the day.

You can start the hike at the Trail of the Cedars , which is a great introduction to all that Glacier National Park has to offer and is great for those with kids or those with accessibility concerns. You also get to see one of the most beautiful lakes in Montana !

Highline Trail Hike

While there are so many hikes in Glacier, knowing which ones to choose from can be tough. If you’re looking for something that is a bit easier, I recommend the Highline Trail since it offers some incredible views without being taxing . If you are afraid of heights, then it might not be the best option, since you will be near a cliff’s edge for the first part of the hike.

Quick tips for visiting Glacier National Park

Here are some tips I’ve found helpful living near Glacier National Park.

• Pack layers and be prepared for changing weather: Glacier National Park’s weather can be unpredictable, so make sure to bring clothing that can be easily layered. This way, you’ll stay comfortable whether it’s sunny, rainy, or chilly!
• Plan your hikes ahead of time: The park offers a variety of stunning trails for hikers of all levels. Do some research before your trip to identify the best hikes for your fitness level and interests, and remember to always carry a map and check trail conditions.
• Respect wildlife and keep your distance: You might encounter some of Glacier National Park’s incredible wildlife during your visit. Remember to observe them from a safe distance, never feed them, and always follow park guidelines to ensure a safe and enjoyable experience for both you and the animals.
• Visit popular spots during off-peak hours: Some attractions, like Logan Pass and Going-to-the-Sun Road, can get quite crowded during peak hours. Consider visiting these popular spots early in the morning or later in the afternoon to avoid the rush and enjoy a more peaceful experience.
• Take advantage of ranger-led programs: Park rangers offer a variety of educational programs and guided walks throughout the summer months. Be sure to check out the schedule and participate in these activities to learn more about the park’s history, geology, and wildlife – it’s both fun and informative!

Glacier National Park itinerary: FAQs

Here are some common questions I get from readers when they are planning their Glacier National Park trip.

How much does it cost to enter Glacier National Park?

The Glacier National Park entrance fee is $35 per car in the summer , but I recommend buying the Annual National Parks Pass for $80. It allows you entry to all of the national parks in the United States for that price for a year.

I more than got my money’s worth when we were road-tripping through Glacier and Yellowstone. You can get the Glacier National Park to pass which allows you to enter as many times as you would like that year for $70.

You’ll also want to factor in food and gas. Montana has no sales tax, so that’s one expense you don’t have to worry about when planning your Glacier National Park itinerary!

How long does it take to drive through Glacier National Park?

Glacier is over a million acres, meaning it you can take as long of time as you want to explore driving from one end of the park to the other. However, if you are planning on going from East Glacier to West Glacier (or visa versa) and you’re curious to know how long does it take to drive through Glacier National Park then expect it to be at least two hours without any traffic.

This will change during the busy summer months, so be prepared for it to take a little longer when you’re on the Going-to-the-Sun Road.

How do you avoid crowds in Glacier National Park?

While there is no way to entirely avoid the crowds in Glacier National Park, there are a few things you can do to make your trip a little less chaotic. Choosing to stay close to the park allows you to get up earlier in the morning and get a parking spot before some of the other tourists trickle in. Also, choosing to head to the park during quieter times like late June and early September can also help.

Finally, if you want to avoid some of the parking problems, then using the shuttle system can help you to enjoy the scenery a bit more and get you to the places you want to visit.

Conclusion: perfect Glacier National Park itinerary

In conclusion, Glacier National Park is truly a remarkable destination that offers something for everyone–from awe-inspiring vistas and thrilling hikes to serene moments in nature and unforgettable wildlife encounters.

As someone who lived near Glacier growing up, this itinerary should give you a chance to see almost everything in the park without pushing yourself too hard.

What would you add any of this to your Glacier National Park itinerary? Let me know in the comments!

National Park essentials

You’ll need to enter: National parks pass 🎟️

Document your trip: National parks journal ✏️ 

Wear your national parks love: National parks shirts 👕

Alex is the founder of Alex on the Map, a site devoted to national park guides, hiking, climbing, and enjoying your outdoor adventures. After growing up near Glacier National Park in Montana, Alex now spends summers in the American West hitting up the trail with her husband and dog.

Her work has been featured in Fodor's, the Huffington Post, Bustle, and many more. She has also been featured in publications such as The Washington Post, CNN, and USA Today.

Similar Posts

15 Glacier National Park Tours You Need to Book for Your Trip in 2023

This guide contains affiliate links to trusted partners. Looking to book your Glacier National tours for your trip to Montana? There are plenty of reasons to consider Glacier National Park tours for your trip to Northwest Montana. Not only does this allow you to experience the park with a unique viewpoint, but you also don’t…

Montana National Parks: 8 Incredible Parks You Can’t Miss (2023)

This guide contains affiliate links to trusted partners. Don’t miss these Montana national parks on your trip! Montana has some amazing national parks–from some of the big ones like Glacier National Park or Yellowstone National Park to some of the lesser-known national monuments and trails. If you’re headed out on a Montana road trip, then…

16 Amazing Hotels in Missoula, MT You Have to Check Out

Having been born in Missoula, I’ve seen it grow from a fairly small town to a surprisingly urban center in Montana. I highly recommend treating yourself to a stay in one of the hotels in Missoula, MT, to experience the scenic hilltops, water activities on the rapids, the tranquil waterfront, and bustling downtown district. A…

The Ultimate Guide to Kootenai National Forest

Montana has some pretty amazing wilderness, and national forests available are some of the best! Kootenai National Forest is exceptionally beautiful and offers plenty of hiking trails and camping for your outdoor adventure. You’ll find pretty much everything–lakes, rivers, and so much more in this stunning national forest in the northwest corner of the state….

20 Amazing Waterfalls in Montana You Can’t Miss

There are so many beautiful things to see in Montana, and I’m always looking to chase waterfalls when I go home to visit my family and explore Glacier National Park. These waterfalls in Montana should not be missed, and you’ll find many of them on easy trails in Glacier when you go. Waterfalls in Montana…

The Ultimate Guide to Wayfarers State Park

Wayfarers State Park was one of my favorite spots to visit when I was a teenager and had just gotten my license. There’s a bunch to see near Bigfork like Jewel Basin, Swan Lake, and the town itself. However, if you want to spend an afternoon in a kayak or resting near the water, Wayfarers…

Leave a Reply Cancel reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

Save my name, email, and website in this browser for the next time I comment.

One Day In Glacier National Park: The Perfect Itinerary (2024)

If you are lucky enough to get to plan a Glacier National Park itinerary but only have one day to explore, you might feel a little overwhelmed because of all the options of things to see and do.

What are the best hikes?

Is Going-To-The-Sun Road really worth it?

Should I even bother if I only have one day?

I’m going to be honest: one day is definitely not enough time to fully appreciate such an amazing park, but it is 100% worth it if that’s all the time you have. Glacier has some of the most breathtaking views I have ever seen, and I’ve been dreaming of going back ever since that one amazing day.

When we originally planned our Glacier itinerary, we were supposed to have several days there and then head up north into Canada to Jasper, Banff, and the surrounding areas.

But then 2020 happened and we could no longer cross the border. So we rerouted our itinerary and ended up going south instead to Yellowstone , Grand Tetons , and the Sawtooth Mountains in Idaho .

Unfortunately, that left us with only one day available to explore Glacier, and even though it wasn’t a lot of time, I’m so glad we didn’t skip it. It’s one of the most beautiful places I’ve ever seen!

Planning your trip? Use our favorite resources!

For accommodations –   Hotels.com  |  Expedia  |  VRBO ​ For car rentals –   Discover Cars ​ For tours & excursions –   Viator ​ For cheap flights – FareDrop ​ For travel insurance –   Safety Wing

So if you find yourself in a similar situation or you’re passing through and short on time, don’t worry: you can still see a lot of the highlights in a one day Glacier National Park trip. So let’s dive in!

One Day Glacier National Park Itinerary

If this is your first time visiting Glacier National Park and you want to make the most of your day, here’s the perfect itinerary to help you see the best things in the park.

NOTE: This Glacier National Park itinerary is based on a summer visit when most parts of the park will be open. If you plan to visit during the winter season, check the National Park Service website to see the status of road and visitor center closures.

Wake up early! The earlier the better

When we were visiting Glacier National Park, we met up with some friends of ours who live in their RV full-time, so we stayed at an RV park near Flathead Lake. We were over an hour away from the park entrance which meant an extra early start for us.

But no matter where you are staying, get into the park early , especially if you are visiting in the summer months – it can get very crowded, and some of the parking lots will fill up very fast.

In order to hit all the things on this Glacier National Park itinerary, I’d recommend getting into the park no later than 8:00 am , and ideally earlier if you can manage. You’ve only got one day after all, make the most of it!

• Drive Going-To-The-Sun Road

2024 Update: From May 24 – September 8, parts of Glacier National Park require a vehicle reservation, including the west side of Going-to-the-Sun Road. Visit the Glacier NPS website for details and the most up-to-date information on the vehicle reservation system.

If you can only do one thing in Glacier, drive Going-To-The-Sun Road. This 50-mile road will show you the best places in the park and the most gorgeous scenery in the shortest amount of time.

It seemed that every tunnel, twist, and turn in the road revealed even more spectacular views than the last. You are definitely going to want to take your time and soak in as much as you can.

Some tips for driving Going-To-The-Sun Road:

– Get gas before taking the drive! The only fuel stations are located at the entrances to the park. To avoid the stress of wondering if you’ll make it to the station to fill up, make sure you top off the tank the night before or first thing in the morning, whatever works best for you.

– Drive slow! The speed limit throughout the drive is 45mph, but many people will be driving slower than that. I don’t blame them, I couldn’t get enough! Just take your time, be patient, and enjoy the drive.

– Watch out for other vehicles and pedestrians. Cars will be constantly pulling over and then merging back into traffic. People will also probably be crossing the road to get better pictures, so just be alert at all times.

– Because of the narrow, steep nature of the road and the multiple tunnels, there are restrictions to the height, width, and length of vehicles allowed on the road. As a general rule, leave any pull-behind trailers, campers, or RVs behind. Any standard car, truck, or SUV will be just fine. You can check out the specific vehicle restrictions and general info for Going To The Sun Road here.

The road has two entrances: the West entrance off of US Highway 2 and the St. Mary entrance off of US Highway 89. Since we stayed south of the park, we started at the West Glacier entrance, but if you are staying north or east, you could start at the other end by the St. Mary Visitor Center and reverse this itinerary.

NOTE: When we were there, the road was only open from West Glacier to Rising Sun and then you had to turn around – you could not get in from the St Mary side because of closures. The road also closes in the winter and occasionally for road work and weather. Make sure you check before you go for any possible closures. You can check current Going-To-The-Sun Road closures here.

Take A Hike

No Glacier National Park itinerary is complete without doing at least one hiking trail! Lucky for you, there are plenty of hikes to choose from regardless of your fitness level and time frame. Even if you don’t really like to hike or if you have little kids, there are a couple of short hikes that are quick, easy, and suitable for everyone!

Most of the popular trails are right along Going-To-The-Sun Road, so you can drive the road until you get to your preferred hike and then continue the drive afterward.

This is where getting into the park early is really going to come into play. The parking lots for most of the hiking areas will fill up fast, so make sure you know where you want to go before leaving and head directly there.

I highly recommend the Trail of the Cedars , and then if you want a little something more, continue on to Avalanche Lake.

The Trail of the Cedars is an easy, accessible 1-mile hike that takes you through some beautiful trees to the stunning Avalanche Gorge .

From there, you can choose to continue the loop back to the parking lot or turn off and follow the trail to Avalanche Lake . This is a moderate trail that comes out to about 6.7 miles round trip, including the Trail of the Cedars loop.

Get all the details on Trail of the Cedars and Avalanche Lake here.

We got to the car lot for this trail sometime around 9:00 am and there was only one parking spot left! We definitely got lucky. This is a popular hike but SO worth it!

Being flexible and patient is going to be important here. If the hike you want to do has a full parking lot and you don’t want to wait around for an empty spot (and I don’t blame you if you don’t – your time is precious!) or is closed for bear activity or trail work, then you may want to have a second and third option picked out just in case. Don’t let something like that ruin your visit – have a backup plan and enjoy the experience, no matter what happens!

While Avalanche Lake was the only designated hike we got to do, there were quite a few on my list to try. Here are some other highly recommended ones:

Highline Trail (this will be the first hike I do on my next trip!) Hidden Lake Overlook (one of the most popular) St Mary/Virginia Falls (a great option if you want to see some waterfalls) Grinnell Glacier Trail (a difficult and long trail but one of the top-rated)

To see all the route options in Glacier, check out AllTrails, my go-to site for hiking trails.

And just like any time you are out in nature, don’t forget to practice the Leave No Trace principles .

Pack a Lunch and Have A Picnic

After our hike it was soon lunchtime, so we continued to drive the Going-To-The-Sun Road for a bit, enjoying more of the scenery, until we found a nice pull-off to have lunch.

I 100% recommend you pack a lunch for your day in Glacier. Not only will it save you from having to leave the park to get food and therefore waste the precious time you have there, but you can eat your lunch with a million-dollar view.

There are plenty of places outside the park where you can pick up groceries for your day in Glacier. Some of them include Walmart and Albertson’s in Kalispell, Super 1 Foods in Whitefish, Smith’s Food and Drug in Columbia Falls, and Canyon Foods Supermarket in Hungry Horse. So do yourself a favor: pack your lunch and have a picnic with one of the best views.

Speaking of spectacular views…

Stop and Enjoy the Scenery

I touched on this earlier, but while you are driving around, you will come across so much beauty that you will want to stop at every single pull-off and take pictures of everything.

Obviously, if you did that, you would have time for almost nothing else.

So what I recommend is to make minimal stops on your drive out to St Mary and make note of some of the places you would like to stop on the way back. This way you can see how long it takes you to drive the whole road, see how you are doing on time, and prioritize what you want to see on the way back.

Another option is to only stop at pull-outs that are on the same side of the road as you are. This will also make it easier to get back out on the road when you are finished, as during the busy summer months traffic can get a little crazy and it might take you a while if you have to cross both lanes of traffic to get back on the road.

Some of the popular areas to stop are Logan Pass Visitor Center (the highest point on the road), Jackson Glacier Overlook , Sunrift Gorge , and Wild Goose Island Lookout .

Dip Your Toes in the Glacial Lakes

Glacier National Park got its name for a reason – there are currently 26 glaciers in the park, and many of the lakes in the park were created from melted glaciers and glacial runoffs. So needless to say, those lakes are COLD.

If you want to check out a less-populated area of the park and cool off in the frigid water, here’s a great spot:

At Wild Goose Island Lookout, take the trail down to Saint Mary Lake . We didn’t even know there was a trail at first, so you might have to poke around, but if you start making your way toward the lake you’ll see a trail. Keep following it down until you get to the rock beach.

There were only a handful of people there and the beach was large enough that we could spread out and have some privacy.

It was the perfect little break to just sit down, relax, and feel the icy cold glacial lake water. Plus the view was pretty spectacular too.

If you’re brave enough, you could go for a swim.

Our friend Kyle jumped in but the rest of us were too chicken. It was some of the coldest water I’ve ever felt! I did put my feet in but I could only stand it for a few minutes.

You could eat your lunch or a snack here if you wanted as well.

Paddleboard/kayak/take a boat on McDonald Lake

After spending some time relaxing by Saint Mary Lake, we got back in the truck and turned around to go back the way we came on Going-To-The-Sun Road. We made a couple more stops for some pictures and then decided to end our day at McDonald Lake.

McDonald Lake is the largest lake in Glacier National Park. It is also the most popular lake for water sports like kayaking and paddleboarding. You can also check out the Apgar Village Visitor Center there if you’re interested in chatting with the park rangers or finding out additional information.

Kyle and Renee have paddleboards, so we pumped them up and took them out for a quick paddle. This was the first time I had ever been on one before so I was a bit nervous, but I picked it up pretty quickly and had a lot of fun!

This was a great way to end our one-day Glacier National Park itinerary. If you are into water sports, you could rent a kayak or paddleboard and spend some time exploring the lake before dinnertime. You can also swim, take a boat tour, or just sit and relax, maybe even eat your dinner at one of the picnic tables if you packed it along.

There are also some places nearby where you can grab a bite to eat, so you could always eat first and then come back to the lake around sunset. I bet the views would be amazing!

• Go stargazing

If you aren’t too tired and the sky is clear, you definitely need to spend some time gazing at the night sky! This is something we didn’t get the chance to do but is on the list for next time.

Glacier National Park is a designated dark sky park, which means not only is the sky so clear and dark that you can see so many stars, you can also see the Milky Way with your own eyes!

There are plenty of places you can go to look at the sky – any of the visitor centers would be a good choice, or even Lake McDonald if you don’t want to venture too far into the park.

Just remember that in the summer, the sky doesn’t get completely dark until pretty late, so keep that in mind when planning out your day.

So, to summarize the perfect one-day Glacier National Park itinerary:

• Wake up early and aim to be in the park no later than 8am
• Take a hike (I recommend Trail of the Cedars and Avalanche Lake)
• Pack a lunch and have a picnic with a view
• Stop and enjoy the scenery
• Dip your toes in glacial water
• Spend some time in or on the water at Lake McDonald

Quick Facts about Glacier National Park

• Glacier became the 10th national park on May 11, 1910.
• The park is over 1500 square miles and has over 760 lakes, almost 750 miles of trails, and 26 glaciers (all of which are sadly shrinking every year).
• As incredible as Glacier is, it barely cracks the top 10 most visited national parks. In 2022, there were over 2.9 million visitors, compared to the most visited, Great Smoky Mountains, which attracted 12.94 million people.

When is Glacier National Park open?

Glacier National Park is open all year round, 24 hours a day. However, parts of the park are only open seasonally, such as most of Going-To-The-Sun Road and the visitor centers, but there are things to do in the park all seasons. Check out the Glacier NPS website for more details.

In general, the popular attractions and visitor centers are open from mid-June to late October, but this all depends on the weather and when the snow comes. You can check current park conditions and road closures here .

How much does it cost to enter Glacier National Park?

A 7-day park permit costs $35 per vehicle in the high season and $25 from November 1 to April 30. If you are on a motorcycle, it’s $30 for the high season and $20 during winter.

If you have an America the Beautiful pass, entry is free. I highly recommend getting this pass if you plan to visit more than one national park in a year – it will save you money. A one-year pass costs $80.

A Glacier National Park annual pass is $70, but this would only be worth it if you are going to be visiting the park for longer than a week and you aren’t planning to go to any other national parks within the year.

There are also several days throughout the year when entering any national park is free! Check out the list of free National Park days here.

Best Time To Visit Glacier National Park

Glacier is open all year round and there are neat things to do during all seasons, but there are certain things that are closed during the snow/winter months.

Parts of Going-To-The-Sun Road are closed much of the year, and the whole road is only fully open to motorists between mid- to late June until late October, although this does change every year based on snowfall ( check the Glacier road status page for up-to-date information ).

Visitor centers are also only open seasonally, typically between May and October, and there tends to be limited accommodation and restaurant options in the off-season.

But don’t let that discourage you from coming! Even if you do find yourself here when parts of the park are closed, there is still lots to do. Plenty of hiking and biking trails are accessible all year, and backcountry camping is allowed all seasons too. Fishing, boating, and rafting are also popular.

In the winter, cross-country skiing and snowshoeing are great activities, and there are plenty of trails for any skill level.

So no matter when you come, there are lots of great activity options for you!

With all that being said, if you want the best chance of avoiding the crowds and still having everything open, early to mid-September is going to be the perfect time of year to go.

Check the weather and seasons in Glacier National Park here.

How To Get To Glacier National Park

If you are flying to Glacier National Park, the closest airport is Glacier Park International Airport. There are lots of cities with direct flights, including Salt Lake City, Minneapolis/St Paul, Chicago, New York, Atlanta, Los Angeles, and more!

If you are driving, here are the driving times from some of the closest larger cities:

Spokane, Washington: 4.5 hours Missoula, Montana: 2.5 hours Helena, Montana: 3.5 hours Boise, Idaho: 10 hours Boseman, Montana: 5.5 hours Billings, Montana: 6.5 hours Cody, Wyoming: 8.5 hours

You can also take Amtrak to get to Glacier via the Empire Builder train which travels the Chicago-St. Paul/Minneapolis-Spokane-Portland/Seattle route. If you plan to rent a car while you are here, your best bet is taking the train to Whitefish, Montana, and picking up a car there. If you plan to take tours or shuttles, you can get off at West Glacier.

related: what is the most comfortable car to rent?

I highly recommend using  Discover Cars to find your rental car. They search all the rental companies for the best price, and if your plans change, you always get free cancellation.

How To Get Around Glacier National Park

Having your own vehicle to get around the park is going to be the best option, but there are a couple of other choices if you don’t.

You can take the park’s shuttle service to explore the Going-To-The-Sun Road. This operates July 1 through Labor Day weekend (as long as the road is cleared of snow). The schedule is between 8:00 am and 7:00 pm.

More information on the Glacier shuttle system can be found on the NPS website.

You can also take a guided tour through the park. There are currently two companies that offer this option, Glacier Sun Tours and the Red Bus tour.

How many days do you need in Glacier National Park?

The short answer: as many days as you can!

While our Glacier National Park itinerary was only for one day, if you can swing it, you should definitely visit for longer. If you want to hit the main sites and throw in a couple of shorter hikes, 2-3 days would be enough. If you want to do some longer hikes, 4-5 days would be best. And if you want to see all the sections of the park, you should allocate at least a week for a great experience.

Glacier National Park is huge: even with a week, you’d never be able to experience all the area has to offer. So make sure you plan as many days as you can in order to see as much as you can!

What To Pack for your Glacier National Park Itinerary

In order to make the most of your Glacier National Park itinerary, here are some things you should not forget:

National Park Pass

If you have the National Park Pass , make sure you don’t forget it! They come with a rearview mirror holder so you can hang it up and not have to dig around for it when you enter the park.

This is a given, but you are going to be so amazed by all the beauty, you’ll be kicking yourself if you don’t have a good camera to capture all the beautiful landscapes.

A good phone camera would work well for most landscapes, but if you want to get some awesome wildlife pictures, you might want something with a zoom lens.

Is that a bear or just a tree stump? If you have binoculars, you won’t have to guess!

Hiking shoes & good socks

If you plan on doing any kind of hiking, I’d recommend hiking shoes or boots rather than sneakers. The socks you wear with your boots will also make a huge difference in how your feet feel. I like Cloudline wool socks, but there are lots of great brands out there.

The weather in Glacier can change rapidly, and even in the summer, temperatures can get chilly. Make sure you pack along a variety of clothing, including clothes you can layer. You might even want to consider bringing along a raincoat so a rainy day doesn’t ruin your visit.

More than likely, you’ll be out and about in the park all day and may not have quick access to a store. While the visitor centers do sell water, it will be much easier to just bring lots of water with you so you don’t have to worry about running out or changing your plan in order to go find some.

Hiking pack + the 10 essentials

While most of the trails in Glacier National Park are well-traveled and you’ll see people frequently, you still want to be prepared. Bring along a hiking backpack and keep it stocked with the 10 essentials for hiking and you’ll be set.

Sunglasses & sunscreen

Nothing can ruin a trip faster than sunburn, am I right? And since Glacier is located at a pretty high altitude, you want to make sure you protect your skin and your eyes from the sun.

The bugs can get pretty bad in the summer, so just be prepared and carry some with you.

If you plan to do any hiking, you should carry bear spray with you, keep it easily accessible, and know how to use it.

Optional: Hiking poles

While not a necessity, I thought I’d include this one since a lot of people find them useful. I tend to use hiking poles more when I’m backpacking than just day hiking, but some of the hikes in Glacier can be challenging and hiking poles might come in handy.

For a complete packing guide, check out What To Pack For A Road Trip: The Ultimate List For Every Kind of Adventure .

Places To Eat In Glacier National Park

We did not eat out when we were in Glacier, but some of the places that have received good reviews and that I would like to check out another time include Two Sisters Cafe outside St. Mary, Home Ranch Bottoms and Polebridge Mercantile and Bakery in the North Fork area, and Glacier Highland in West Glacier.

If you want to do what we did and cook your own meals, there are plenty of grocery stores in the areas around the park. Some of them include Walmart and Albertson’s in Kalispell, Super One Foods in Whitefish, Smith’s Food and Drug in Columbia Falls, and Canyon Foods Supermarket in Hungry Horse.

Places To Stay In Glacier National Park

We stayed in our friends’ RV on this trip so we didn’t book anything ourselves (and I can’t for the life of me remember the name of the RV park), but there are lots of hotels, RV, and camping options in the park itself, in Kalispell, East Glacier Park Village, and the surrounding area.

If you want to stay in the park, the options include Lake McDonald Lodge, Many Glacier Hotel, Granite Park Chalet, and several others.

No matter where you stay, make sure you plan ahead and book as soon as you can. Places can book up very quickly, especially in the summer .

If you’d like to stay outside of the park or would like to camp, here are the websites I use to find accommodations:

Recreation.gov – the site to book all camping, tours, passes, and more at federal recreation sites in the United States.

Hipcamp – the Airbnb of camping. They have everything from tent sites to glamping, RV parks, cabins, and more.

get $10 off your first hipcamp booking!

Airbnb & VRBO – these two sites are my preferred way to find places to stay when I’m not camping. Not only can it be cheaper than a hotel, but I love getting to know the locals, and you can’t beat the knowledge and recommendations from the people who live there!

Hotels.com – my preferred website for finding and booking hotels.

Are there bears in Glacier National Park?

Yes, there are both black bears and grizzly bears in Glacier, but don’t stress about it! If you plan to do some hiking, just make sure you hike with at least one other person and carry bear spray (and have it easily accessible and know how to use it). Pay attention to your surroundings, make plenty of noise, and you’ll be fine!

NOTE: You can’t fly with bear spray so I’d recommend purchasing it once you arrive if you are traveling by plane.

You should also give any other animals that you encounter plenty of space too. You could see anything from deer to mountain goats to bighorn sheep. Any wildlife can be unpredictable, and you want to keep yourself and the critters safe!

How To Avoid Crowds In Glacier National Park

Since Glacier National Park has a pretty small window of time when the main attractions are open, it is going to be difficult to avoid the masses. Everyone wants to experience this amazing place! But there are a few things you can do to avoid the crowds as much as possible.

Visit in June or September

The majority of visitors come to Glacier National Park between late June and August. If you try to plan your trip for mid-June or early to mid-September, you’ll avoid the worst of the crowds.

However, keep in mind that the Going-To-The-Sun Road only opens once the snow has been removed, which can sometimes take until mid- to late June, and the snow can start up again as early as September, so you’ll have to watch the Glacier NPS page to see the status of the roads.

That being said, if the roads are open, you’ll have a wonderful experience in the park with far fewer tourists to contend with.

Stay in or close to the park

If you want to plan a Glacier National Park itinerary without the swarms of people, your best option is to stay in the park or as close to the park as you can. This will allow you to be in the park before and after the majority of visitors and you’ll get an experience the rest won’t.

Arrive as early as possible

Related to the above tip, getting into Glacier National Park as early as you can will allow you to make sure you get the parking spaces you want for your hikes and experience more of the park without the line of cars. Besides, how cool would it be to catch the sunrise coming over the mountains?

Consider exploring less popular areas

While some might argue that there are no parts of Glacier National Park that aren’t touristy, there are certain areas that don’t have the masses that Going-To-The-Sun Road does.

Areas to the far west side of the park, like Bowman, North Fork area, and Kintla Lakes, or places to the north, like Waterton Park, are not as well known or popular and will more than likely have fewer people around. Pretty much any area away from Going-To-The-Sun Road is going to have a better chance of having more manageable crowds.

Places To visit Around Glacier National Park

While you could spend weeks exploring Glacier National Park, if you want to add another destination or two to your road trip , here are a few suggestions:

• Yellowstone National Park
• Grand Teton National Park
• Sawtooth Mountains, Idaho
• Waterton Lakes National Park, Canada
• Banff National Park, Canada
• Jasper National Park, Canada

If you have a full week, I’d suggest doing this Glacier, Yellowstone, and Grand Teton road trip itinerary.

Conclusion: One-Day Glacier National Park Itinerary

And there you have it! I hope this was helpful for you in planning your Glacier National Park itinerary.

If you want to see a more inside scoop of what our one-day trip was like, check out the video below from Happily Ever Hanks . They are good friends of ours and traveled with us on our 2-week trip to Glacier, Yellowstone, Grand Tetons, and the Sawtooth Mountains of Idaho.

Want to save this for later? Pin it!

Stefanie Henne is an experienced road trip travel blogger who specializes in helping others plan their dream vacation, no matter their budget or time restraints. Go here to read more about Stef's story. If you want to send Stef a message, visit her contact page here.

We value your privacy

Privacy overview.

The Perfect 7-Day Glacier National Park Itinerary

Article Summary: Glacier National Park Itinerary, 7 Day Glacier National Park Itinerary, Itinerary Glacier National Park

Planning a trip to Glacier National Park? This place is a stunning natural wonder that should not be missed. However, the park covers more than 1 million acres and offers over 700 miles of hiking trails, so figuring out what to see can be overwhelming.

This Glacier National Park itinerary has ideas on where to go, what you should see, and what you can’t miss. Here’s how you can spend one week in Glacier National Park.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you make a purchase, I may earn a small commission at no additional cost to you. For more information, view my privacy policy .

Table of Contents

Glacier National Park Overview: Things to Know Before You Visit

Reservations Are Required for Glacier National Park

Due to overcrowding, the park is now requiring timed entry reservations.

These are required for the west side of Going-to-the-Sun Road and North Fork from late May to early September. They’re also required for Many Glacier from early July to early September.

Book your reservations on Recreation.gov .

Best Time to Visit Glacier National Park

The summer months (June, July, and August) are the best time to visit Glacier National Park because of its beautiful scenery and warmer weather. At other times of the year, the park may be under a white blanket of snow.

The Going-to-the-Sun Road, the park’s main thorofare and one of the most scenic drives in the national parks, is generally open from mid-June to early October. This strongly depends on the snow level and varies from year to year.

In the summer months, visitors can also explore Glacier National Park by bike or boat.

In the winter, the park offers cross-country skiing and snowshoeing. While most of the park is inaccessible once Going-to-the-Sun Road closes, those prepared for winter recreation won’t be disappointed.

With most visitors planning their Glacier National Park itinerary for a summer visit, you should expect crowds. Between mid-June and early September, the park is at its busiest because most of it will be open. To avoid crowds, start your day as early as you can.

July and August are the most crowded months. If you want to avoid the crowds but also want to visit while the main attractions are accessible, I recommend visiting in late June or early September.

How to Get To Glacier National Park

Let’s start with the basics. Glacier National Park is located in northwest Montana on the Canadian border. Depending on your origin point, it may be easier to fly or drive. We’ll go over the essentials here, but you can find more details in our post on how to get to Glacier National Park .

Nearby Airports

The closest airport is Glacier Park International Airport in Kalispell, Montana. This small airport is the best to fly into if you’re visiting Glacier National Park as it’s only about 30 minutes away.

If you’re also visiting Yellowstone National Park or Grand Teton National Park , you may want to fly into Bozeman. It’s about halfway between the three parks.

Missoula, Great Falls, and Billings are a few more nearby airports with car rental services. These are great options if you’re hoping to explore some of the other national parks in Montana during your trip.

Nearby Train Stations

Did you know you can take the Amtrak to Glacier National Park? There are stations in both East Glacier and West Glacier (Essex).

While those are the closest stations, there are no transportation services between them and the park. I recommend riding the train to Whitefish and renting a car in order to reach the park.

Nearby Cities/Towns

Kalispell is the closest large town to the park. It offers full services, such as hotels, restaurants, and gas stations.

West Glacier is another town located near the park. It’s about five miles west of Lake McDonald Lodge and offers a few services, such as restaurants, lodging options at Apgar Village Campground & Cabins, and gas stations.

St. Mary and Browning are the closest towns to St. Mary and Many Glacier Entrances, respectively. They offer a few more services than West Glacier, including restaurants.

East Glacier and Browning are about 35 miles from the Two Medicine Valley Entrance.

Here are some distances from nearby cities and destinations to Glacier National Park:

• East Glacier : 15 minutes, 7 miles (to Two Medicine)
• Columbia Falls : 22 minutes, 18 miles (to Apgar)
• Whitefish : 30 minutes, 26 miles (to Apgar)
• Browning : 35 minutes, 28 miles (to St. Mary)
• Kalispell : 45 minutes, 35 miles (to Apgar)
• Bigfork : 45 minutes, 39 miles (to Apgar)
• Somers : 45 minutes, 43 miles (to Apgar)
• Missoula : 2.5 hours, 140 miles (to Apgar)
• Great Falls : 2.5 hours, 155 miles (to St. Mary)
• Bozeman : 5.5 hours, 315 miles (to Apgar)
• Billings : 6 hours, 375 miles (to St. Mary)
• Yellowstone National Park : 7 hours, 415 miles (Mammoth to Apgar)

Nearby Groceries

West Glacier : West Glacier Mercantile

Hungry Horse : Canyon Foods

Columbia Falls : Smith’s, Super 1 Foods

Kalispell : Walmart, Albertson’s, Super 1 Foods, Smith’s, or Natural Grocers

St. Mary : Mary Grocery, Park Cafe and Grocery

How to Get Around

The best way to see Glacier National Park is by car. You can rent a car from the Kalispell Airport if you fly to Montana. You could also drive in from wherever you live and make a road trip out of it!

Since most visitors will drive in, parking can be difficult. Plan to arrive at popular destinations early (before 6 a.m.) to find a parking spot. This is especially critical for the trails in Many Glacier and Logan Pass.

Traveling by Car

Going-to-the-Sun Road is the most scenic drive in the park. It’s also the park’s main artery, connecting the east and west sides.

Due to its popularity, expect heavy traffic on the road. The road is usually open from mid-June to early September.

The 50-mile Going-to-the-Sun Road has 51 switchbacks as it climbs up to Logan Pass. It’s worth driving the road for its beauty and views into Glacier National Park along the way. If you have a fear of heights, you may not want to look out the window at certain points.

Red Bus Tour

If you’d like to explore the park roads with someone else driving, you could also partake in a signature Red Bus Tour at Glacier National Park.

These open-air jammers navigate the winding roads of Going-to-the-Sun, Many Glacier, and Two Medicine. Your tour guide will provide information about the park’s history as they take you to the top attractions.

Traveling by Shuttle

To avoid difficulty parking, I highly recommend taking the park’s free shuttle. This is especially true during peak season at peak hours. The shuttle runs between Apgar Village and St. Mary Visitor Center along Going-to-the-Sun Road.

This shuttle is also key if you plan to hike the Highline Trail and don’t want to return to the trailhead by foot.

The shuttle can be crowded and slow, but is still the best way to see popular areas of the park without worrying about where to park your vehicle.

Unfortunately, the shuttle does not bring visitors to Two Medicine or Many Glacier.

RVs and Campers

RVs and campers are popular modes of transportation for many visitors. However, there are restrictions in the park for your safety. If you decide to rent or bring an RV, camper, or van, make sure it’s less than 21 feet long. Otherwise, you won’t be able to drive Going-to-the-Sun Road.

Entrance Fees

There is a fee to enter Glacier National Park. The exact price depends on the time of year.

In order to save money, I would recommend purchasing a  national parks pass . These cost $80 and are valid for a full calendar year (from the date of purchase) at all public lands in the United States. After you visit 3 national parks, it’ll have paid for itself. It also makes a great gift for national park enthusiasts ! Learn more about park entry fees .

Summer Rates (May 1 to October 31)

Private vehicle, 7 days: $35

Motorcycle, 7 days: $30

Individual (hiker or bicyclist), 7 days: $20

Winter Rates (November 1 to April 30)

Private vehicle, 7 days: $25

Motorcycle, 7 days: $20

Individual (hiker or bicyclist), 7 days: $15

Glacier National Park Annual Pass

If you are a local or plan to spend more than a week in Glacier National Park, consider purchasing an annual pass. This is valid for 12 months after your purchase and costs $70.

Fee-Free Days

Every year, the National Park Service announces fee-free days nationwide. Typically, these include major holidays such as Martin Luther King, Jr. Day and Veterans Day. It also includes NPS-specific holidays like August 25, the anniversary of the creation of the National Park Service (a.k.a Founder’s Day).

Click here to learn about this year’s fee-free days.

While pets are allowed in Glacier National Park, they are only permitted in developed areas. Developed areas include parking lots, campgrounds, and picnic areas. They are also permitted on motorized boats.

Pets, including emotional support animals, are not permitted on park trails, lakeshores, in the backcountry, or inside any buildings.

Pets must be on a leash at all times. Remember to clean up after your pet, too!

Map of Glacier National Park

Click the map above to open a larger image.

A Few More Tips for Planning Your Glacier National Park Itinerary

Wildlife Safety

It’s incredibly dangerous to get too close to wild animals, including bears and moose.

While hiking, be mindful of your surroundings at all times. If you don’t see any wildlife, that doesn’t mean wild animals aren’t nearby.

The best way to stay safe is by keeping a distance from wild animals when possible. Never approach wildlife.

If you’re camping, keep food stored in bear-resistant containers. Never feed wildlife.

When hiking, bring bear spray with you (and know how to use it properly). Purchase this once you arrive in Montana if you’re flying in. Bear spray is prohibited on planes, but you can rent it at the Kalispell airport! While hiking, especially if you’re alone, remember to make plenty of noise so that animals know you are nearby.

For more tips, read my article on practicing bear safety in national parks .

Leave No Trace

Glacier National Park is a beautiful place to visit and visitors must do their part to protect this special landscape.

The park asks visitors to practice Leave No Trace principles. This means leaving the parks as you found them, or better than you found them!

This includes protecting wildlife and natural resources by staying on designated trails and boardwalks so that other hikers can enjoy their visit too.

It also means disposing of trash properly in bear-proof cans and not feeding wild animals.

Furthermore, leave behind everything you find. Do not pick flowers or pinecones to take home with you. Report any historic artifacts to a park ranger, including the location specifics, without removing them.

How to Avoid Crowds

During peak season (July and August), it’s generally a good idea to avoid going on weekend days. The park is busiest between July and September when temperatures are warmer and there are more hours of sunlight for outdoor activities. If you go during this time, expect large crowds at popular attractions like Logan Pass or Going-to-the-Sun Road.

Hiking less popular trails or visiting less popular districts, like Two Medicine or Polebridge, will help you enjoy peace and quiet in Glacier National Park.

Backpacking in Glacier National Park

Backpacking is a popular activity in Glacier with one of the most well-preserved wilderness areas in the continental United States.

Backcountry permits are required when camping overnight in backcountry areas. There are many different trails in Glacier National Park that allow backpacking, including the Highline Trail and Swiftcurrent Pass Trail. For more information on how to obtain these permits and what you need for your trip, check out the Glacier National Park website .

Reception and Connectivity

You should not plan to rely on cell phone reception or Wi-Fi in Glacier National Park. Download anything you need, like hotel reservations or your entrance reservation, so you can access it offline.

For hiking, download a map to your phone or buy a paper copy to bring along.

What to Pack for 1 Week in Glacier National Park

Planning : There are a lot of books out there to help you plan your Glacier National Park itinerary. I recommend the Moon Travel Guide . It’s written by Becky Lomax, a local who has been exploring Glacier National Park for years.

America the Beautiful pass : Glacier National Park charges an entrance fee. In order to save money, I would recommend purchasing a  national parks pass . These cost $80 and are valid for a full calendar year at all public lands in the US.

Layers : Even in the summer, it can get cold.  Down jackets  are a must for chilly evenings. My favorite brands are Patagonia and North Face. I’d also recommend bringing a  waterproof jacket  if you’re visiting during monsoon season. My favorite waterproof brand is Helly Hansen.

Hiking tees : Good-quality  hiking shirts  should be moisture-wicking and quick drying. I would also bring short and  long sleeve  options for layering.

Hiking pants : Like your tops, I would make sure your hiking bottoms are moisture-wicking and quick-drying as well. These can be  pants  or  shorts  (I recommend packing at least two pairs of both).

Trusty footwear : One of the best ways to see Glacier National Park is hiking, so you’ll definitely want to bring some good  hiking footwear . I love my  Hoka trail runners  and my  Keen hiking boots . Both have great traction. If you’re hiking snowy trails, opt for hiking boots over sneakers.

Backpack : My favorite backpacks are from  Deuter ,  Osprey , and  Gregory .

Hiking accessories : You may need  sunglasses ,  sunscreen ,  bug spray , and a  hat .

For Campers : Of course, you’ll need a tent, either for  camping  in campgrounds or  backpacking  in the wilderness. For comfort inside your tent, pack a  sleeping bag ,  sleeping pad , and  camp pillow . You’ll also need a stove. I prefer the  Pocket Rocket  or  Jet Boil . Then, naturally, you’ll also need  fuel . Don’t forget some reusable  cookware  and dinnerware, too! I prefer  collapsible bowls  for my meals and  all-in-one utensils . I’d also highly recommend a  headlamp  or  flashlight .

Water bottle : I love the  Nalgene  narrow mouth bottles. For bottles that fit in my car’s cup holder and can always keep drinks hot or cold, I recommend the  Hydroflask  lightweight trail bottles. If you need a water bottle that also filters, try a  Katahdin .

Food :  Clif bars  and trail mix are road trip staples and necessities. For larger meals, dry some freeze-dried meals from  Mountain House  or  Backpackers Pantry . You may want a  cooler  to store everything in.

Where to Stay

For information on campgrounds in Glacier National Park, read my Glacier National Park camping guide .

If options inside the park are full, a couple more to try are:

West Glacier RV Park and Cabins

Official Website :  click here

Phone Number : 1 (844) 868-7474

Address : 200 Going-to-the-Sun Road, West Glacier, MT 59936

Columbia Falls RV Park

Phone Number : (406) 892-1122

Address : 103 Hwy 2 East, Columbia Falls, Montana 59912

Mountain View RV Park

Phone Number : (406) 892-2500

Address : 3621 MT Hwy 40 West, Columbia Falls, MT 59912

Rocky Mountain HI Campground

Phone Number : (406) 755-9573

Address : 825 Helena Flats Road, Kalispell, MT 59901

Lodging In Glacier National Park

If camping isn’t your style, there are still plenty of places to stay. This includes options both inside and outside national park boundaries.

Apgar Village Lodge

Location : Apgar Village

Phone Number : (406) 892-2525

Reservations :  click here

Granite Park Chalet

Location : Backcountry lodge; accessible by hiking only

Phone Number : (888) 345-2649

Lake McDonald Lodge

Location : Lake McDonald

Phone Number : (855) 733-4522

Reservations :  click here

Many Glacier Hotel

Location : Many Glacier

Motel Lake McDonald

Rising sun motor inn.

Location : Rising Sun

Sperry Chalet

Swiftcurrent motor inn, village inn at apgar.

Lodging Near Glacier National Park

Here are the hotels I recommend outside of the park if everything above is full.

• St. Mary Village
• Reclusive Moose Cabins
• Silverwolf Lodge Chalet Resort
• Glacier Outdoor Center
• Glacier Homestead
• Great Northern Lodge
• Under Canvas Glacier

Overview of Glacier National Park Districts

It’s best to familiarize yourself with the different areas of the park before you visit. This will help you decide which to include in your Glacier National Park itinerary. Below is a description of each district along with the most popular things to do in each one.

Lake McDonald, Logan Pass, and St. Mary are all along Going-to-the-Sun Road. Two Medicine and Many Glacier are on the east side. Goat Haunt is in the north near the Canadian border.

St. Mary and Logan Pass

St. Mary is one entrance to Going-to-the-Sun Road. There’s a small ranger station and restaurant available. It’s located on the east side of the park. You can use this entrance to access Rising Sun which offers boat tours, camping, and food services.

At Logan Pass, you can find spectacular views at the highest point along Going-to-the-Sun Road and as you explore the backcountry. This area is home to some of the best hikes in Glacier National Park , including the Highline Trail and Hidden Lake Overlook.

Lake McDonald

Lake McDonald is a large and deep lake. The shoreline along Going-to-the-Sun Road features hotels, campgrounds, boat docks, picnic areas, hiking trails, and a campground, as well as spots for fishing.

Must-do hikes in the area include Avalanche Lake and Trail of the Cedars. It’s also popular for boating and kayaking.

Above Lake McDonald is the historic Sperry Chalet.

Many Glacier

Many Glacier is home to Swiftcurrent Lake, Grinnell Glacier, and the historic Many Glacier Hotel. It’s located on the east side of the park, north of Going-to-the-Sun Road. It has a separate entrance from St. Mary.

You can hike around Swiftcurrent Lake or take a boat across it for a closer look. You can also hike to Grinnell Glacier or Iceberg Lake, which are two of the most popular trails in the park. Personally, my favorite trail in Many Glacier is Cracker Lake.

Two Medicine

The Two Medicine area includes many lakes surrounded by dense forest with mountain views throughout. It’s located on the southeast side of the park.

There are several trails to explore, including some that lead into Glacier National Park’s more remote areas. Some of the park’s most difficult trails, Pitamakan Pass and Dawson Pass, are located here.

Pole Bridge

Pole Bridge is a great area of the park to visit if you hope to avoid crowds. It’s a quiet spot with fewer attractions. If you’re interested in swimming, Bowman Lake is a great option.

Goat Haunt can only be accessed on foot and is a backpacker’s paradise in Glacier National Park. It’s located on the west side of Waterton Lake, which is part of Glacier National Park and Canada’s Waterton Lakes National Park.

While extremely difficult to get to, Goat Haunt offers some of the best solitude you can find in Glacier National Park.

How Many Days to Spend in Glacier National Park

With a number of scenic drives and over 700 miles of hiking trails, you could explore this park for weeks, months, or years and not see everything. Unfortunately, you probably don’t have that long to explore.

To determine how much time you should spend in Glacier National Park, you need to ask yourself what you want to see and do while visiting and how much time you have to spare. Then, you can put together your Glacier National Park itinerary. Here are some things to think about.

If you only have one day in Glacier National Park, drive the park’s Going-to-the-Sun Road and take in the views. You may have time for one or two short hikes as well.

If you want to hike the park’s most popular trails and see the main attractions, you should allow at least three days.

If you’re interested in hiking more strenuous trails or backpacking in the park’s expansive wilderness, I would allow 4 to 5 days.

If you want to do as much as you possibly can, I’d allow a full week in the park. That’s what this 7-day Glacier National Park itinerary will focus on.

7-Day Glacier National Park Itinerary

This Glacier National Park itinerary will include things to do over 7 days in Glacier National Park. Feel free to rearrange the itinerary to fit your schedule and what you want to see and do.

How to Use this Glacier National Park Itinerary

If you don’t have a full 7 days in Glacier National Park, feel free to pick and choose which days you’d like to follow below. I’d recommend starting from the beginning and focusing on the earlier days first. The first few days of this Glacier National Park itinerary include the best things to do and see in the park.

Here’s a quick overview of our Glacier National Park itinerary:

Day 1 : Visit Apgar Village to get your bearings. Walk along the shore of Lake McDonald and enjoy a picnic lunch. Take a hike to Avalanche Lake and Trail of the Cedars, or spend the day paddling on the lake.

Day 2 : Drive Going-to-the-Sun Road. Start with a hike to Hidden Lake Overlook at Logan Pass. Make your way east to St. Mary.

Days 3 and 4 : Hike your heart out in the Many Glacier district. Options include Iceberg Lake, Grinnell Glacier, or Cracker Lake .

Day 5 : Spend time in St. Mary. Explore some shorter trails to stunning waterfalls. If it’s a nice day, go for a swim in the lake.

Day 6 : Visit one of the park’s less crowded areas, Two Medicine.

Day 7 : Say goodbye to Glacier National Park with a thrilling farewell hike across the Highline Trail.

Day 1: Apgar Village and Lake McDonald

On the first day of your Glacier National Park itinerary, start your journey in Apgar Village. Here, you can stamp your national parks passport book and get your bearings with the help of knowledgeable park rangers.

Next, drive to Lake McDonald. Enjoy walking along the lakeshore before you take in the view from the dock at the lodge. Lake McDonald Lodge is also a great place for lunch or a picnic.

If you’re up for a longer hike, opt for Avalanche Lake. This trail is about 4.5 miles roundtrip. You should allow 2-3 hours for this hike to a beautiful lake. Like many hikes in Glacier National Park , this trail is very popular. You should start early if you’d like to avoid the crowds and find a parking space.

If you’d like to add on an additional short hike, go for the 1-mile Trail of the Cedars. The trail is accessible and mostly on a boardwalk. It’s home to giant cedars towering over the trail at 100+ feet high. Other shorter options include McDonald Falls or Johns Lake.

If you’d rather spend time on the water, visit the Apgar Village side of the lake. Here, you can rent stand-up paddleboards, kayaks, and more.

Finally, visit the Lake McDonald Lodge for dinner and a stunning sunset over the lake. You could also stay in Apgar Village for dinner and some shopping. Plus, the ice cream at Eddie’s is wildly popular if you’re in the mood for dessert.

Once the sun goes down, stick around for glorious stargazing near Lake McDonald in this International Dark Sky Park.

Day 2: Drive Going-to-the-Sun Road

Next, get a feel for the rest of Glacier National Park while you drive the park’s main road. Get up bright and early; you have a full day ahead.

Before entering the park, I recommend stopping for gas. You won’t find any gas stations within the national park boundaries.

I recommend driving straight to Logan Pass, the highest point on Going-to-the-Sun Road, as early as you can in order to park. To get to Logan Pass, allow at least an hour from West Glacier and 1.5 hours from St. Mary.

Typically, parking at Logan Pass will fill by 8 a.m. In 2021, visitors reported the parking lot was full as early as 6 a.m. since visitors were arriving before the timed entry began. This trend is continuing as the demand to visit Glacier is only increasing.

Why the rush, you may be asking? One of the best hikes in Glacier National Park , Hidden Lake Overlook, begins at the Logan Pass Visitor Center.

On your hike to Hidden Lake Overlook, you’ll climb about 500 feet over 3 miles (roundtrip) as you make your way to the overlook. Return the same way, downhill back to the parking lot. This view is one of the most photographed locations in the park. Allow about 1.5 hours to complete the hike. You can also continue beyond the overlook and hike an additional 1.2 miles (each way) to Hidden Lake.

Before you leave Logan Pass, be on the lookout for mountain goats! They’re commonly seen in this area of the park.

Next, I would continue on to St. Mary. On your way there, stop at the Wild Goose Island viewpoint and hike to St. Mary Falls. This short, 1.5-mile trail leads to a double waterfall. The trail also boasts stunning wildflowers! If you have time, you can continue another mile to Virginia Falls.

St. Mary is also an excellent place for lunch or dinner. There are plenty of restaurants here to choose from.

On your way to St. Mary, you’ll be able to stop at the overlooks to enjoy the views and take as many pictures as you’d like. Some popular places to stop include Weeping Wall, Big Bend, Jackson Glacier Overlook, Sunrift Gorge, and Sun Point.

Day 3: Many Glacier District

For the third and fourth days of your Glacier National Park itinerary, I recommend traveling to a part of the park you haven’t seen yet: Many Glacier.

This is the most popular district that’s not on the Going-to-the-Sun Road corridor. Attractions include the hike to Grinnell Glacier, Many Glacier Hotel, and boat tours of two lakes. This is what you’ll focus on today.

The hike to Grinnell Glacier Viewpoint is 10.5 miles and climbs 1,600 feet to the vista. If you’re interested in a shorter hike, take the boat tour to the Josephine dock to shave 3.5 miles off your hike (in each direction).

The boat tour cuts out the flat portion of the trail, so you should still expect a steep trek. The trail is mostly exposed so wear your sunscreen and don’t attempt the hike in the middle of the day.

Boat tours fill up weeks in advance, especially early morning trips. Book your tickets as soon as you can. I advise booking at least 2 months in advance, but earlier if you can. Arrive early to pick up your tickets before the departure time.

Lastly, you can reward yourself with dinner at Many Glacier Hotel and/or a relaxing evening stargazing on the lakeshore.

Day 4: Many Glacier District

If you have an extra day to spend in the Many Glacier District, another great hike is Iceberg Lake (9.6 miles roundtrip). It’s longer than Grinnell Glacier and one of the longer hikes on this Glacier National Park itinerary, but the scenery is breathtaking. The first part of the trail is steep before the grade becomes more moderate.

You could make your trek to Iceberg Lake even longer by adding on an excursion to Ptarmigan Tunnel. This is best completed between mid-July and late September when the tunnel doors are open.

I’d also highly recommend Cracker Lake . Cracker Lake is one of the most underrated hikes in Glacier National Park. The 12.8-mile hike will take you at least half the day, so pack a lunch, snacks, and plenty of water.

If both of these sound too strenuous or too long, opt for a shorter hike to Twin Falls or Baring Falls.

Day 5: St. Mary District

Next, spend your day relaxing in the St. Mary area. If you’re a bit worn out from hiking, there are some easy strolls here.

Sun Point Nature Trail, for example, goes along St. Mary Lake and features three waterfalls. Due to wildfires in 2015, thinner trees provide amazing views of the lake and the mountains beyond.

If it’s a hot and sunny day, take a dip in the lake!

The Goat Haunt district is also nearby. Here, you can get a sense of the expansive wilderness in Glacier and Canada’s Waterton Lakes National Park. Many backpacking trips begin here, but there are also plenty of opportunities for day hiking. Both are also great places for scenic drives if you’re done walking for today.

Day 6: Two Medicine

If you’re hoping to explore a less popular section of the park, look no further than Two Medicine.

Though nothing is on par with Going-to-the-Sun Road, Highway 49 (Looking Glass Highway) is pretty scenic as well. You’ll be able to stop at plenty of picturesque pullouts as you make your way to Two Medicine.

Once you arrive at East Glacier, stop for gas (if needed) and food.

Proceed into the park for more grand adventures. You can take short hikes to waterfalls, paddle on the bright blue water, or take a longer hike to Upper Two Medicine Lake. Popular hiking options include Running Eagle Falls, Aster Falls, or No Name Lake.

For more strenuous day hikes, consider Pitamakan Pass or Dawson Pass. These trails are some of the longest in the park, but they offer some of the most rewarding views.

You can also take a boat across Two Medicine Lake to hike to Twin Falls.

Day 7: Highline Trail

If you ask anyone what you have to include in your Glacier National Park itinerary, I’d be surprised if they didn’t mention the Highline Trail. This is widely regarded as one of the best trails in the park.

This 12-mile trail is also one of the longest, most popular, and most strenuous. It traverses a lot of the same terrain as Going-to-the-Sun Road, only it looks down on the scenic highway. I recommend ending your trip with this trail, as it’s the perfect goodbye to this beautiful park.

Since it’s so popular, I recommend starting before 6 a.m. You’ll need to park at Logan Pass Visitor Center, and it’s never easy to find a spot there. The earlier you arrive, the better. Your trailhead is located across the street.

Since parking is such a challenge at Logan Pass, you could also try to park at The Loop and then take the shuttle to Logan Pass. From there, hike back to your car on the Highline Trail. Remember, The Loop parking will also fill quickly, so it’s still best to start early.

If you’re up for a challenge, take the optional excursion up to Garden Wall. This is a steep climb, but worth it for the incredible views over Grinnell Glacier. You’ll get to look down on an area you hiked to back on day 3 of this Glacier National Park itinerary. Enjoy the turquoise waters as you traverse the line of the continental divide.

PARKS EXPERT TIP : Highline Trail only opens once it’s clear of snow. Sometimes, the trail is closed until mid-July. Plan accordingly if this hike is on your list.

Plan to stop for lunch or snacks at the Granite Peak Chalet, one of the more famous buildings in Glacier National Park. If you’re interested and have the time, you could also spend the night here and split up your hike.

Pin the Expert’s Glacier National Park Itinerary

Glacier National Park is truly one of the most impressive places on Earth. The sheer scale and beauty that this park offers cannot be overstated. If you’re looking for a place that will leave an impression, look no further than the “Crown of the Continent”.

From Going-to-the-Sun Road to hikes like the Highline Trail, there’s so much to explore. If you’re looking for a Glacier National Park itinerary, this is a great place to start. If you find it helpful, please share it with your friends and tell us all about your trip in the comments.

Riley has been visiting national parks for as long as she can remember. Her newest passion is sharing her love of national parks with the world by planning trips, writing about her travels, and offering advice. One day, Riley hopes to visit all 429 national parks.

Similar Posts

Zion National Park Camping Guide: Everything You Should Know About Camping in Zion

Article Summary: Camping in Zion National Park, Zion National Park Camping Zion National Park is one of the most…

How to Get to Channel Islands National Park: Channel Islands Tours

Article Summary: Channel Islands Boat Tours, Island Packers, How to Get to Channel Islands National Park, Channel Islands National…

Grand Canyon Sunset: Best 13 Places to See Sunrise and Sunset at Grand Canyon National Park

The Grand Canyon is one of the most spectacular natural wonders in the world. There’s something about its vastness…

16 Astonishing National Parks in Alaska

Article Summary: How Many National Parks in Alaska, Alaska National Parks, Alaska National Parks Map, National Parks in Alaska…

15 Phenomenal Fall Destinations in U.S. National Parks for Fall Colors

Calling all leaf-peepers! Fall is considered to be the best season for traveling and visiting national parks by many…

23 National Parks with Breathtaking Waterfalls

Are you looking to chase some waterfalls? National parks are some of the most beautiful places on Earth. They’re…

Leave a Reply Cancel reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

Save my name, email, and website in this browser for the next time I comment.

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed .

Adventures in Destinations Unknown

Unforgettable Glacier National Park Day Trip Itinerary

Last modified on April 2nd, 2021 at 10:18

Glacier National Park in Montana boasts some of the most pristine and dramatic landscapes in the United States. Famed for its 700+ miles of hiking trails and its awe-inspiring alpine vistas, the national park is an example of unspoiled wilderness at its finest.

The park’s untouched landscapes remain authentically wild. They feature glacier-ripped valleys laced with plunging waterfalls and snowcapped pinnacles sheltering glassy turquoise lakes. Grizzly bears and moose roam the park in abundance. In summer, alpine meadows erupt in a blaze of colorful wildflowers.

With more things to do than one could possibly fit into a day trip itinerary, the sprawling national park contains one million acres of Paradise on Earth.

Table of Contents

DAY TRIP TO GLACIER NATIONAL PARK

Dizzying beauty and jaw-dropping natural vistas make Glacier National Park one of the most popular outdoor destinations in the United States. It is the jewel of Montana and comparable in grandeur to Jasper and Banff —two extraordinary national parks that lie just across the border in Canada.

As with any natural wonder, I would have loved to spend more than one day in Glacier National Park. There are simply too many fantastic hikes, lakes, and panoramic vistas to fit into a limited itinerary.

But I traveled to Glacier on a 33 hour Kalispell layover for work. And so, along with three fellow crew members, I had to construct a day trip itinerary that would make the most of the national park’s highlights in a restricted timeframe.

There is no singular best way to spend a day in Glacier. The park’s must-see hiking trails are too plentiful, and its vistas too many.

That being said, my day trip to Glacier National Park ended up being perfect in just about every way. Over the course of 12 hours, I traveled the length of Going-to-the-Sun Road, and laced up my boots for a hike along one of the park’s most splendid trails.

GOING-TO-THE-SUN ROAD ITINERARY (WEST TO EAST)

Montana’s beloved park is renowned for its historic Going-to-the-Sun Road—a 50 mile ribbon of pavement that connects Glacier’s two main entrances.

Going-to-the-Sun Road is often considered to be one of the America’s best road trip destinations. As it winds around hairpin bends and carves through spectacular U-shaped valleys, it features views of jaw-dropping mountains and aquamarine lakes.

The drive between East and West Glacier takes about 2 hours to complete one-way, without stopping.

Of course, you’re probably not going to drive the 50 mile road without getting out of the car at least a few times. Traversing the park without stopping for photos is about as difficult as fitting all of Glacier’s attractions into a single day trip itinerary.

The places to see along the way are simply too compelling.

LAKE MCDONALD

Lake McDonald is the hub of activity on the west side of the Glacier National Park. The mountain-ringed lake is the park’s largest body of water and a popular launching point for day hikes. The Apgar Visitor Center at the southern end of the lake is a fantastic resource for information on the park’s geology, hiking trails, and noteworthy places to visit.

Nearby, accommodation options include historic chalets, and the grand Lake McDonald Lodge .

WEEPING WALL

The Weeping Wall is a 100 foot long section of cliff that receives a huge amount of runoff during the springtime melt. It is a popular scenic stopping point along Going-to-the-Sun Road.

The weeping cliff is not entirely a natural phenomenon. It was partially created when workers exposed several spring-fed waterways during road construction.  Along the cliff face, water pours over the rock wall and onto the road in a series of cascades.

In early summer, these veins of water swell to torrents.

Unfortunately, I happened to visit the park toward the end of summer, when the water running off the cliff was little more than a trickle.

Big Bend is one of Going-to-the-Sun Road’s most scenic viewpoints and a top road trip stop in Glacier National Park. The mountain-flanked curve in the road lies between the Weeping Wall and Logan Pass Visitor Center.  It showcases spectacular views of the surrounding mountains and glacier-carved valleys.

Though I only stopped at Big Bend for a quick photo opportunity en-route to East Glacier, I’m told that the area merits a visit at dusk—when indirect light drenches the area in warm golden hues.

LOGAN PASS VISITOR CENTER

Sitting at 6,647 feet in elevation, the Logan Pass Visitors Center is the highest point along Going-to-the-Sun Road.  The park information center is the starting point for some of the most beloved hiking trails in Glacier National Park.

We stopped by the visitor center briefly in order to snap photos, gather information on bear activity, and learn about some of the hikes in the area. The park information center is the launching point for two of Glacier’s most popular hikes: the Highline Trail, and Hidden Lake Trail.

Unfortunately, we didn’t have time for more than one hike during our Glacier itinerary, so we pressed on toward the park’s eastern entrance and skipped the trails near Logan Pass.

SAINT MARY LAKE

Saint Mary Lake lies on the east side of Glacier National Park, along Going-to-the-Sun Road. It is the second largest lake in the park after Lake McDonald.

As Going-to-the-Sun-Road travels along the flank of Saint Mary Lake, numerous pullouts provide opportunities to admire the wall of jagged mountains that line its shores. On sunny days, the lake’s glassy waters reflect the surrounding scenery in perfect symmetry.

Saint Mary Lake offers a variety of photography and wildlife-viewing opportunities. The lake is home to placid waters, wildflower-strewn shores, a photogenic backdrop, and tiny Goose Island. Its scenic setting makes it one of the most popular Glacier National Park attractions.

MANY GLACIER

Many Glacier is the hub of the national park’s east side. It is the launchpad for trails to Grinnel Glacier and Iceberg Lake.  The 100+ year old historic Many Glacier Lodge presides over the waters of Swiftcurrent Lake. It is the largest and most famous hotel in the park.

The Many Glacier Lodge provides boat tours of Swiftcurrent Lake and Lake Josephine. Though I skipped the boat tour in favor of hiking to Iceberg Lake, I heard great things about the tours from one of my travel companions.

HIKING IN GLACIER NATIONAL PARK

No trip to Glacier would be complete without setting foot on one of the national park’s epic trails. Montana’s #1 outdoor wonderland is home to more than 700 miles of hiking trails that criss-cross its valleys and mountains.

Due to limited time, I only explored one trail during my Glacier day trip. After much debate, one of my coworkers and I decided to hike to Iceberg Lake. It proved to be a fantastic choice.

If you only have time for one hike in Glacier, choosing the best trail can be overwhelming. Aside from Iceberg Lake, notable day hikes include Hidden Lake Lookout, the Highline Loop, Siyeh Pass, the Ptarmigan Tunnel, and the Grinnel Glacier Trail.

ICEBERG LAKE HIKE

The hike to Iceberg Lake begins behind the Swiftcurrent Motor Inn ‘s parking lot. It follows a 9.3 mile out and back trail that leads to a stunning aquamarine pool at the base of Iceberg Peak.

The dazzling lake lies below a semi-circle of jagged mountains that soar 3,000 ft above its iceberg-studded surface.

It is truly a magical place.

Although the first two-tenths of a mile climb at a fairly steep incline, the trail quickly flattens out to a moderate grade. It traverses thick alpine forest that is a prime habitat for grizzly bears.

After passing through the forest for a few miles, the trail gives way to meadows filled with a variety of wildflowers. From the meadows, panoramic views of Glacier’s serrated mountains extend in all directions.

Past the meadows, the Iceberg Lake trail begins a short climb for roughly a quarter mile. Once at the top of its final ascent, it descends to one of the most beautiful alpine lakes in Glacier National Park.

I’m sure that I could have hiked any one of Glacier National Park’s trails and not been disappointed. But I’m happy I chose to hike Iceberg Lake.

I cannot imagine a more spectacular way to cap off an epic Glacier day trip itinerary.

The million-acre paradise that straddles the continental divide is an absolute dream for hikers, backpackers, photographers, and nature-lovers.

It goes without saying that Glacier National Park is a highlight of the American Rockies. The park’s status as Montana’s premier tourist attraction isn’t even up for debate.

Though spending one day in Glacier National Park did not give me time to explore the area fully, it was more than enough time to convince me of the staggering beauty that lies along the crown of the continent.

_____________________________________

Did You Enjoy this One Day Glacier Itinerary? Pin It! 

• PRIVACY POLICY
• TRAVEL TIPS
• AUSTRALIA & SOUTH PACIFIC
• BRITISH COLUMBIA
• CONNECTICUT
• MASSACHUSETTS
• MISSISSIPPI
• NEW HAMPSHIRE
• NORTH CAROLINA
• NORTH DAKOTA
• PENNSYLVANIA
• RHODE ISLAND
• SOUTH CAROLINA
• SOUTH DAKOTA
• VAN CAMPING
• WORK WITH US

Glacier National Park Itinerary: 5 Days in Heaven

Glacier National Park easily tops my list of favorite national parks in the United States. Montana’s crown jewel is home to over one million acres with 130 spectacular lakes, five National Historic Landmarks, two mountain ranges, and hundreds of species of animals.

Unfortunately, the landscape is ever-changing and the park will completely transform in the coming years “depending on how and when we act.” The park, once home to 150 glaciers, only has 25 remaining and they are retreating fast. Projections suggest that because of climate change, in several decades the remaining few, may all be gone. 

So you know what that means. It’s time for a visit!

Before we get you to the 5-day Glacier National Park itinerary and travel guide with tips and the can’t-miss places for your trip, let’s discuss some other important information.

2024 Update: In an effort to reduce congestion, reservations are required from May 24th – September 8th from 6:00 am to 3:00 pm to access Going-to-the-Sun Road beyond Apgar Village and North Folk. New this year, the reservation will only be good for one day only versus three days in previous years. Reservations are required from July 1 – September 8th from 6:00 am to 3:00 pm to access Many Glacier. Click here to read more information about the ticketed entry requirements . Vehicle reservations are required in each separate area. 

How can I see Glacier National Park without a reservation? – Arrive before 6 am or after 3 pm at the North Fork, Two Medicine, or Many Glacier (only after 3 pm for Going-to-the-Sun Road) during designated dates.  – Book one of the many guided Glacier National Park tours such as horseback riding, guided hikes, or boat rides within the park) 

How Many Days Do You Need in Glacier National Park?

You do not have to be an avid hiker or even outdoorsy in general to appreciate the raw natural beauty of Glacier. You’d be missing out though if you didn’t explore some of the 700 miles of hiking trails.

It is one of those places that wows even the most stoic. It is roughly 1,500 square miles of alpine meadows and dense forests with magnificent panoramas, tumbling waterfalls, and glistening lakes

Whether you are planning to stop in Montana on a cross-country road trip like we did or it is the main destination, you should plan for at least five to seven days to see all the spectacular things Glacier has to offer.

Tips for Visiting Glacier National Park for the First Time

• Plan ahead. Glacier, along with many of the national parks, is a popular destination with limited facilities. Reservations open up 13 months in advance.  On the first of each month, the park begins accepting reservations for the entire month of the following year. For example, on September 1, they will accept reservations through September 30 of the following year.
• Pack a sturdy pair of women’s hiking shoes or men’s hiking shoes , whichever applies. I prefer trail runners or hiking shoes that don’t cover my ankles since it tends to rub, but if you prefer hiking boots , make sure to pick a durable and breathable pair. 
• Bring a good day pack to carry lunch, snacks, and water for your daily hikes. 
• Be up early! Get out by 8 am and you will not have a problem with parking or crowds.
• Always stay alert and remember to respect the animals and their space. Do not approach any wildlife and absolutely never turn your back on an animal to snap a selfie.
• Cell coverage is sparse so download a Glacier National Park map, itinerary, and any other necessary information beforehand.
• Download National Parks by Chimani . It is a free app for your phone that has detailed guides, including GPS-enabled maps that can be used offline.
• Layer up. The weather can and does change often, especially when hiking in high elevations. Even in July we started out with flowers in a meadow and ended up hiking through snow.
• It is highly recommended by the park to utilize the free shuttle system that runs along the Going-to-the-Sun Road between Apgar Visitor Center and St. Mary Visitor Center.
• If driving in the park, always add extra time. Glacier is very busy with one major road going through it which can get congested at times.
• Bring your passport if you are going to include a day at Waterton Lakes National Park over the border in Canada.

BEAR SAFETY:

• Any activity within 100 yards (91.4 meters), such as approaching, viewing, or engaging bears or wolves, or within 25 yards (23 meters) of any other wildlife is prohibited.
• Always make noise when walking especially when taking a corner. You can play music, where a bear bell , clap your hands, and/or yell out, “Hey bear!!!” every once in a while. If possible do not hike alone.
• Purchase bear spray before arriving to give you peace of mind. *Note: you cannot fly with bear spray so purchase only after arriving if coming by plane.*
• Ask a ranger. It’s always advisable to ask about bear activity in the areas you are hiking.
• Be aware that bears, like most animals, are more active at dusk and dawn.
• If you see a bear along the side of the road, do not stop near the animal. Pull over at a safe location at least 100 yards away.
• Food should always be stored in vehicles or in bear-proof canisters or lockers.
• RELATED: WHAT TO DO IF YOU ENCOUNTER A BEAR

What is the Best Month to Visit Glacier National Park?

With melted snow and comfortable temperatures, July and August are the best months to visit Glacier National Park, making these months peak tourist season.

And because of the limited timeframe, it makes our Glacier National Park Travel Guide very important in the planning process.

Top 7 Things to Do in Glacier National Park – DO NOT MISS

• Going-to-the-Sun Road
• Grinnell Glacier Hike
• Trail of the Cedars and Avalanche Lake
• Hidden Lake Trail
• Lake McDonald
• Highline Trail
• Virginia and St. Mary Falls

You can save the Glacier National Park itinerary map above to your Google Maps account by selecting the star icon.

To view it, open Google Maps on your desktop or on your phone, select the menu button, go to “Your Places,” scroll to the right to Maps, and you will see this map.

DOWNLOAD OR SAVE THE OFFICIAL GLACIER NATIONAL PARK MAP HERE

How to Get Around Glacier National Park

The national park service highly recommends utilizing the free shuttle service offered between Apgar Visitor Center and St. Mary Visitor Center. It runs from early July to mid-September depending on the weather. Shuttles are air-conditioned and have large windows for viewing the park as you drive. They run every 15 – 30 minutes from 7:00 AM to 7:00 PM.

If you are not an early riser, I recommend using the shuttle system as there is limited parking available at each trailhead and visitor center. If you can wake up and get moving with the sun then you’ll most likely find a parking spot. Always have an alternative hike or destination in mind though just in case.

BEWARE: There are size restrictions on Going-to-the-Sun road. Any vehicle combinations longer than 21 feet (including bumpers) or wider than 8 feet (including mirrors) are prohibited between Avalanche Campground and the picnic area parking lot at Rising Sun. Due to overhangs, vehicle combinations over 10 feet in height may have issues driving west from Logan Pass to the Loop.

Available at various locations within the park are the famous Red Buses that provide tours around the park.

East side departure points include Swiftcurrent Motor Inn, Many Glacier Hotel and Rising Sun Motor Inn, a few spots in the town of St. Mary’s, Johnson’s hotel guests and at the Glacier Park Lodge in East Glacier.

West side departure points include Apgar Visitor Center, Village Inn at Apgar and Lake McDonald Lodge, and a couple of spots near the west entrance to the park.

Scroll below the itinerary for my top picks on lodging!

5 DAY TRAVEL GUIDE TO GLACIER NATIONAL PARK

This adventure-filled Glacier National Park itinerary will take you to all the places you’ll want to experience in and around the park including a day trip to Waterton Lakes National Park in Canada.

Day 1 – Getting to the Park

You’ve arrived! Make the most of your travel day when you get to Glacier National Park. Settle in; pick up groceries, snacks, and drinks and check in to your hotel or campground. If you flew in, remember to pick up bear spray (available at Walmart and stores inside the park) for peace of mind.

CHECK OUT OUR BEST FREE APPS FOR A U.S. ROAD TRIP

Where to Find Groceries near Glacier National Park

• Walmart Supercenter near West Entrance : 170 Hutton Road, Kalispell, MT
• Canyon Foods near West Entrance : 8900 Hwy 2 E, Hungry Horse, MT
• Smith’s near West Entrance : 419 Nucleus Avenue, Columbia Falls, MT
• Mary Grocery near East Entrance: 3 Going-to-the-Sun Hwy, St Mary, MT
• Walmart Supercenter on the way from Yellowstone National Park , 1500 N. 7 th Avenue, Bozeman, MT
• Many of the campgrounds and lodges also have stores with limited supplies and are often more expensive so I suggest picking up what you need beforehand.

Head to a visitor center to pick up maps, ask questions, and watch an introductory video about the park before taking a short hike to stretch your legs.

An easy must-do hike in Glacier National Park is St. Mary and Virginia Falls near the east entrance of the park. It’s a 3.6-mile round trip flat hike where a trail leads you through a burned forested area that is surprisingly breathtaking then to two awesome cascading waterfalls.

FIND OUT WHICH CELEBRITY WE RAN INTO ON THE VIRGINIA FALLS TRAIL

Day 2 – Central Section

Wake up early (maybe even catch the sunrise) and begin the day on the jaw-dropping beautiful Going-to-the-Sun Road that cuts directly through Glacier National Park. Once you get a glimpse of what this scenic drive has to offer, you will not be disappointed that many of the trails are off this incredible road.

*TIP: Remember to look out for wildlife, it’s one of the best times of day to see them.*

Head to Logan Pass Visitor Center , located at the highest point accessible by car at 6,646 feet high. Here you can choose from two hikes: Highline Trail or Hidden Lake Trail.

The High line Trail is one of the most high ly-rated hikes in the entire park and has even been touted as one of the best in all of America and with good reason. It provides remarkable views and chances to see wildlife and beautiful wildflowers.

Because of its popularity, is another reason we recommend arriving as early as possible. And since it’s an out-and-back, you don’t necessarily have to hike the entire route, you can make it as long or short as you’d like.

Highline Trail, Glacier National Park

Here are a few things you need to know if you choose the Highline hike :

• Only open if the snow has melted and conditions are given the okay from park rangers (check inside the visitor center for information).
• Usually open from mid-July to August.
• Strenuous with steep drop-offs.
• Roughly 12 miles out and back.
• 2,000-foot elevation gain.

If that trail is closed due to weather or you’d like something less challenging try the Hidden Lake Trail. One of the best places in the park to see mountain goats and bears. And when there’s no snow on the ground, it is wildflower mania carpeting the meadow.

Hidden Lake Overlook Trail

Here are a few things you need to know if you choose the Hidden Lake Overlook Trail :

• Can hike even if there is snow on the ground.
• Easy with no snow on the ground, Moderate with snow.
• Roughly 3 miles out and back.
• 500-foot elevation gain.

*Tip: Don’t forget your camera and bear spray, we saw our first grizzly here!*

RELATED: WHAT IT WAS LIKE HIKING WITH A GRIZZLY BEAR

After hiking, drive the rest of the 50-mile extraordinary Going-to-the-Sun Road. It is one of my favorite experiences in all of our travels so far. Be patient. Take your time. And enjoy.

It will take a few hours between the slow driving and stops along the way.

Day 3 – West Section

Spend the day hiking in the west section of Glacier National Park near Lake McDonald, the largest lake in the park. First, take the Cedars Nature Trail to Avalanche Lake , a 4.5 mile easy round trip walk through a narrow gorge contoured with green moss and glossy stones finishing at a shimmering clear lake.

Lake McDonald Area

Afterward, take a short stroll around Johns Lake about one mile east of McDonald Lodge on the Going-to-the-Sun road. Under two miles long and relatively flat, the loop trail is easy and won’t take long. Then stop in at the Lake McDonald Lodge, nestled on the shoreline, to enjoy the rustic ambiance and historic feel. Grab a drink at Lucke’s Lounge or a meal at Russell’s Fireside Dining Room.

End the day at the southwestern side of Lake McDonald near Apgar Village to experience that Instagram-famous shot of the lake with the colorful rocks under the crystal clear water framed by the mountains.

*Tip: Don’t forget to bring binoculars!*

Day 4 – Many Glacier Section

After visiting over 20 national parks, I have a few hikes that go down as my favorites like Angels Landing in Zion , the Beehive Trail in Acadia , and Grinnell Glacier in Glacier. DO NOT MISS THE MANY SECTION OF THE PARK!

You can adjust this hike to many different skill levels so make sure no matter what your hiking background is, you don’t skip this unforgettable scenic area. The Grinnell Glacier Trail, to this day, remains one of the most terrifying and rewarding hikes I’ve been on. Click on the above link to read about our experience hiking the memorable trail. 

Start your day with a breakfast buffet at the historic Many Glacier Hotel . The food isn’t the greatest but it’s all you can eat to prepare you for the long hike ahead of you and the views are unparalleled.

After breakfast, make your way behind the lodge to either the boat dock or trailhead. You can shave roughly 3 miles off the 10-mile hike if you choose to take the shuttle boats across the lakes. If you are short on time go ahead, but I HIGHLY recommend hiking the entire path if possible. The first two miles are relatively flat with fantastic views of Swiftcurrent Lake and Lake Josephine.

Grinnell Glacier Trail

The Grinnell Glacier Trail connecting back to the Grinnell Lake Trail is roughly 12 miles round trip with a 1,800-foot elevation gain. Expect to be rewarded with sensational view after view and a day full of gasping at the landscape before you. We chose to extend the hike a little longer by taking the Grinnell Lake Trail back for a different perspective than going out and back. We saw a moose and her baby and enjoyed the lake scenes so I would suggest it. If you go all the way to Grinnell Lake, be prepared for a short visit because the mosquitos are annoying on the lookout.

And after all that climbing and walking, make sure to stop by the bar at the hotel for a local craft beer like a Wild Huckleberry, you deserve it!

*TIP: As with all hiking in Glacier, do not forget your bear spray. We saw a mom and cub right on the trail.*

Day 5 – A Day at Waterton Lakes National Park or Take a Hike

You have two choices today: explore more of Glacier or head to another national park. You are probably thinking, why spend a day outside the park? It is a bit of a drive and you do have to remember to bring your passport because you’ll be crossing over the border, so it’s not something you necessarily HAVE to do but we are glad we did. It was an exceptionally cold and windy day plus our legs were sore from the Grinnell Glacier hike so we decided to take a drive to see what the park was all about.

You can read about how we spent the day at Waterton Lakes National Park here. 

If it’s your first time in Glacier or you only have a few days then I suggest skipping Waterton and exploring more of Glacier. BUT if you’ve been before, have extended time, or are heading to Canada again on this trip or another this year then Waterton should make your itinerary.

The park and lodge are picturesque, it wasn’t overrun with tourists and we saw five bears from the car! I’d say, it was worth the extra mileage and cost. If you are continuing your road trip up through Canada after Montana, purchase the Discovery Pass which has unlimited access to all Canadian parks.

READ NEXT: TOP 10 THINGS TO DO IN BANFF NP

Waterton Lakes National Park and Glacier National Park share a lake at the border and in 1932 the two were combined and designated Waterton Glacier International Peace Park, the first of its kind in the world. It is also a UNESCO World Heritage Site. 

Make sure to stop inside the Prince of Wales Hotel for afternoon tea or a drink with a magnificent view, walk around town, check out Cameron Falls , and hike the short but steep Bear’s Hump Trail right by the Visitor Center for the best view in the park.

Other Best Hikes in Glacier National Park

If you are not interested in taking a drive out to Waterton, check out these other highly-rated day hikes in Glacier:

• Cracker Lake: 12-mile moderate round-trip with a 1,400-foot climb in the Many Region.
• Iceberg Lake: 9.7 mile easy to moderate round-trip with a 1,200 foot elevation gain in the Many Region. 
• Ptarmigan Tunnel (an addition to Iceberg Lake hike above): 11 mile strenuous round trip with a 2,300 foot elevation gain in the Many Region.
• Cobalt Lake: 11.4 moderate round-trip with a 1,450-foot elevation gain in the Two Medicines Region.

How to Get to Glacier National Park

Glacier National Park is in the northwest corner of Montana running along the ridge of the Rocky Mountains.

Flying is the quickest form of transportation to the area with flights between 2 – 5 hours from many major U.S. cities. Glacier Park International Airport in Kalispell is the closest airport to the national park near the west entrance and houses Alaska Airlines, Allegiant, Delta Airlines, and United Airlines.

The Great Falls International Airport in Montana is roughly 150 miles from the east entrance. It serves a few major airlines such as Delta, United, Alaska Airlines, and Allegiant Air. Rental cars are then available at all airports to get you around on your trip.

Set up an Airfare Alert via AirfareWatchdog

Amtrak also offers stops in East Glacier, West Glacier, and Whitefish. A vehicle is not necessarily a must to visit the park, but I would recommend it since you will be limited as to where and when you can explore. If you are staying within the park, you can use the free shuttle service to get around or take guided tours.

Related: Missoula to Glacier National Park Itinerary

Best Option

In my opinion, the BEST way to get to Montana is to drive. If you are from the U.S. and you have time, visiting the park is the perfect opportunity for a road trip. It allows you to bring your own tent, trailer, or RV which opens up so many lodging options near the park. Since it is a popular destination and so large being able to camp is helpful for planning purposes.

We drove the 1,500-miles or so from Chicago on a mega road trip hitting Badlands National Park and Yellowstone National Park first then wheeled up north to Banff National Park and Jasper National Park in Canada. It was an unforgettable trip that we will be talking about for years to come.

READ NEXT: RV RENTING FOR BEGINNERS

Glacier National Park Lodging

There are many accommodation choices in the area, anywhere from romantic lodges to basic tent sites. Any type of traveler can find suitable choices but the key is to book early .

Glacier has thirteen campgrounds and only a few take reservations: Fish Creek, St. Mary, and some of Many Glacier. The remaining are first come, first served. Inns and lodges within the park boundaries book up fast but have cancellations often so periodically check the website for openings. Beware no camping sites inside Glacier NP have electricity, water or sewer and have limits on generator usage.

We camped at St. Mary Campground on the east side of the park, one of the few that takes reservations.

READ NEXT: CAMPING AT ST. MARY CAMPGROUND IN GLACIER

Lodging Options near East Entrance Outside the Park

• Glacier Park Lodge ($$$$)
• Glacier Peaks Hotel ($$$)
• Circle R Motel ($$$)
• Lodgepole Gallery ($$$)

Lodging Options near East Entrance Inside the Park

• Rising Sun Motor Inn ($$$)
• Mary Campground ($)
• Rising Sun Campground ($)

Lodging Options Inside the Park Centrally Located

• Lake McDonald Lodge ($$$)
• Motel Lake McDonald ($$$)
• Avalanche Creek Campground ($)
• Sprague Creek Campground ($)

Lodging Options near West Entrance Outside the Park

• Great Northern Resort ($$$)
• Historic Tamarack Lodge and Cabins ($$$)
• Safari Tent ($$)

Lodging Options near West Entrance Inside the Park

• Apgar Village Lodge ($$$)
• Village Inn Motel
• Apgar Campground ($)
• Fish Creek Campground ($)

Lodging Options near Many Glacier Entrance Inside the Park

• Many Glacier Lodge ($$$)
• Swiftcurrent Motor Inn ($$$)
• Many Glacier Campground ($)

What would you add to this itinerary for Glacier National Park? Tell us in the comments below!

Disclaimer: This post contains affiliate links, if you book through our link we will receive a small commission at no additional cost to you. Thanks for supporting the blog!

Like it? Please save it!

• About Author
• Latest Posts

Angela E. is a travel writer from the Chicagoland area who has visited all 50 states in the US and has traveled extensively around the world. She is passionate about exploring the great outdoors and hiking in particular. Her love for nature has taken her to some of the most beautiful locations on the planet. She has written extensively about her travels on her own website, Dang Travelers, and has been published in collaboration with other travel websites and multiple visitor bureaus around the country.

Latest posts from Angela

• The Best Road Trips from Chicago with Itineraries - April 15, 2024
• The Best Restaurants in Celebration, Florida - January 15, 2024
• Restaurants Open for Christmas Dinner in Orlando - November 4, 2023

12 Responses

Great post! So much information on this incredible area all in one place. Grinnell Glacier Trail looks epic – and we’ll definitely remember the bear spray!

Quick question: Any idea if there is any dispersed car camping close to the park, BLM land or otherwise? We don’t mind staying in campgrounds when necessary, but we prefer to find seclusion when we possible.

Carmen Edelson

Wow, what a beautiful part of the world! I really want to visit more National Parks this year. How sad though that there was once 150 glaciers here.

Carol Colborn

We went to the Glacier National Park in 2011. I particularly liked Chief Mountain!c

The.Holidaymaker

Love the bear advice, but it is worth it to see those views. Lots of great info and memories of a amazing trip.

Fabulous tips and lodging options! Glacier one of my favorite NPs. We stayed right outside the west entrance in a cabin and the place actually let us check out bear spray to have while we were there which was nice! We, too, brought our passports because did a day trip (albeit a long day) to Banff because my friend had not been! I wish we had been able to take a road trip like you did. We did a road trip through the Badlands (and 4 other states) but I bet Badlands to Glacier to Yellowstone was amazing!

I have been to Glacier National Park for the briefest of moments, after taking the boat ride across from Waterton. I would love to spend more time there and I really want that awesome Instagram shot at Lake McDonald. So sad and rather scary to think that all of the glaciers could be gone within a few decades.

Melody Pittman

Bears? There you go putting a damper on my national park visit. LOL I will get there in 2019 come hell or high water. 🙂 Thanks for the suggestions, I am filing them away.

Lola La Paz

How sad that all the glaciers are disappearing. We mustn’t wait too long before going there. Your pictures are absolutely stunning! I would be a bit scared to run into some bears but on the other hand, it would be such a thrill to see one. (From a bit further away 🙂

I love how you first gave advice for visiting the Park and then launched into your 5-day itinerary; this was very helpful for someone who’s never visited Montana before! If I had 5 days in Glacier National Park, I may spend them all hiking the Many Glacier section. From what you describe, it sounds like this section has the most to offer and could keep a hiker busy for 5 days. I think I would probably spend one or two of those days as “rest” days as well, as I know I would be tired and sore from the longer hikes like the Grinnell Glacier Trail you mention!

Sandy N Vyjay

The National Parks of the US are indeed a treasure of the world and hope they all stay the same and retain their pristine nature. The Glacier National Park looks really beautiful and a place to lose oneself in the arms of nature. This sounds like an excellent itinerary and the tip about the bear spray makes a lot of sense too.

I loved this itinerary! It was so well planned and I really enjoyed all the stops. The hikes were definitely challenging but so worth it!

Sarah Samith

This park looks so great! Would love to have a walk there! Just incredible!

Leave a Reply Cancel reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed .

• Yosemite National Park Tourism
• Yosemite National Park Hotels
• Yosemite National Park Bed and Breakfast
• Yosemite National Park Vacation Rentals
• Flights to Yosemite National Park
• Yosemite National Park Restaurants
• Things to Do in Yosemite National Park
• Yosemite National Park Travel Forum
• Yosemite National Park Photos
• Yosemite National Park Map
• Yosemite Travel Articles
• All Yosemite National Park Hotels
• Yosemite National Park Hotel Deals
• Yosemite National Park
• Things to Do
• Restaurants
• Vacation Rentals
• Travel Stories
• Rental Cars
• Add a Place
• Travel Forum
• Travelers' Choice
• Help Center

Apr 25 2024 update on Tioga Road & Glacier Point Road - Yosemite National Park Forum

• United States    
• California (CA)    
• Yosemite National Park    

Apr 25 2024 update on Tioga Road & Glacier Point Road

• United States Forums
• Europe Forums
• Canada Forums
• Asia Forums
• Central America Forums
• Africa Forums
• Caribbean Forums
• Mexico Forums
• South Pacific Forums
• South America Forums
• Middle East Forums
• Honeymoons and Romance
• Business Travel
• Train Travel
• Traveling With Disabilities
• Tripadvisor Support
• Solo Travel
• Bargain Travel
• Timeshares / Vacation Rentals
• California forums
• Yosemite National Park forum

The NPS has updated the plowing page. The picture is pretty cool!

https://www.nps.gov/yose/planyourvisit/tioga.htm

3 replies to this topic

Anyone willing to venture a guess on when roads will open? I’ll be there in 3 weeks.

• Best route from South Lake Tahoe to Yosemite?? 9:01 pm
• One day - best advice? 2:32 pm
• Mist Trail / JMT: late spring / early summer information 2:18 pm
• Yosemite July 4 today
• JMT Closure yesterday
• Apr 25 2024 update on Tioga Road & Glacier Point Road yesterday
• Itinerary recos for Yosemite in Spring yesterday
• First time visit to YNP in September Apr 25, 2024
• Glacier Point Road advanced notice Apr 25, 2024
• Entrance reservations required Feb & Apr-Oct in 2024 Apr 25, 2024
• Question About Park Entry Pass Apr 25, 2024
• Australian coming to Yosemite for 1st time Apr 25, 2024
• Mariposa Grove shuttle question Apr 25, 2024
• Itinerary in Yosemite 2 nights in August Apr 25, 2024
• Nearest Airport to Yosemite 2 replies
• Place to Stay w/ Kids 8 replies
• Yosemite Mid March 3 replies
• Where to stay when visiting Yosemite 8 replies
• Visiting Yosemite NP in February 10 replies
• Yosemite in early April 2 replies
• Where to fly in 11 replies
• Overnight stop needed between Las Vegas and Yosemite 13 replies
• Yosemite in December 3 replies
• hotel outside park east entrance 9 replies

Yosemite National Park Hotels and Places to Stay

• 2024 updates
• Where do we stay—Inside the park or outside the park?
• How should I book my stay inside Yosemite?
• Trip Reports: What have other travelers done in Yosemite?
• What can I do in Yosemite Valley?
• Itinerary Ideas: Former TripLists
• What can I do along Glacier Point Road?
• Where can I see Giant Sequoias?
• What are good activities for families with children?
• Should I visit on Memorial Day weekend?
• Which Airport?
• Where should we camp?
• Can I see a map of Yosemite?
• Planning a Winter Visit
• Planning a Spring Visit

• Car Rentals
• Airport Transfers
• Attractions & Tours
• Bundle & Save
• Destinations
• Trip.com Rewards

Lhasa Nyingchi 5-Day Itinerary: Discover Tibet's Spiritual and Natural Wonders

by Penelope

April 18, 2024 · 3 min read

Embark on a 5-day spiritual and scenic journey through Lhasa Nyingchi with Trip.com. Your adventure begins with the awe-inspiring Potala Palace, a historic temple that once served as the winter residence of the Dalai Lama. Spend 2 hours soaking in the rich history before stepping out to the Potala Palace Square for a brief 30-minute interlude of grandeur. Next, immerse yourself in the lush landscapes of Norbulingka, the former summer residence of the Dalai Lama, for another 2 hours of exploration. Day 2 deepens your spiritual connection with visits to Jokhang Temple and Ramoche Temple, each offering an hour of cultural enrichment. The day culminates with a 3-hour visit to Sera Monastery, where you can witness the vibrant debates of monks. Day 3 is a full-day retreat to the serene Namtso, a sacred lake known for its crystal-clear waters and stunning backdrop. The natural wonders continue on Day 4 with the tranquil Pagsom Co and the majestic Yarlung Zangbo Grand Canyon, each a full-day excursion into Tibet's unparalleled landscapes. Your final day brings you to the enchanting Lulang Forest for 2 hours of tranquility among the trees, followed by a 1.5-hour visit to the Midui Glacier, where the ice and sky meet. This itinerary promises a blend of cultural heritage and natural beauty, ensuring memories that will last a lifetime.

• Day 1: Majestic Monuments and Serene Squares of Lhasa

Potala Palace

Begin your Lhasa adventure with a visit to the iconic Potala Palace, a majestic temple and historic building that stands as a testament to Tibetan architecture and spirituality. Allow yourself to be immersed in its ancient allure as you spend around 2 hours exploring the intricate murals, exquisite statues, and the rich history encapsulated within its walls. Nestled at No. 35, Beijing Middle Road, Chengguan District, the Potala Palace is not just a destination; it's a journey through time.

Attraction Info

• No. 35, Beijing Middle Road, Chengguan District, Lhasa City
• Suggested tour duration: 2-4 hour
• Open from 05/01-11/14,9:00am-5:00pm;Open from 03/16-04/30,9:30am-5:30pm;Open from 11/15-03/15,9:30am-2:00pm

Recommended Nearby Restaurants

Potala Palace Square

Just a short stroll from the grandeur of Potala Palace, Potala Palace Square awaits to offer you a different perspective of the city. Spend a leisurely 30 minutes in the open embrace of the square, located in the heart of Lhasa's Chengguan District. It's the perfect spot to reflect on the magnificence you've witnessed, capture stunning photographs against the backdrop of the palace, or simply watch the pulse of the city amidst the tranquility of the square.

• (in front of the Potala Palace) Lhasa City Chengguan District
• Suggested tour duration: 0.5-1 hour
• Open 24 hours

Norbulingka

Complete your day with the enchanting beauty of Norbulingka, a landscape garden that once served as the traditional summer residence of the Dalai Lamas. With a stay time of 2 hours, you'll have ample opportunity to wander through its harmonious blend of nature and Tibetan culture. Located on Luodui East Road, Chengguan District, Norbulingka's lush greenery and peaceful atmosphere provide a serene finale to an unforgettable first day in Lhasa.

• Luodui East Road, Chengguan District, Lhasa City
• Suggested tour duration: 2-3 hour
• Open from 9:30am-6:00pm

Where to Stay Tonight

Lhasa hotel vip building, lhasa zedang hotel potala palace.

• Day 2: Spiritual Sojourn in the Heart of Lhasa

Jokhang Temple

Embark on your second day in Lhasa with a serene visit to the Jokhang Temple, a revered sanctuary nestled within the bustling Barkhor Street. As the spiritual center of Tibet, this historic temple offers a profound glimpse into Tibetan Buddhism. Spend an hour absorbing the intricate architecture and the palpable devotion that fills the air, making it an essential experience in your Lhasa exploration.

• Barkhor Street, Chengguan District, Lhasa City
• Suggested tour duration: 1-2 hour
• Open from 12:00pm-6:30pm

Ramoche Temple

A short walk from Jokhang Temple leads you to the sacred Ramoche Temple, another gem in Lhasa's religious tapestry. Dedicate an hour to wander through this spiritual haven, where the ambiance is steeped in history and religious significance. The temple's serene atmosphere and rich cultural heritage make it a peaceful retreat from the city's lively streets.

• Near 41 Xiaozhao Temple Road, Chengguan District, Lhasa City
• Open from 8:30am-4:00pm

Sera Monastery

Conclude your day's spiritual journey with a visit to the majestic Sera Monastery. Set aside three hours to immerse yourself in the monastery's grandeur and witness the famous monk debates that echo through its halls. The combination of religious fervor, educational pursuit, and architectural splendor makes Sera Monastery a highlight of your Lhasa itinerary.

• No.1, Sela Road, Lhasa Chengguan District, Lhasa City
• Suggested tour duration: 3-4 hour
• Open from 8:30am-5:00pm

Lhasa Yuyue Hotel

Padma chumig garden hotel.

• Day 3: Embracing the Serenity of Namtso

Kicking off the third day of our Lhasa Nyingchi journey, we venture into the celestial embrace of Namtso. Nestled within the vast expanses of the Namtso National Park in Dangxiong County, this sacred lake is a jewel of Lhasa City. A full day's stay allows travelers to fully immerse in the tranquility and awe-inspiring beauty that Namtso offers. Known as the 'Heavenly Lake', Namtso captivates with its crystal-clear waters that reflect the azure skies above, creating a mirage of the heavens on earth. Surrounded by the majestic Nyenchen Tanglha mountain range, the lake is a sanctuary for both the soul and the senses. As you stroll along its shores, the spiritual atmosphere and the breathtaking vistas form a symphony of natural splendor, promising an unforgettable experience in the heart of Tibet.

• Namtso National Park, Dangxiong County, Lhasa City
• Suggested tour duration: 1-2 days
• Open from 01/01-03/15,10:00am-9:00pm;Open from 03/16-10/31,8:00am-9:00pm;Open from 11/01-12/31,8:30am-9:00pm

• Day 4: Serene Waters and Majestic Canyons

Begin your day with the tranquil beauty of Pagsom Co, a pristine alpine lake nestled in the bosom of Gongbo'gyamda. As the morning sun casts its golden glow over the water, the lake becomes a mirror reflecting the surrounding mountains and skies. Spend your day exploring the natural splendor of this hidden gem, where the air is fresh and the scenery is a tapestry of vibrant colors. Whether you choose to hike along its shores or simply bask in the peaceful ambiance, Pagsom Co promises a serene escape from the hustle of travel.

• Basong Co, Gongbo'gyamda, Nyingchi, China
• Suggested tour duration: 0.5-1 day
• Open from 05/01-10/31,8:30am-8:30pm;Open from 11/01-04/30,9:00am-6:30pm

Yarlung Zangbo Grand Canyon

In the afternoon, prepare to have your breath taken away at the Yarlung Zangbo Grand Canyon. Carved by the mighty Yarlung Zangbo River, this canyon is one of the deepest and most spectacular in the world. The journey here is as remarkable as the destination, with each twist and turn presenting a new vista more stunning than the last. Allocate a full day to immerse yourself in the grandeur of its towering cliffs, diverse ecosystems, and the rich cultural heritage of the region. The Yarlung Zangbo Grand Canyon is not just a natural wonder, but a profound experience that will resonate with you long after your visit.

• Mainling, Nyingchi, Tibet, China
• Open from 3/28-09/30,9:30am-6:30pm;Open from 10/01-3/27,8:30am-6:00pm

Mirin Huashan Hotel

Himalaya namjagbarwa tented hotel.

• Day 5: Embracing Nature's Majesty in Lhasa Nyingchi

Lulang Forest

As the sun rises on the fifth day of our Lhasa Nyingchi adventure, we begin with the enchanting Lulang Forest, a natural wonder that promises to rejuvenate your spirit. Nestled along the 318 National Road, this forest is a tapestry of vibrant greenery, where the air is perfumed with the scent of wildflowers and pine. A two-hour stroll through Lulang Forest is not just a walk among trees; it's an immersive experience in an ecosystem where the whispers of the wind tell ancient tales. The panoramic views of the forest against the backdrop of majestic mountains are a photographer's paradise and a nature lover's dream.

• 318 National Rd, Bayi Qu, Linzhi Shi, Xizang Zizhiqu, China
• Open from 6:00am-6:00pm

Midui Glacier

Following the forest's embrace, we ascend to the awe-inspiring Midui Glacier, located in the serene Bome County of Nyingchi. This natural ice sculpture is a testament to the Earth's raw beauty, accessible after a 1.5-hour journey that is as breathtaking as the destination itself. The Midui Glacier, with its towering ice peaks and crystal-clear glacial lakes, is one of Tibet's most pristine wonders. Visitors are often left speechless by the contrast of the rugged glacier against the softness of the surrounding alpine blooms. This is a place where the power of nature can be felt through the crisp glacial air and the thunderous silence of the high-altitude serenity.

• Bome, Nyingchi, Tibet, China
• Suggested tour duration: 1.5-2 hour
• Open from 8:30am-6:00pm

Basu Longwang Island Hotel

Basu tang dynasty inn.

* All user reviews in this article have been translated by machine.

* The information above is subject to change at any time. For the latest information, please check the websites of hotels and attractions.

<h3>Trending Searches</h3>

Popular Content

• Zhangye 3 Days Itinerary
• Beijing 3 Days Itinerary
• Huludao 2 Days Itinerary
• Savusavu 1 Day Itinerary
• Caylloma Province 1 Day Itinerary
• Manukau 1 Day Itinerary
• Metropolitan City of Genoa Rome 3 Days Itinerary
• Xiapu 1 Day Itinerary
• Hyderabad 3 Days Itinerary
• Sevier County 1 Day Itinerary
• Merida 1 Day Itinerary
• Pingtan 1 Day Itinerary
• Polonnaruwa 1 Day Itinerary
• Washington D.C. New York 2 Days Itinerary
• Chun'an 3 Days Itinerary
• Fukuoka 3 Days Itinerary
• Changsha 3 Days Itinerary
• Kunming Yuxi 5 Days Itinerary
• Daocheng 1 Day Itinerary
• Baoshan 1 Day Itinerary
• Customer Support
• Service Guarantee
• More Service Info
• Website Feedback
• About Trip.com
• Terms & Conditions
• Privacy Statement
• About Trip.com Group

Other Services

• Investor Relations
• Affiliate Program
• List My Property
• Become a Supplier